JBL Home Theater System CVPD50 User Manual

CVPD50

50-INCH HIGH-DEFINITION

PLASMA DISPLAY

CVR700

HIGH-PERFORMANCE

AUDIO/VIDEO RECEIVER/VIDEO

PROCESSOR/OPTICAL DISC

CHANGER

OWNER’S GUIDE

JBL CINEMA VISION^™SYSTEM

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programming Product Codes

Direct Code Entry

Auto Search Method

Learning Codes

Erasing Learned Codes

Macros

Programmed Device Functions

Volume Punch-Through

Channel Control Punch-Through

Transport Control Punch-Through

Resetting the Remote Memory

CVR700R1 Remote Function List Table

CVR700R1 Remote Setup Code Tables

109 Troubleshooting Guide

110 System Reset

111 Technical Specifications

113 Index

See trademark acknowledgements on page 114.

Typographical Conventions

In order to help you use this manual with the remote controls, front-panel controls and

rear-panel connections, certain conventions have been used.

EXAMPLE – (bold type) indicates a specific remote control or front-panel button or

indicator, or rear-panel connection jack

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock,

do not remove cover (or back).

No user-serviceable parts inside.

EXAMPLE– (OCR type) indicates a message that is visible on the front-panel

information display or screen

Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

CAUTION: To prevent electric shock,

do not use this (polarized) plug with

an extension cord, receptacle or other outlet

unless the blades can be fully inserted to

prevent blade exposure.

EXAMPLE – (Synchro type) indicates a message that is visible on the CVR700R2

remote’s LCD display

1– (number in a square) indicates a specific front-panel control

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

a– (number in an oval) indicates a button or indicator on the CVR700R2 remote

control

enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute

a risk of electric shock to persons.

¡ – (number in a circle) indicates a rear-panel connection

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and

A– (letter in a square) indicates an indicator in the front-panel information display

– (number in a triangle) indicates a button or an indicator on the CVR700R1 remote

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the appliance.

control

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

read first!Important Safety Precautions!

1. Read these instructions.

2. Keep these instructions.

3. Heed all warnings.

intended to operate from battery power,

or other sources, refer to the operating

instructions.

21. The apparatus shall not be exposed

to dripping or splashing, and no objects

filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be

placed on the apparatus.

17. If an outside antenna or cable system

is connected to the product, be sure the

antenna or cable system is grounded so

as to provide some protection against

voltage surges and built-up static

charges. Article 810 of the National

Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides

information with regard to proper ground-

ing of the mast and supporting structure,

grounding of the lead-in wire to an

antenna discharge unit, size of grounding

conductors, location of antenna-dis-

charge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the

grounding electrode. See Figure A.

4. Follow all instructions.

22. Do not attempt to service this product

yourself, as opening or removing covers

may expose you to dangerous voltage or

other hazards. Refer all servicing to quali-

fied service personnel.

5. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6. Clean only with a dry cloth.

7. Do not block any ventilation openings.

Install in accordance with the manufac-

turer’s instructions.

23. When replacement parts are

required, be sure the service technician

has used replacement parts specified by

the manufacturer or that have the same

characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in

fire, electric shock or other hazards.

8. Do not install near any heat sources

such as radiators, heat registers, stoves

or other apparatus (including amplifiers)

that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of

the polarized or grounding-type plug.

A polarized plug has two blades with one

wider than the other. A grounding-type

plug has two blades and a third ground-

ing prong. The wide blade or the third

prong are provided for your safety. If the

provided plug does not fit into your out-

let, consult an electrician for replacement

of the obsolete outlet.

24. Upon completion of any service or

repairs to this product, ask the service

technician to perform safety checks to

determine that the product is in proper

operating condition.

18. An outside antenna system should

not be located in the vicinity of overhead

power lines or other electric light or

power circuits, or where it can fall into

such power lines or circuits. When

installing an outside antenna system,

extreme care should be taken to keep

from touching such power lines or circuits,

as contact with them might be fatal.

25. The product should be mounted to a

wall or ceiling only as recommended by

the manufacturer.

10. Protect the power cord from being

walked on or pinched, particularly at

plugs, convenience receptacles and the

point where they exit from the apparatus.

19. Do not overload wall outlets, exten-

sion cords, or integral convenience recep-

tacles, as this can result in a risk of fire

or electric shock.

11. Only use attachments/accessories

specified by the manufacturer.

20. Never push objects of any kind into

this product through openings, as they

may touch dangerous voltage points or

short-out parts that could result in a fire

or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any

kind on the product.

12. Use only with the cart,

stand, tripod, bracket or

table specified by the manu-

facturer or sold with the

apparatus. When a cart is used,

use caution when moving the cart/appa-

ratus combination to avoid injury from

tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during light-

ning storms or when unused for long

periods of time.

Figure A.

Example of Antenna Grounding as per

National ElectricalCode ANSI/NFPA 70

14. Refer all servicing to qualified serv-

ice personnel. Servicing is required when

the apparatus has been damaged in any

way, such as power-supply cord or plug

is damaged, liquid has been spilled or

objects have fallen into the apparatus,

the apparatus has been exposed to rain

or moisture, does not operate normally,

or has been dropped.

Antenna Lead-In Wire

Ground Clamp

Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810-20)

Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810-21)

Electric Service Equipment

Ground Clamps

15. Do not use attachments not recom-

mended by the product manufacturer, as

they may cause hazards.

Power Service Grounding Electrode System

(NEC Art. 250, Part H)

16. This product should be operated only

from the type of power source indicated

on the marking label. If you are not sure

of the type of power supply to your

home, consult your product dealer or

local power company. For products

Part No. HCGUL1492/6500 04/2004 EN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing JBL . The JBL

but purists may manually set the proces-

sor to display 4:3 video images without

scaling or adjustment. The CVPD50 offers

stunning picture quality, even under nor-

mal lighting conditions, thanks to its

audio/video source inputs for two record-

ing devices, a cable television/satellite

receiver/HDTV tuner, a personal computer

and an auxiliary device. A sixth source

may be connected to the front-panel

jacks, which include not only analog

audio and video inputs, but S-video, com-

ponent video and optical and coaxial digi-

tal audio inputs. A front-panel optical dig-

ital audio output enables recording with

compatible portable devices. Dedicated

rear-panel digital audio inputs (4 optical

and 4 coaxial) are pre-assigned to the

sources, and 2 outputs (1 optical and 1

coaxial) are also provided. An HDCP

(high-definition copy-protected) DVI video

input may be used with a DVI-enabled

HDTV tuner, a satellite or cable set-top

box, or a DVD player, or with a personal

computer featuring a DVI or Analog VGA

video output. A composite video input

may be used with the PIP (picture-in-pic-

ture) function for simultaneous viewing of

two video sources using either a tradi-

tional small screen inset or a split screen.

™

Cinema Vision home theater system is

truly an entertainment system for the

21st century. JBL Cinema Vision is a com-

plete, integrated audio/video system that

combines the sophisticated performance

of separate components with the conven-

ience of a turnkey solution. The system

includes a 50-inch high-definition plasma

display monitor and an audio/video sys-

tem controller that contains a 5-disc

DVD-Audio/DVD-Video/CD changer, high-

performance A/V receiver and a video

processor. The multichannel loudspeaker

system is designed to acoustically, elec-

trically and visually complement the JBL

Cinema Vision source and video compo-

nents. Satellites and the center feature

common voicing, dual-neodymium-driver

satellites, and a 1-inch titanium-laminate

tweeter. The subwoofer features a 400-

watt RMS power amplifier and a 12-inch

cast-basket woofer.

3,000:1 contrast ratio and 1,000cd/m

brightness rating. The digital video

processor on board the CVR700 outputs

a digital video signal via a single, propri-

etary connection to the CVPD50 display.

(The CVPD50 display requires the CVR700

control center for operation.)

CVR700 7 x 100 Watts System

Control Center

The CVR700 is a unique multifeatured

component, combining audio and video

source selection and processing with a

five-disc magazine changer capable of

playing DVD-Audio, DVD-Video, CD, CD-

R/RW, DVD+R/RW, DVD-R/RW, MP3,

WMA, Kodak Picture CD, VCD and JPEG

discs. Video playback using the internal

DVD changer is of the highest quality,

benefiting from pixel-by-pixel processing

and digital output to the plasma display.

The CVR700 is capable of reconstructing

the 3/2 pulldown effect introduced when

film-based programs are transferred to

video. In conjunction with precision video

output DACs, the result is a full 60-frame-

per-second image that is the closest thing

to film this side of your local cinema.

This manual describes the CVR700 con-

trol center, and the CVPD50 50-inch high-

definition plasma display. Together with

the CVSAT50, CVCEN50 and CVSUB50

loudspeakers, the JBL Cinema Vision sys-

tem delivers a complete home theater

experience, including high-quality play-

back of most optical discs.

A universal remote control operates all

devices, and may be programmed to

operate other components in your sys-

tem, such as a VCR, personal video

recorder (PVR), or other devices. The main

remote control is easy to program using

its two-line LCD text display. A second,

simplified remote is also included.

The CVPD50 and CVR700 have been engi-

neered so that it is easy to take advan-

tage of all of the power of their digital

technology. However, to obtain the maxi-

mum enjoyment from your new home the-

ater system, we urge you to read this

manual. A few minutes spent learning

the functions of the various controls will

enable you to take advantage of all the

power these components are able to

deliver.

The audio section includes all of the lat-

est surround sound processing formats,

including Dolby* Digital, Dolby Pro Logic*

Simple to Install and Use

The JBL Cinema Vision system is

IIx, Dolby Headphone, DTS , DTS-ES ,

designed for easy installation and simple

operation. Its sophisticated processing

capabilities operate automatically, trans-

parent to the user. The JBL On Screen

DTS Neo:6 , DTS 96/24 and Logic 7 .

High-efficiency digital amplifiers are

designed to match the characteristics of

the JBL Cinema Vision speakers, preserv-

ing signal quality and delivering the

power and fidelity you expect from JBL.

™

Library display of loaded discs simplifies

navigation and selection of desired pro-

gram material. With state-of-the-art

audio and video components, the JBL

Cinema Vision home theater system is

the perfect combination of the latest digi-

tal audio and video technologies in an

elegant, easy-to-use package.

If you have any questions about these

products, their installation or operation,

please contact your retailer or custom

installer, as they are your best local

sources of information.

In addition to providing a wide array

of listening and viewing options, the

CVR700 is easy to configure so that it

provides the best results for your specific

listening environment and viewing prefer-

ences. On-screen menus make it simple

to customize system settings, on-screen

status banners streamline user interac-

tion, and the EzSet remote automatically

measures and calibrates sound levels

for a perfectly balanced sound field

presentation.

I 50" True high-definition plasma display

with ultrawide viewing angle

CVPD50 50-Inch High-Definition

Plasma Display Monitor

I 3,000:1 contrast ratio and 1,000cd/m

The CVPD50 is a state-of-the-art, true

high-definition plasma display that may

be used to display HDTV cable or satellite

television signals, as well as movies

played using the CVR700’s internal DVD

changer, or it may be used with a person-

al computer, as well as other external

devices such as video gaming consoles

and recording devices. The sophisticated

processor automatically configures 4:3

video sources for full-screen 16:9 display,

brightness

I 7 x 100W digital control center with

an audio/video receiver, video proces-

sor and DVD changer

Although the CVR700 is designed to be

used with the internal DVD changer and

CVPD50 display, it also includes a full

complement of inputs and outputs that

are normally found only on standalone

audio/video receivers. It includes

I A wide range of digital and matrix sur-

round modes, including Dolby Digital,

Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic II

and IIx, DTS, DTS-ES Discrete and

Matrix, DTS 96/24, DTS Neo:6, Logic 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(5.1 and 7.1, Cinema and Music

modes)

I Seven channels of amplification

I Internal five-disc changer plays DVD-

Audio, DVD-Video, CD, VCD, CD-

R/RW, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, MP3,

WMA, Kodak Picture CD and JPEG

discs

I Extensive bass management options,

including quadruple crossover and

EzSet output-level calibration

I Six A/V inputs with composite video

and S-video, three HDTV-compatible

component (Y/Pr/Pb) inputs, one DVI

input

I Ten digital audio inputs, including

front-panel optical and coaxial inputs

I Front-panel component video inputs, in

addition to conventional audio/video

and S-video inputs

I Picture-in-picture capability for simul-

taneous viewing of two video sources

I Accommodates 4:3 aspect ratio pro-

grams, with intelligent options for fit-

ting to 16:9 full-screen display

I Universal programmable learning

remote with LCD text display

I Secondary remote for everyday use

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAFETY INFORMATION

Verify Line Voltage Before Use

Your CVR700 and CVPD50 have been

designed for use with 120-volt AC cur-

rent, and the plugs are specifically

designed for 120-volt applications.

Connection to a line voltage other than

that for which the unit is intended can

create a safety and fire hazard and may

damage the unit.

Installation Location

Unpacking

I To ensure proper operation, and to

avoid the potential for safety hazards,

place the unit on a firm and level sur-

face. When placing the unit on a shelf,

be certain that the shelf and any

mounting hardware can support the

weight of the product.

Cartons and shipping materials used to

protect your new system components

during shipment are specially designed to

cushion them from shock and vibration.

We suggest that you save the carton and

packing materials for use in shipping if

you move, or should the unit ever need

repair.

I Make certain that proper space is pro-

vided both above and below the unit

for ventilation. If this product will be

installed in a cabinet or other

enclosed area, make certain that there

is sufficient air movement within the

cabinet.

If you have any questions about the volt-

age requirements for your specific model,

or about the line voltage in your area,

contact your selling dealer before plug-

ging the unit into a wall outlet.

To minimize the size of the cartons in

storage, you may wish to flatten them.

This is done by carefully slitting the tape

seams on the bottom, and collapsing the

carton down to a more two-dimensional

appearance. Other cardboard inserts may

be stored in the same manner. Packing

materials that cannot be collapsed should

be saved along with the carton in a

plastic bag.

Do Not Use Extension Cords

I Do not place the unit directly on a

carpeted surface.

We do not recommend that extension

cords be used with this product. As with

all electrical devices, do not run power

cords under rugs or carpets or place

heavy objects on them. Damaged power

cords should be replaced immediately by

an authorized service center with cords

meeting factory specifications.

I Avoid moist or humid locations.

I Avoid installation in extremely hot or

cold locations, or an area that is

exposed to direct sunlight or heating

equipment.

If you do not wish to save the packaging

materials, please note that the carton

and other sections of the shipping protec-

tion are recyclable. Please respect the

environment and discard those materials

at a local recycling center.

I Do not obstruct the ventilation slots

on the sides of the unit, or place

objects directly over them.

Handle the AC Power Cord Gently

When disconnecting the power cord from

an AC outlet, always pull the plug; never

pull the cord. If you do not intend to use

the unit for any considerable length of

time, disconnect the plug from the AC

outlet.

Cleaning

When the unit gets dirty, wipe it with a

clean, soft, dry cloth. If necessary, wipe

it with a soft cloth dampened with mild

soapy water, then a fresh cloth with

clean water. Wipe immediately with a

dry cloth. NEVER use benzene, aerosol

cleaners, thinner, alcohol or any volatile

cleaning agent. Do not use abrasive

cleaners, as they may damage the finish

of metal parts. Avoid spraying insecticide

near the unit.

Important Note for CVPD50 Plasma

Display: Always make sure that two

people lift the CVPD50 plasma display

together. Never attempt to lift the unit by

yourself. Failure to follow this instruc-

tion may result in personal injury or

irreparable damage to the unit that is

not covered under warranty.

Do Not Open the Cabinet

There are no user-serviceable compo-

nents inside this product. Opening the

cabinet may present a shock hazard, and

any modification to the product will void

your guarantee. If water or any metal

object such as a paper clip, wire or a

staple accidentally falls inside the unit,

disconnect it from the AC power source

immediately, and consult an authorized

service center.

Remove Front-Panel Protective Film

In order to protect the lens covering the

front panel of your new CVR700, it is

shipped from the factory covered by a

protective plastic film. Before using the

unit, remove this film by grabbing one

corner and gently peeling back the plastic

sheet. Note that the film must be

removed for proper operation of the

remote control.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Moving the Unit

Important Information for the User

The CVR700 and CVPD50 have been tested

and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B device, pursuant to Part 15 of

FCC Regulations 47. Operation is subject

to the following conditions: (1) These

devices may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) these devices must accept

interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

These limits are designed to provide rea-

sonable protection against harmful inter-

ference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate

radio-frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio communication. However,

there is no guarantee that harmful inter-

ference will not occur in a particular

installation. If this equipment does cause

harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on, the

user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the

The following is important safety infor-

mation that you should read carefully in

order to prevent the possibility of person-

al injury to yourself or others, or damage

to the equipment. Errors in installation or

connection may lead to damage to the

CVPD50, the CVR700 or other devices in

your system.

Before moving any of the units, be certain

to disconnect any interconnection cords

with other components, and make certain

that you disconnect the unit from the

AC outlet.

Important Note for CVPD50 Plasma

Display: Always make sure that two

people lift the CVPD50 plasma display

together. Never attempt to lift the unit by

yourself. Failure to follow this instruc-

tion may result in personal injury or

irreparable damage to the unit that is

not covered under warranty.

Never allow children to use the CVPD50,

CVR700 or any other electrical appliances

without supervision. Take care to install

these devices where they are safe from

children and pets.

Never operate the CVPD50 plasma dis-

play in environmental conditions other

than those listed in the technical specifi-

cations on pages 111–112 of this manual.

IMPORTANT NOTE: To avoid damage to

the CVR700 that may not be covered by

the warranty, be certain that all discs are

removed from the unit before it is tilted

in place or moved. Once the CVR700 is

installed, a disc may be left in the unit

when it is turned off, but the unit should

NEVER be tilted or moved with a disc

left in the changer. Failure to do so

may result in discs becoming dis-

lodged and jamming the mechanism

which will require that the unit be

returned to an authorized service

facility for repair.

Protect the CVPD50 plasma display and

the CVR700 from moisture, including high

levels of humidity, proximity to standing

water, dripping water, spray water and

rain. Do not install this equipment out-

doors, near a hot tub or in a bathroom.

Do not put any vessels that are filled

with water, such as vases, on the unit. If

you connect an external antenna to any

device connected to the CVR700, ensure

that no water can penetrate the cable.

following measures:

I Reorient or relocate the receiving

antenna.

I Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

Protect this equipment from heat, heat

accumulation and direct sunlight. Avoid

placing the unit near fire, heat sources or

ovens. Maintain sufficient space on all

sides of the unit for proper ventilation.

Do not drape curtains over the unit. Do

not mount the unit in an enclosed

cabinet or wall.

I Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to which

the receiver is connected.

I Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

NOTE: Changes or modifications may

cause these units to fail to comply with

Part 15 of the FCC Rules and may void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Failure to follow these instructions

may lead to personal injury or death

due to electric shock and/or fire

caused by overheating, and/or

irreparable damage to the unit that

is not covered under warranty.

CAUTION: The CVR700 uses a laser sys-

tem. To prevent direct exposure to the

laser beam, do not open the cabinet

enclosure or defeat any of the safety

mechanisms provided for your protection.

DO NOT STARE INTO THE LASER BEAM.

To ensure proper use of this product,

please read this owner’s manual carefully

and retain it for future use. Should the

unit require maintenance or repair, please

contact your local JBL service center. Refer

servicing to qualified personnel only.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power Connection and Operator

Control

The CVPD50 plasma display is equipped

with an attached glass filter plate. If the

unit is exposed to excessive stress, e.g.

due to shock, vibration, bending or heat,

the glass surface can break. Do not sub-

ject the glass surface to any pressure or

knocks. If the glass is cracked, unplug the

power cord immediately. Do not touch the

fragments with your bare hands. Failure

to follow these instructions may

result in personal injury due to

The CVPD50 plasma display and the

CVR700 are completely disconnected

from electrical power only when the

power cables are removed from both

units and/or the wall outlets, and the

™

JBL Digital Link cable connecting the

CVR700 to CVPD50 is unplugged. Only

connect the CVPD50 plasma display and

the CVR700 to a plug receptacle that has

been installed in compliance with local

regulations regarding proper grounding,

and which provides 120V. Make sure that

the power plug and outlet are accessible

at all times.

sharp-edged glass fragments.

Always make sure that two people lift

the CVPD50 plasma display together.

Never attempt to lift the unit by yourself.

Failure to follow this instruction may

result in personal injury or irrepara-

ble damage to the unit that is not

covered under warranty.

Use only the power cord supplied with

the CVPD50 plasma display. Never

remove the plug from the outlet by

pulling on the cable. Do not run the

power cord near heat-producing objects.

If you will be away for an extended period

of time, it is a good idea to unplug the

units and any antennae. It is also a good

idea to do the same before any thunder-

storms. This is a precautionary measure

to prevent the possibility of personal

injury or death due to fire or electric

shock resulting from a lightning strike,

and to prevent damage to the unit.

Always power off all units and unplug

them before connecting them to each

other.

Failure to follow this instruction may

result in personal injury due to elec-

trical shock or fire, and/or irrepara-

ble damage to the unit that is not

covered under warranty.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

One JBL Digital Link cable to connect the CVPD50 screen

to the CVR700 (3 meters; 5- and 10-meter lengths available

separately), packed with CVPD50

What’s Included

CVPD50 Carton Contents:

One CVPD50 50-Inch Plasma Display Screen (shown with

credenza stand)

One VGA to DVI cable for analog PCs (3 meters), packed with

CVPD50

CVR700 Carton Contents:

One CVR700 audio/video receiver/video processor/optical disc

changer with owner’s guide, quick-start guide and warranty

cards.

AUDIO

VIDEO RECEIVER

VIDEO PROCESSOR OPTICAL DISC CHANGER

DVD

SVCD P-SCAN

PCM 192K 96K

RANDOM PROGRAM

RPERAT DISC ALL

MP3 6:9 4:3

DIGITAL EX

PRO LOGIC II

96/24

NEO:6

LOGIC

SBL

SBR

57CH. STEREO

DSP SURR.

One wall-mount bracket for the CVPD50 screen

One AM loop antenna

One FM antenna

One power cord for the CVPD50 screen (packed with CVPD50)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

What’s Included (continued)

One CVR700R2 remote control

One CVR700R1 remote control

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DISC FORMATS SUPPORTED BY THIS PLAYER

The unit can play the following types of

discs:

Audio CD Compatibility:

ture or soundtrack option is available,

please check the options noted on the

disc jacket.

• 8cm (3") or 12cm (5") discs

• Linear PCM digital audio

• Playback capability for CD- or DVD-

recordable discs may vary due to varia-

tions in the quality of the disc and the

recorder used to create the disc.

• Audio CDs are divided into tracks

CD-R/RW Compatibility:

DVD

8cm (3") disc

12cm (5") disc

8cm (3") disc

12cm (5") disc

• 12cm (5") discs

• Linear PCM, MP3 (32kbps – 320kbps)

• The CVR700 is compatible with most

discs recorded with files encoded using

MP3 or Windows Media 9, as well as

JPEG still images. However, note that

variations in the encoder or codec used

and the bit rate of the encoding may

affect the CVR700’s ability to play back

a specific disc. As a result, we cannot

guarantee complete compatibility with

all encoders and versions of the codecs.

For best results, we recommend that

MP3 files be encoded at bit rates rang-

ing between 32kbps and 320kbps.

WMA files should be encoded at bit

rates between 16kbps and 192kbps.

JPEG files should contain no more than

5 megapixels, and the file size should

be no larger than 5Mb.

or Windows Media WMA (16kbps –

The CVR700 will also play most DVD-

Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R or

DVD+RW blank discs, but we cannot guar-

antee complete playback compatibility of

DVD-recordable discs due to the wide

variation in recorders and blank discs.

192kbps) digital audio

• May contain JPEG still images (up to

5 megapixels, file size up to 5mb)

• Linear PCM discs are generally divided

into tracks like an audio CD. MP3,

WMA and JPEG discs (or discs that

contain more than one of these for-

mats) are divided into files, which may

be organized into folders, depending on

how the disc was created.

ReWritable

VCD Compatibility:

CD-RW

12cm (5") 8cm (3")

CD-R

VCD

8cm (3")

12cm (5") 12cm (5")

• 12cm (5") discs

• Linear PCM, MP1 (MPEG-1, Layer 1),

MP3 (MPEG-1, Layer 3) digital audio

• MPEG-1 digital video

• May contain JPEG still images (Video

CD Version 2.0)

• Some discs may contain menus and

chapters, while other discs simply con-

tain tracks. Version 2.0 discs may offer

interactive playback control (PBC).

NOTE: Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs

created on a computer requires proper

formatting and finalization of the disc for

audio playback. Some computers and/or

software programs may not be capable of

creating compatible discs.

Note on DVD-Audio Discs: Due to the

newness of this format and some author-

ing issues, it is possible that some DVD-

Audio discs will not play, or that all fea-

tures and menus may not be available.

Note that in many cases, in order to

DVD-Video Disc Compatibility:

However, it will NOT play the following:

access the disc menu, instead of pressing

• 8cm (3") or 12cm (5") discs

• Single-sided or double-sided discs

• Single-layer or dual-layer discs

• Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG or Linear

PCM digital audio tracks

the Menu Button j

, it is neces-

• DVD discs with a Region Code other

than that indicated on the rear panel

• DVD-ROM data discs

• DVD-RAM discs

• CD-I discs

• CD-G discs

sary to press the Title Button yor the

Audio Button U. In addition, many

DVD-Audio discs provide two menus: a

DVD-Audio menu and a DVD-Video menu

intended for use on older players that do

not support the DVD-Audio format. If you

wish to view the DVD-Video menu and

access surround modes and other fea-

tures only available through that menu

(such as Dolby Digital 5.1 or PCM audio

tracks), you will need to temporarily dis-

able the CVR700’s DVD-Audio capability

using the DVD Setup menu (see Fig. 31).

• MPEG-2 digital video

• Discs are generally divided into one or

more titles, which may be further sub-

divided into chapters.

• SVCD discs

• Kodak Photo CD discs (Kodak Picture

CD discs, which are available to con-

sumers, contain files in the JPEG for-

mat which may be viewed using the

CVR700.)

DVD-Audio Disc Compatibility:

• 8cm (3") or 12cm (5") discs

• Single-sided discs

• Single-layer or dual-layer discs

• Linear or packed PCM digital audio

• Some discs may contain MPEG-2 video,

and Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG digital

audio

• Discs are generally divided into one or

more groups, which may be further

subdivided into tracks.

NOTE: Due to differences in the format-

ting of certain discs, it is possible that

some discs may include features that

are not compatible with the CVR700.

Similarly, although the CVR700 is capable

of a wide range of features, not all discs

include every capability of the DVD sys-

tem. For example, although the CVR700 is

compatible with multi-angle discs, that

feature is only possible when the disc is

specially encoded for multiple-angle play.

In addition, the CVR700 is capable of

playing back both Dolby Digital and DTS

soundtracks, but the number and types of

tracks available will vary from disc to

disc. To make certain that a specific fea-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TERMINOLOGY

Home theater equipment has changed a

great deal since the first VCR was intro-

duced about 30 years ago. Some of the

terms used to describe and configure

your CVPD50 PDP plasma display monitor

and the internal DVD/CD changer in your

CVR700 may be unfamiliar. Some of

Aspect Ratio: This is a description of

the width of a video image in relation to

its height. A conventional video screen is

four units wide for every three units of

height, making it almost square. Newer

wide-aspect-ratio video displays are 16

units wide for every nine units of height,

making them more like the screen in a

movie theater. The program material on a

DVD may be recorded in either format.

video signal is of higher resolution

than 480i or DVI, you may need to

repeatedly press the Letterbox

Button z

on your remote con-

trol to select either the “2.35 LTRBOX

TO 16:9” or “2.35 LB TO 16:9

CROPPED” mode, choosing the mode

that provides the picture most pleas-

ing to you. Note that the cropped

mode may leave out portions of the

frame in order to fit the image to the

screen, and you may prefer the scaled

mode, even though black bars will

appear on the top and bottom of your

screen.

these terms are described in this section.

Since they share some of the characteris-

tics and technology of CD players, many

of the terms and operational concepts

used in a DVD player are similar to what

you may be familiar with from CD players

and changers, or older video disc formats

such as Laser Disc. However, if this is

your first DVD product, some of the terms

used to describe the features of a DVD

player may be unfamiliar. The following

explanations should solve some of the

mysteries of DVD, and help you to enjoy

all the power and flexibility of the DVD

format and the CVR700.

NOTES:

I Due to the advent of HD (high-defini-

tion) programming and the new 16:9

(also called 1.85 or widescreen) aspect

ratio, many newer sources now offer

their own scaling (resizing of the pic-

ture to fit a frame) options which are

accessed through their remote or

through their on-screen menu. To take

advantage of CVR700’s robust scaling

capabilities, it is best to allow the

CVR700 to handle all rescaling duties.

This means that all high-definition

external sources connected to CVR700

should be configured to supply a 16:9

picture to CVR700 if at all possible

and all non-HD legacy sources should

supply their native 4:3 (otherwise

called 1.33 or FULL SCREEN) aspect

ratio (with older devices, there are

usually no adjustments or options for

picture size, anyway). Regarding HD

sources, some experimentation may

be necessary, as not all offer a basic

16:9 aspect ratio option without other

parameter settings. The correct mode

may be called 16:9 FULL SCREEN in

some brand products; in other brand

products, you may need to select the

16:9 aspect ratio separately from

selecting FULL SCREEN scaling. Some

experimentation with the settings on

your source device may be necessary

to find the most pleasing appearance.

If you have turned off the DVD Auto

Resize feature, you may also choose how

to view 4:3 ratio images. You may view

the image as is, in which case black bars

will appear on the left and right sides of

the screen. You may set the system to

stretch the image to fill the screen, using

either linear (the stretch is even across

the entire image) or non-linear (the

stretch is more pronounced towards the

edges of the image, leaving the center

nearly unmodified) scaling. When the

4:3 ratio image consists of a letterboxed

movie, you may simply zoom in to remove

the black bars at the top and bottom of

the screen.

With the arrival of DVD, disc data capaci-

ty has increased dramatically. On a DVD

Video disc, most of this capacity is taken

up by MPEG 2 video and the multichannel

movie soundtrack in Dolby Digital and/or

DTS. This information is compressed. But

with DVD Audio, most of this capacity is

available for music only, without any

compression. This allows us to put the

audio information on the disc in the same

quality as the original mastering in the

studio, in PCM up to 24-bit/192kHz.

Chapter: DVD programs are divided into

chapters and titles. Chapters are the sub-

sections programmed into a single title

on a disc. Chapters may be compared to

the individual tracks on an audio CD.

Press the Menu Button

to see

DVD-Audio’s 24-bit system provides sub-

stantially improved resolution of fine

detail, because it describes a specific

point in the musical information using

a 24-digit-long string of ones and zeros

with 16,777,216 possible combinations,

while CD’s primitive 16-bit system offers

only 65,536 options. The 192kHz frequency

allows us to have fast changes in music

made audible, which results in more

dynamism, and also allows us to obtain a

higher bandwidth, up to 96kHz. Although

that is far beyond the human audible

spectrum, it still improves the musical

realism.

a listing of the chapters on a disc. On

DVD-Audio discs, a Chapter is referred

to as a Track.

Component Video: This form of video

signal eliminates many of the artifacts of

traditional composite video signals by

splitting the signal into a separate lumi-

nance channel (the Y signal channel) and

two color-difference signals (the Pr and

Pb signal channels). With a component

video connection, you will see greater

picture resolution and eliminate many

picture imperfections such as the moiré

patterns often seen on check-patterned

cloth. However, in order to benefit from

component video you must have a video

display with Y/Pr/Pb component video

inputs. Do not connect the component

video outputs of the CVR700 to the stan-

dard composite or S-video inputs of a

TV or recorder.

I There are two film formats commonly

used in movie theaters today that are

close to the 16:9 aspect ratio of your

CVPD50 screen – 1.85:1 and 2.35:1.

The aspect ratio of your screen is

1.78:1, which is very close to the

1.85:1 film ratio that is found in many

movies recorded on DVDs or broadcast

on television, and these programs will

fill your screen. However, some

movies are filmed in the wider 2.35:1

ratio. Check the jacket of your DVD to

find its aspect ratio. When playing

such a DVD on your JBL Cinema Vision

system, if you have turned off the DVD

Auto Resize feature, or if your analog

NOTE: The CVR700 is optimized to be

used with the CVPD50 High-Definition

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Plasma Display. Composite, S-video and

component video monitor outputs on the

CVR700 are provided as a means of con-

necting an auxiliary display only. On-

screen status messages, and all digital

video post-processing – including scaling,

de-interlacing, and upconversion features

of the CVR700 – are only available when

used with the CVPD50.

• 1080p – The picture is 1920 x 1080

pixels, sent at 60 complete frames per

second.

the same scene in a program. When a

disc is encoded with multiple-angle infor-

mation, pressing the Angle Button

will enable you to switch

The “p” and “i” designations stand for

“progressive” and “interlaced.”

between these different views. Note

that, at present, few discs take advan-

tage of this capability and, when they do,

the multiple-angle technology may only

be present for short periods of time with-

in the disc. Producers will usually insert

some sort of icon or graphic in the picture

to alert you to the availability of multiple-

angle scenes.

The 480p and 480i (when digital) formats

are called the SD (standard-definition)

formats, and 480i is the digital equivalent

of a normal analog TV picture. When ana-

log TV shows are upconverted and broad-

cast on digital TV stations, they are

broadcast in 480p or 480i.

When using the CVR700 with the CVPD50

display, there is no need to use the

CVR700’s component video outputs. All

video signals, including those from the

internal DVD/changer as well as those

originating with external source devices,

are upconverted to the digital format uti-

lized by the single proprietary interface

cable between the CVR700 and the

CVPD50.

Progressive scan: If you are using the

CVR700 with the CVPD50 display, and

with no external DVD players, you may

skip this section, as the internal DVD

player outputs a digital video signal that

is passed directly to the CVPD50 using

the proprietary interface cable. The

CVR700 offers progressive scan video

outputs for use with compatible high-res-

olution televisions and projectors. Before

DVD, no consumer medium could store,

transmit or display video with full resolu-

tion. To conserve bandwidth, analog com-

pression (interlacing) is employed: first

the odd-numbered lines of a frame are

displayed, followed by the even-num-

bered lines. The result is that only half of

the video image is drawn at one time; the

viewer’s brain must reassemble the com-

plete image. This is acceptable, if the

monitor is not too large and if there is not

too much motion in the image. Large dis-

plays and fast-moving images reveal the

limitations of this system. Thanks to

DVD’s immense data capacity, images are

now stored intact (progressively), so that

all the lines in each frame (odd and even)

are shown at the same time. But because

most TVs cannot handle a progressive

signal, all current DVD players generate

an interlaced output for compatibility. The

CVR700 is among the select few DVD

players with true progressive scan video

output for use with compatible TVs and

CRT projectors and with all plasma, LCD

and DLP display devices via the compo-

nent video output. The result is 40%

greater light output than a conventional

TV and a stunningly detailed high-defini-

tion image, along with an almost com-

plete absence of visible scanlines and

motion artifacts. The CVR700’s sophisti-

cated pixel-by-pixel processing is a major

advancement over the previous genera-

tion’s line-by-line processing, bringing out

even greater detail in your favorite video

presentations. Of course, traditional

The 720p, 1080i and 1080p formats are

HD (high-definition) formats. When you

hear about “HDTV,” this is what is being

discussed – a digital signal in the 720p,

1080i or 1080p format. If your HD source

allows you to choose a picture resolution,

set it to 720p, which works best with the

CVR700 and CVPD50.

High-Definition Television (HDTV):

HDTV is a form of digital television that

advances picture quality by leaps and

bounds over conventional analog televi-

sion. HDTV signals are broadcast in a dig-

ital format that compresses the signal,

allowing far more information to be sent.

Broadcasters take advantage of the addi-

tional bandwidth by offering high-resolu-

tion images containing millions more pix-

els than an analog picture, the end result

being an image so sharp it looks more

like a photograph than television.

Strictly speaking, the 480p format is con-

sidered ED (enhanced definition). However,

the JBL Cinema Vision system processes

480p signals as high-definition, and when

referring to high-definition signals, we

will be talking about 480p or better

images.

JPEG Files: JPEG stands for the Joint

Photographic Experts Group, which devel-

oped a standard for compressing still

images, such as photographs. JPEG files

may be created on a personal computer

by importing images from a digital cam-

era, or scanning printed photographs.

These files may be burned onto a com-

pact disc. The CVR700 is among the DVD

players that are capable of recognizing

JPEG files and enabling you to view them

on your video screen.

The resolution of a digital video signal

can vary, depending on the number of pix-

els used, and whether the image frames

are interlaced or progressive. Conventional

television uses interlaced frames, in

which first the odd horizontal pixels are

scanned, then all of the even pixels are

scanned to display one frame. Progressive

scanning, as described below, displays

all of the horizontal lines of pixels in one

pass. These are the common digital video

formats:

MP3 Files: MP3 is an audio compression

format that was developed by the Motion

Picture Experts Group as an adjunct to the

MPEG-1 video compression format. A

number of encoding software programs

are available for transferring CDs and

other audio programs into the MP3 for-

mat. The main benefit of MP3 is that it

reduces the size of audio files consider-

ably, depending on the amount of com-

pression selected during the encoding

process, enabling you to store many more

songs on one compact disc than in the

standard audio CD format. The CVR700 is

capable of playing MP3 files and display-

ing the filenames on screen.

• 480i – The picture is 704 x 480 pixels,

sent at 60 interlaced frames per sec-

ond (30 complete frames per second).

• 480p – The picture is 704 x 480 pixels,

sent at 60 complete frames per second.

• 720p – The picture is 1280 x 720 pix-

els, sent at 60 complete frames per

second.

• 1080i – The picture is 1920 x 1080

pixels, sent at 60 interlaced frames

per second (30 complete frames per

second).

Multiple Angle: DVDs have the capabil-

ity to show up to four different views of

Y/Pr/Pb component video, S-video and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

composite video outputs are included for

use with conventional televisions and

projectors.

include only one title, but some may have

more than one, to give you a “Double

Feature” presentation or to include other

special features. Press the Title Button

Reading: This is a message that you will

see when you first press the Play Button

to see a listing of the titles on a disc.

When a disc has only one title, pressing

. It refers to the fact that the

the Title Button

may show a list of

player must first examine the contents of

the disc to see whether it is a CD or DVD,

and then extract the information about

the type of material on the disc, such as

languages, aspect ratios, subtitles, num-

ber of titles and more. The slight delay

while the contents of the disc are read

is normal.

the chapters.

• On DVD-Audio discs, a Title is referred

to as a Group. Many DVD-Audio discs

require you to press the Title Button

to access the disc menu.

WMA Files: WMA (Windows Media

Audio) is another audio compression

format that was developed by the

Resume: The operation of the Stop

Button

on the CVR700 works

Microsoft Corporation for use with its

differently from what you are used to on

CD players. On a traditional CD player,

when you press the Stop button, the unit

does just that: it stops playback. On a CD

player, when you press the Start button

again, the disc starts from the beginning.

With the CVR700, however, you have two

options when playing DVD discs. Pressing

Windows Media Player. WMA files can

be even smaller in size than MP3 files,

while maintaining similar quality. The

CVR700 is among the DVD players capa-

ble of playing discs containing WMA

files. Note that Windows Media Player

uses other file formats; however, the

CVR700 is only capable of playing files

that end in the “.wma” extension.

the Stop Button

once will

stop the playback, but it actually puts the

unit in the Resume mode. This means

that when you press the Play Button

the next time, the disc will

resume or continue from the point on the

disc where the Stop Button

was pressed. This is helpful if you are

watching a movie and must interrupt

your viewing session but wish to pick up

where you left off. Pressing the Stop

Button

twice will stop the

machine in a traditional manner and,

when the disc is played again, it will

start from the beginning.

Note that the Resume function will be

canceled if you shut the unit off (place

it in Standby mode), change to another

disc or select a different source. Also,

there may be a brief 1- to 2-second delay

between the second press of the Stop

Button

and the CVR700

acknowledging the mode change in the

Upper Display Line H.

The resume function is not available for

CDs, VCDs or JPEG files. For DVDs only,

the resume function will be retained even

after the CVR700 has been placed in

Standby mode by pressing the Power

Off Button 10

Title: For a DVD, a title is defined as an

entire movie or program. There may be as

many chapters within a title as the pro-

ducers decide to include. Most discs

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700 FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS



(

AUDIO / VIDEO RECEIVER / VIDEO PROCESSOR / OPTICAL DISC CHANGER

DVD

SVCD P-SCAN

PCM 192K 96K

RANDOM PROGRAM

RPERAT DISC ALL

MP3 6:9 4:3

DIGITAL EX

PRO LOGIC II

96/24

NEO:6

LOGIC

SBL

SBR

57CH. STEREO

DSP SURR.

GAME/CAM

7 9

Main Power On/Off

Sleep Button

Display Dimmer

Disc Drawer

Disc Selector

Tuning Mode/Eject Button

Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio

Input

Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio Input

Front-Panel Coaxial Digital Audio

(



Source Selector

Surround Mode Selector

Input Select Button

Volume Control

Information Display

Remote Sensor Window

Tuner Band Selector/Play Button

Memory/Pause Button

FM Mode/Stop Button

Front-Panel Audio/Video Inputs

Headphone Jack

Output

Tuning/Preset/Skip/Search Button

Front-Panel Door

1Main Power On/Off: Press this but-

ton to apply power to the CVR700. The

LED indicator in the center of the button

will turn orange. Press it again to place

the CVR700 in Standby mode, and the

LED indicator will turn red.

3Display Dimmer: Press this button to

reduce the brightness of the Information

Display Ôby 50%, or to turn the dis-

play off completely, in the following order:

FULL BRIGHTNESS -> HALF BRIGHTNESS

-> OFF -> FULL BRIGHTNESS.

, the CVR700 will prompt you to enter

a disc number by pressing one of these

buttons.

6Tuning Mode/Eject Button: This

button’s function varies, depending on

whether you have selected the tuner or

the disc changer as the current input

source. When the tuner is the source,

press this button to select the function

of the Tuning/Preset Buttons 8. Each

press will alternate between the tuning

function and the preset selections func-

tion, with the current choice displayed

on the Lower Display Line E.

If the CVPD50 is in use, pressing this but-

ton will also turn the CVPD50 on or off,

if it is plugged into AC power and its

master power switch has been turned

on. If the LED on the CVPD50’s front panel

is flashing, then check that its master

power switch is on (the “1” position).

4Disc Drawer: This drawer is used to

access the five-disc magazine changer.

While a disc is playing, you may load a

disc into or remove a disc from another

location in the changer. If you select the

current disc, it will first stop playing. Seat

all discs carefully within the recess in the

drawer. Do not press down on the drawer

when it is open, to avoid damage to the

player. It is also best to open and close

the drawer by pressing the Eject Button

6rather than by pushing the drawer

itself.

2Sleep Button: Press this button to

place the unit in the Sleep mode. After

the time shown in the display, the

CVR700 will automatically go into the

Standby mode. Each press of the button

changes the time until turn-off in the fol-

lowing order:

When the tuning function has been

selected, each press of one of the

Tuning/Preset Buttons 8will tune the

next higher or lower frequency, regardless

of whether an acceptable signal is avail-

able. Press and hold the Tuning Button

8to scan up or down through the fre-

quencies until a station with acceptable

signal quality is located. Tap the Tuning

Button 8again to end the scan.

5Disc Selector: Press one of these

buttons when prompted by a message on

the Lower Display Line Eand on the

CVPD50 screen for a disc number after

pressing the Eject Button 6. If you

have selected the internal disc changer

as the source device using the Source

Selector &or by pressing the DVD

min

OFF

When the Sleep timer is in use, the front-

panel displays and other indicators will

dim to half-brightness.

When the preset selection function is in

force, each press of one of the Tuning/

Preset Buttons 8will tune the next

higher or lower preset station that was

previously stored in the CVR700’s memory.

Input Selector d

on either remote

control, and then pressed the Play

Button !or Disc Direct Button a

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

See page 64 for information on storing

preset stations.

9Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio

Input: Connect the optical digital output

of an audio or video product to this jack.

Stop Button !#to exit the Step

Forward mode.

When the disc changer is the source,

press this button to open or close the

Disc Drawer 4. The Lower Display

Line Ewill prompt you to press a disc

number. Press the Disc Selector 5cor-

responding to the number of the drawer

you wish to access.

#FM Mode/Stop Button: The func-

tion of this button varies depending on

whether you have selected the tuner or

the disc changer as the input source.

)Front-Panel Coaxial Digital Audio

Input: Connect the coaxial digital output

of an audio or video product to this jack.

!Tuner Band Selector/Play Button:

The function of this button varies depend-

ing on whether you have selected the

tuner or the disc changer as the source.

When the tuner is the source, press this

button to switch between Stereo and

Mono modes for FM radio reception.

When weak reception is encountered,

select the Mono tuning mode. Press

again to switch back to Stereo mode.

See page 64 for more information.

7Front-Panel Optical Digital Audio

Output: Connect the optical digital input

of an audio or video product to this jack.

When the tuner is the source, pressing

this button will switch between the AM

and FM frequency bands. (See page 64

for more information on the tuner.)

8Tuning/Preset/Skip/Search

Buttons: The function of these buttons

varies depending on whether you have

selected the tuner or the disc changer as

the current input source, and in what con-

text you press it.

When the disc changer is the source,

press this button once to stop playback

of the current disc and enter Resume

mode. In Resume mode, the CVR700 will

“remember” the point on the disc where

play was stopped, and the next time the

disc is played, it will commence playback

from this point, unless the unit was

turned off, another disc was selected or

another source was selected. To fully

stop the disc, press this button twice.

There may be a 1- or 2-second delay

before Stop mode takes effect. Resume

mode is not available for CDs, VCDs, MP3

discs or WMA discs. If one of those disc

types is playing, a single press of this

button will place the disc in Stop mode,

as indicated by the solid square and the

word STOPappearing in the Upper

Display Line H.

When the disc changer is the source,

pressing this button will prompt you to

enter the number of the disc you wish

to play (corresponding to the drawer in

which the disc is loaded). You may select

a disc either by pressing one of the Disc

Selectors 5numbered 1 through 5, or

When the tuner is the source, press the

left button to tune lower-frequency sta-

tions and the right button to tune higher-

frequency stations. Each tap of the but-

tons will increase or decrease the fre-

quency by one increment. Press and hold

the button, and the tuner will scan for a

station with acceptable signal strength.

When the next higher or lower frequency

station with a strong-enough signal is

tuned, the frequency scan will pause.

Press the button again to stop scanning.

by pressing the Numeric Keys l

numbered 1 through 5 on either remote

control. If you don’t select a disc number

within 5 seconds, the CVR700 will play

the last disc that was selected. If the disc

is an MP3 or WMA disc, each press of

this button will expand the current folder

until a file is located, and the final press

will begin play of that file. If no disc is

found, the STOPMODE,DISC1

message will appear and you will need to

open the drawer to insert a disc.

When the tuner is the source and you

have pressed the Tuning Mode Button

6so that PRESETappears in the

Lower Display Line E, pressing these

buttons enables you to scroll through the

list of stations that have been previously

stored in the CVR700’s memory.

$Front-Panel Audio/Video Inputs:

The front-panel inputs give you the flexi-

bility to temporarily connect a device to

the CVR700. This capability is useful for

such applications as viewing home

@Memory/Pause Button: The func-

tion of this button varies depending on

whether you have selected the tuner or

the disc changer as the input source.

See page 64 for more information on

using the tuner.

When the tuner is the source, press this

button to store the currently tuned station

as a preset. Two flashing underlines will

appear in the Upper Display Line H.

Press the Tuning Mode Button 6

until PRESETappears in the Lower

Display Line Eto indicate the function

of the Tuning/Preset Buttons 8, then

press either of the Preset Buttons 8

until the desired preset location appears

in place of the flashing underlines. Press

the Memory Button @again to store

the station in the preset location displayed.

movies directly from the camcorder, or

playing a video game. For video devices,

connect one of the composite video, S-

video or component video outputs of the

device to the corresponding front-panel

input, and connect the left and right

audio outputs to the analog audio inputs.

Do not make more than one type of video

connection. In addition to the analog

audio connection, you may also connect

an optical or coaxial digital audio output

from the device to the CVR700. You will

then need to press the Input Select

Button (to select the desired audio

input (analog, optical or coaxial), and

specify the correct video input using the

audio on-screen menu system. Press the

System Selector f, and then the

OSD Button nto enter the menu sys-

tem. Select the SOURCESsubmenu,

and make sure the GAME/CAMERA

source is selected (or select the

When the disc changer is the source,

press and release these buttons to move

(skip) either backward (left button) or for-

ward (right button) through the tracks on

a DVD-Audio, CD or VCD disc or the

chapters on a DVD-Video disc. Press and

hold either button for at least 1 second

and then release to search either back-

ward (left button) or forward (right but-

ton) the current track or chapter at 2x

speed. Press and hold again and release

to increase the scan speed to 4x. Repeat

this procedure while in scan mode to

cycle through these scan speeds: 2x, 4x,

16x, 100x, 2x and so forth. Press and

release the button while scanning to skip

tracks or chapters. To stop searching, you

must press the Play Button !, the

Pause Button @, the Stop Button #

or the other Search Button 8.

When the disc changer is the source,

pressing this button during playback

freezes a picture (for DVD and VCD discs)

and pauses the playback signal. Pressing

the Pause Button @twice places the

DVD changer in the Step Forward mode,

in which each subsequent press of the

Pause Button @advances the picture

one step or frame. Press the Play or

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE: 6.1 and 7.1 digital modes are

available only when the appropriate digi-

tal bitstream is present.

SOURCEline to adjust it). Scroll down

to the VIDEO INPUTline and

select it to configure the CVR700 to use

the video input you connected your

device to.

(Input Select Button: After you have

selected the desired input source, press

this button repeatedly to scroll through

the analog, optical digital and coaxial

digital audio inputs available for that

source.

%Headphones Jack: This jack may

be used to listen to the CVR700's output

through a pair of headphones. Be certain

that the headphones have a standard

1/4" stereo phone plug, or that you use

an adapter, as needed, to convert the

plug on your headphones to the 1/4" jack

used on the CVR700. When the head-

phone jack is in use, the main room

speakers will automatically be turned off

and the unit will output a standard stereo

signal. For more information on head-

phone listening, see page 60.

ÓVolume Control: Turn this knob

clockwise to increase the volume, coun-

terclockwise to decrease the volume. If

the CVR700 is muted, adjusting the vol-

ume control will automatically release

the unit from the silenced condition.

ÔInformation Display: This display

delivers messages and status information

to help you operate the CVR700. See

page 19 for a complete explanation of

the display.

^Front-Panel Door: The door may

be closed to hide the front-panel jacks

when they are not in use for a smoother

appearance. To open the door, gently

push on the bottom of the door in the

center to swing it down towards you, or

gently pull on the upper right corner. Push

upward on it to close.

Remote Sensor Window: The sen-

sor behind this window receives infrared

signals from the remote control that are

intended to control the non-video func-

tions of the CVR700 only. Aim the remote

at this area and do not block or cover

it unless an external remote sensor is

installed. Note that unless the CVR700

is not being used with the CVPD50, it is

best to aim the remote at the LED light

on the front of the CVPD50 plasma dis-

play, as the IR receiver located there can

accept remote control signals intended

for both the plasma display and the

CVR700.

&Source Selector: Rotate this knob

to scroll through the available input

sources. Turn the knob slowly and gently,

and you will feel a soft click as each

source is engaged. You may also hear a

click as the CVR700’s electrical circuits

engage the source. This is normal, and

assures you that you have correctly

selected the source. The name of the

source will be displayed in the Upper

Display Line H, and in a Status Banner

on screen, together with the source’s

audio input (for external sources) and

video format.

*Surround Mode Selector: Press

this button repeatedly to scroll through

the available surround modes. The modes

available will depend on the number of

speakers in the system and whether the

input is analog or digital. See page 60 for

more information on surround modes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700 FRONT-PANEL INFORMATION DISPLAY

ADisc-Type Indicators

BPCM Bitstream Indicators

CProgrammed Play Indicators

DDisc Indicators

ELower Display Line

IProgressive Scan Indicator

JAspect Ratio Indicator

FSpeaker/Channel Input Indicators

GSurround Mode Indicators

HUpper Display Line

ADisc-Type Indicators: The DVD,

DVD-Audio, CD, VCD or MP3 indicator

will light to show the type of disc cur-

rently being played. WMA and JPEG

discs will be identified in the Upper and

Lower Display Lines EH.

ELower Display Line: Depending on

the unit’s status, a variety of messages

will appear here. In normal operation, the

current surround mode will appear on

this line.

HUpper Display Line: Depending on

the unit’s status, a variety of messages

will appear here. In normal operation,

this line will show the current input

source and identify whether an analog

or digital input is in use. When the tuner

is selected as the input, this line will

identify the station as AM or FM and

show the frequency and preset number,

if any.

FSpeaker/Channel Input Indicators:

These indicators are multipurpose, indicat-

ing both the speaker type selected for

each channel and the incoming data signal

configuration. The left, center, right, right

surround and left surround speaker indica-

tors are composed of two boxes, while the

subwoofer is a single box. The inner box

lights when a “small” speaker is selected,

and the outer boxes light when “large”

speakers are selected. When none of the

boxes are lit for the center, surround or

subwoofer channels, no speaker has been

assigned that position. (See page 48 for

more information on configuring speakers.)

The letters inside each box display the

active input channels. For standard analog

inputs, only the L and R will light, indicat-

ing a stereo input. For a digital source, the

indicators will light to display the channels

being received at the digital input. When

the letters flash, the digital input has been

interrupted. When a 6.1-channel bitstream

is detected, a horizontal line will appear

between the icons for the surround back

left and right channels to indicate that

these two channels are in mono mode.

(See page 61 for more information on the

Channel Indicators.)

BPCM Bitstream Indicators: The

PCM indicator will light when a PCM

(pulse code modulation) bitstream is

detected. PCM bitstreams are used on

audio CDs, and may also be found on

other disc types either as the main audio

format or as the format used on certain

portions of the disc, such as a “making

of” featurettes on a DVD. The 96K or

192K indicators will light when a high-

resolution audio signal is detected. This

type of audio track may be found on

some DVD-Audio discs.

IProgressive Scan Indicator: This

indicator lights when the CVR700’s

progressive scan component video output

is activated.

JAspect Ratio Indicators: The

aspect ratio of the incoming video signal

will light. These indicators are informa-

tional only and reflect the aspect ratio

information provided by the DVD disc

itself. You may need or wish to make

manual adjustments to display the

images so that they fill the screen, or if

you prefer to avoid any scaling or crop-

ping of the images, you may wish to let-

terbox the image. See pages 13 and 27

for more information on adjusting the

CVPD50 display to compensate for vari-

ous aspect ratio issues.

CProgrammed Play Indicators: The

CVR700 is capable of playing discs in a

programmed order other than the order in

which the tracks are found on the disc.

Tracks may be played in random order,

or you may program some or all of the

tracks on a CD to play in a playlist order.

In addition, you may program the CVR700

to repeat play of some of the tracks on a

disc, an entire disc, all discs, or a pro-

grammed playlist. Some of the pro-

grammed modes may not be available

for certain disc formats. See page 75

for more information.

DDisc Indicators: The circled num-

bers will light to indicate the positions of

loaded discs, and the indicator for the

current disc will flash.

GSurround Mode Indicators: One of

these indicators will light to show the

surround mode in use. Depending on the

specific combination of input sources and

surround mode selected, more than one

indicator may light. (See page 61 for

more information.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700 REAR-PANEL CONNECTIONS

i g

j h

ﬁ

‡ ·

⁄ ‹

∞

™

ﬂ

¤ ›

§ •

‚

NOTE: To make it easier to follow the instructions that refer to this illustration, a larger copy may be downloaded from the Product

Support section for this product at www.jbl.com.

0 Back Surround Speaker Outputs

(7.1-channel only)

D Composite and S-Video Monitor

Outputs

f Digital Recorder Coaxial Digital Audio

Input

1 Side Surround (7.1-channel) or

Surround (5.1-channel) Speaker Outputs

2 Center Speaker Outputs

3 Front Speaker Outputs

4 Fan Slots

E Remote IR Output

F Remote IR Input

G Digital Recorder Component Video

Inputs

H Cable/Satellite Component Video

Inputs

g Optical Digital Audio Output

h Auxiliary Optical Digital Audio Input

i Cable/Satellite Optical Digital Audio

Input

j Digital Recorder Optical Digital Audio

Input

5 Subwoofer Output

6 DVI/Computer Analog Audio Inputs

7 Auxiliary Analog Audio/Video Inputs

8 Digital Recorder Analog Audio/Video

Inputs

9 Digital Recorder Analog Audio/Video

Outputs

A VCR Analog Audio/Video Inputs

B VCR Analog Audio/Video Outputs

C Cable/Satellite Analog Audio/Video

Inputs

I Component Video Monitor Outputs

J Picture-in-Picture (PIP) Composite

Video Input

b Coaxial Digital Audio Output

c Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio Input

d Cable/Satellite Coaxial Digital Audio

Input

k DVI/Computer Optical Digital Audio

Input

FM Antenna Jack

AM Antenna Terminals

Output to JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50

Screen

Port for Factory Use Only

e DVI/Computer Coaxial Digital Audio

Input

DVI (HDCP)/Computer Video Input

NOTE: To assist in making the correct con-

nections for multichannel input, output and

speaker connections, all connection jacks and

terminals are color-coded in conformance

with the CEA standards as follows:

Front Left:

Front Right:

Center:

Side Surround/Surround Left: Blue

Side Surround/Surround Right: Gray

White

Red

Green

Subwoofer:

Digital Audio:

Composite Video:

Component Video “Y”:

Component Video “Pr”:

Component Video “Pb”:

Purple

Orange

Yellow

Green

Red

Back Surround Left:

Back Surround Right:

Brown

Tan

Blue

terminal should be connected to the red

(+) terminal on the Back Surround Right

speaker with the older color-coding.

Connect the black (–) terminal on the

CVR700 to the matching black negative

(–) terminals for each back surround

speaker. (See page 42 for more informa-

tion on speaker polarity.)

¡ Back Surround Speaker Outputs:

These speaker terminals are normally

used to power the back surround left/

back surround right speakers in a 7.1-

channel system. In conformance with the

CEA color-code specification, the brown

terminal is the positive (+) terminal that

should be connected to the red (+) termi-

nal on the Back Surround Left speaker

with older color-coding, while the tan

™ Side Surround Speaker Outputs:

Connect these outputs to the matching +

and – terminals on your side surround

(7.1-channel system) or Surround (5.1-

channel system) speakers. Conforming to

CEA color-code specifications, the blue

terminal is the positive (+) terminal that

should be connected to the (+) terminal

on the Side Surround/Surround Left

speaker with older color-coding; the gray

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

terminal should be connected to the

red (+) terminal on the Side Surround/

Surround Right speaker with the older

color-coding. Connect the black (–) termi-

nals on the CVR700 to the matching black

negative (–) terminals for each side sur-

round speaker. (See page 42 for more

information on speaker polarity.)

page 46 for more information on configur-

ing an input for various source options.)

§ Subwoofer Output: Connect this

jack to the line-level input of a powered

subwoofer. If an external subwoofer

amplifier is used, connect this jack to

the subwoofer amplifier input. Use a

Y-adaptor when connecting two sub-

woofers.

‚ Digital Recorder Analog Audio/

Video Outputs: Connect the left/right

analog audio and composite or S-video

RECORD/IN jacks of a video recording

device such as a DVD-Recorder, personal

video recorder or VCR to these jacks.

¶ DVI/Computer Analog Audio

Inputs: Connect the left/right analog

audio outputs of a computer or other

device with a DVI output to these jacks

to benefit from the CVR700’s surround

processor for added realism and excite-

ment when playing computer games,

or giving multimedia presentations, or

for other uses. When you have also

connected the computer’s DVI video out-

put to the DVI/Computer Video Input

₃₅, you may also benefit from the

superior visual presentation of the JBL

Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen.

£ Center Speaker Outputs: Connect

these outputs to the matching + and –

terminals on your center channel speaker.

In conformance with the CEA color-code

specification, the green terminal is the

positive (+) terminal that should be con-

nected to the red (+) terminal on speakers

with the older color-coding. Connect the

black (–) terminal on the CVR700 to the

black negative (–) terminal on the speaker.

(See page 42 for more information.)

⁄ VCR Analog Audio/Video Inputs:

Connect the left/right analog audio and

composite or S-video PLAY/OUT jacks of

a video recording device such as a VCR,

DVD-Recorder or personal video recorder

to these jacks.

VCR Analog Audio/Video Outputs:

Connect the left/right analog audio and

composite or S-video RECORD/IN jacks of

a video recording device such as a VCR,

DVD-Recorder or personal video recorder

to these jacks.

¢ Front Speaker Outputs: Connect

these outputs to the matching + or – ter-

minals on your left and right speakers.

When making speaker connections

always make certain to maintain correct

polarity by connecting the color-coding

(white for front left and red for front

right) (+) terminals on the CVR700 to the

red (+) terminals on the speakers and

black (–) terminals on the CVR700 to the

black terminals on the speakers (see

page 42 for more information).

You may connect any device with left and

right analog audio outputs to these jacks.

The CVR700’s remote control has a VCR

as the default device for this input, but

you may connect any video source such

as an HDTV or cable set-top box, personal

video recorder, or other device to these

inputs. Note, however, that the VCR

source is not associated with any digital

audio inputs or component video inputs,

and should therefore only be used as a

last resort for devices that have those

capabilities. The preferred system config-

uration is to connect an HDTV tuner or

digital cable or satellite receiver to the

Cable/Sat source, and to connect a per-

• Auxilliary Analog Audio/Video

Inputs: Connect the left/right analog

audio and composite or S-video jacks of a

video device to these jacks. You may con-

nect any video source such as a VCR,

HDTV receiver, or other device to these

inputs. Note that if the source device

offers digital audio capability, that con-

nection must be made separately, and the

CVR700 configured accordingly. Note that

the Auxiliary Source Input does not have

component video inputs assigned to it

and thus may only be used with compos-

ite or S-video. Therefore, if possible, it

is recommended that an HDTV receiver

be used with the Cable/Sat or even the

Digital Recorder source, so that a compo-

nent video connection may be made. (See

page 46 for more information on configur-

ing an input for various source options.)

∞ Fan Slots: These ventilation holes

are the output of the CVR700’s airflow

system. To ensure proper operation of the

unit and to avoid possible damage to del-

icate surfaces, make certain that these

holes are not blocked and that there is at

least three inches of open space between

the vent holes and any wooden or fabric

surface. It is equally important to make

sure that the holes in the top and bottom

covers of the unit are not blocked, either.

It is normal for the fan to remain on at

all times at one of three speeds,

sonal video recorder, such as a TiVo, to

the Digital Recorder source.

‹ Cable/Satellite Analog

Audio/Video Inputs: Connect the

left/right analog audio and composite or

S-video jacks of a video device to these

jacks. The CVR700’s remote control has

a cable, satellite or HDTV set-top as the

default devices available for this input,

but you may connect any video source

such as a VCR, HDTV or satellite receiver,

personal video recorder, or other device

to these inputs. Note that if the source

device offers either digital audio or com-

ponent video capability, those connec-

tions must be made separately, and the

CVR700 configured accordingly.

ª Digital Recorder Analog

Audio/Video Inputs: Connect the

depending on the selection you make in

the ADVANCEDSETTINGS

submenu. By selecting the default

left/right analog audio and composite

or S-video PLAY/OUT jacks of a video

recording device such as a VCR, DVD-

Recorder or personal video recorder to

these jacks. The CVR700’s remote control

has a variety of digital recorders avail-

able as the default devices for this input,

but you may connect any video source

such as a VCR, HDTV or cable set-top

box, personal video recorder, or other

device to these inputs. Note that if the

source device offers either digital audio

or component video capability, those con-

nections must be made separately, and

the CVR700 configured accordingly. (See

MINIMUMNOISEsetting, the fan

will run at its slowest speed at volumes

below –20dB, and at its slightly faster

medium speed at higher volumes. This

setting should only be selected when

the CVR700 is placed on a shelf and

not within an enclosed space. When

the CVR700 is placed inside a cabinet

or other enclosed space, select the

MAXIMUMCOOLINGsetting, in

which the fan will always be on at its

highest setting.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

permanently assigned to the Auxiliary

source input.

› Composite and S-Video Monitor

Outputs: If you are not using the

· Component Video Monitor

Outputs: If you are not using the

CVPD50, or if you desire a secondary

video display, connect these outputs to

the component video inputs of a video

projector or monitor. When a source con-

nected to one of the Component Video

Inputs ‡° is selected, the signal will

be sent to these jacks.

CVPD50, or if you desire a secondary dis-

play, connect thse jacks to the composite

or S-video input of a TV monitor or video

projector to view the output of any stan-

dard video source selected by the receiv-

er’s video switcher. If both standard com-

posite and S-video sources are used,

you must make connections from both

Video Monitor Output jacks to your

display. Also, if component video sources

are used, you must also connect the

Component Video Monitor Output ·

to the display.

d Cable/Satellite Coaxial Digital

Audio Input: Connect the coaxial digital

audio output from a DVD player, HDTV

receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-

ble computer sound card playing audio

files or streams, LD player or CD player

to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby

Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard

PCM digital source. Do not connect the

RF digital output of an LD player to this

jack. This input is permanently assigned

to the Cable/Satellite source input.

NOTE: The CVR700 is optimized to be

used with the CVPD50 High-Definition

Plasma Display. Composite, S-video and

component video monitor outputs on the

CVR700 are provided as a means of con-

necting an auxiliary display only. On-

screen status messages, and all digital

video post-processing – including scaling,

de-interlacing, and upconversion features

of the CVR700 – are only available when

used with CVPD50.

e DVI/Computer Coaxial Digital

Audio Input: Connect the coaxial digital

audio output from a DVD player, HDTV

receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-

ble computer sound card playing audio

files or streams, LD player or CD player

to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby

Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard

PCM digital source. Do not connect the

RF digital output of an LD player to this

jack. This input is permanently assigned

to the DVI/Computer source input.

NOTE: The CVR700 is optimized to be

used with the CVPD50 High-Definition

Plasma Display. Composite, S-video and

component video monitor outputs on the

CVR700 are provided as a means of con-

necting an auxiliary display only. On-

screen status messages, and all digital

video post-processing – including scaling,

de-interlacing, and upconversion features

of the CVR700 – are only available when

used with CVPD50.

a Picture-in-Picture (PIP)

Composite Video Input: Connect the

composite video output of a video device

that you would like to have available for

picture-in-picture (PIP) viewing using the

JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen. When

the PIP function is activated, the signal

fed to this jack will appear within a small

field over the main program visible on

the plasma screen. Except for the DVI/

Computer source, the PIP view may also

be available as a split screen. Use the

Screen menu system to configure the PIP

view. When the main source is HD com-

ponent video (480p or better), the PIP

function is not available.

f Digital Recorder Coaxial Digital

Audio Input: Connect the coaxial digital

audio output from a DVD player, HDTV

receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-

ble computer sound card playing audio

files or streams, LD player or CD player

to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby

Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard

PCM digital source. Do not connect the

RF digital output of an LD player to this

jack. This input is permanently assigned

to the Digital Recorder source input.

ﬁRemote IR Output: This connection

permits the IR sensor in the receiver to

serve other remote controlled devices.

Connect this jack to the “IR IN” jack on

JBL (or other compatible) equipment.

ﬂ Remote IR Input: If the CVR700’s

front-panel IR sensor is blocked due to cab-

inet doors or other obstructions, an exter-

nal IR sensor may be used. Connect the

output of the sensor to this jack.

The PIP source must be able to output

composite video simultaneously with

its main method of connection to the

CVR700. If the PIP device is connected

via its composite video output to a source

input on the CVR700, a Y-Cable will be

required to connect to both the main

source input jack and the PIP input.

NOTE: The remote IR input and output on

the CVR700 are only used for non-video

functions, and will have no effect on the

CVPD50 plasma display. JBL recommends

that you point the remote control at the

LED light on the front of the CVPD50 dis-

play for all functions, as the CVPD50 will

pass any non-video command codes to

the CVR700.

g Optical Digital Audio Output:

Connect this jack to the optical digital

input connector on a DVD+R/RW, DVD-

R/RW, CD-R/RW, MiniDisc or other com-

patible digital recorder.

h Auxiliary Optical Digital Audio

Inputs: Connect the optical digital output

from a DVD player, HDTV receiver, the

S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer

sound card playing audio files or streams,

LD player or CD player to these jacks.

The signal may be a Dolby Digital signal,

a DTS signal or standard PCM digital

source. This input is permanently

b Coaxial Digital Audio Output:

Connect this jack to the coaxial digital

input of a DVD+R/RW, DVD-R/RW, CD-

R/RW, MiniDisc or other compatible

digital recorder.

‡ Component Video Digital

Recorder Inputs: These inputs may

be used with any video source device

equipped with analog Y/Pr/Pb component

video outputs. These jacks are perma-

nently linked to the Digital Recorder

Source input.

c Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio

Input: Connect the coax digital output

from a DVD player, HDTV receiver, the

S/P-DIF output of a compatible computer

sound card playing audio files or streams,

LD player or CD player to this jack. The

signal may be a Dolby Digital signal, DTS

signal or a standard PCM digital source.

Do not connect the RF digital output of

an LD player to this jack. This input is

assigned to the Auxiliary source input.

i Cable/Satellite Optical Digital

Audio Input: Connect the optical digital

audio output from a DVD player, HDTV

receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-

ble computer sound card playing audio

files or streams, LD player or CD player

° Component Video Cable/Satellite

Inputs: These inputs may be used with

any video source device equipped with

analog Y/Pr/Pb component video out-

puts. These jacks are permanently linked

to the Cable/Satellite source input.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby

Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard

PCM digital source. Do not connect the

RF digital output of an LD player to this

jack. This input is permanently assigned

to the Cable/Satellite source input.

damage to the device or to the CVR700,

which would not be covered under the

warranty.

Port for Factory Use Only: This

connector is used only by factory-author-

ized service personnel. Do not connect

any control devices to this port, or

attempt to connect it to any other device.

Doing so may cause serious damage to

the device or to the CVR700, which would

not be covered under warranty.

j Digital Recorder Optical Digital

Audio Input: Connect the optical digital

audio output from a DVD player, HDTV

receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-

ble computer sound card playing audio

files or streams, LD player or CD player

to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby

Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard

PCM digital source. Do not connect the

RF digital output of an LD player to this

jack. This input is permanently assigned

to the Digital Recorder source input.

DVI (HDCP)/Computer Video

Input: Connect the compatible DVI video

output of a computer, HDTV tuner or DVD

player to this input. This input can also

be connected to the VGA output of a con-

ventional PC (cable for connection to a

VGA output PC is included with the

k DVI/Computer Optical Digital

Audio Input: Connect the optical digital

audio output from a DVD player, HDTV

receiver, the S/P-DIF output of a compati-

ble computer sound card playing audio

files or streams, LD player or CD player

to this jack. The signal may be a Dolby

Digital signal, DTS signal or a standard

PCM digital source. Do not connect the

RF digital output of an LD player to this

jack. This input is permanently assigned

to the DVI/Computer source input.

CVPD50). Be sure to select the appropri-

ate device from the SCREEN MENU. You

must select the DVI input first by pressing

the DVI Input Selector d

on the

remote control or the Source Selector

&on the CVR700 front panel before you

can configure your DVI input via the

SCREEN MENU. Please note that due to

newness of HDCP technology, all HDCP-

encoded DVI outputs may not be compati-

ble with the CVR700. We recommend

that you test the compatibility of an

HDCP DVI source with your CVR700

before purchasing that source unit. In cer-

tain problematic connections, switching

to a top-quality DVI cable that is as short

as possible will help improve connection

consistency. This input is assigned to the

DVI/Computer source input.

FM Antenna: Connect the supplied

indoor or an optional external FM antenna

to this terminal

AM Antenna Terminal: Connect

the AM loop antenna supplied with the

receiver to these terminals. If an exter-

nal AM antenna is used, make connec-

tions to the AM and GND terminals in

accordance with the instructions sup-

plied with the antenna.

NOTE: If using indoor antennas, please

mount them as far away from CVR700

and CVPD50 as possible, and empirically

position them for the least amount of

possible interference from the many

digital processors inside the CVR700

and CVPD50.

Output to JBL Cinema Vision

CVPD50 Screen: Connect this output to

the JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen

using the cable supplied with the screen.

When the CVR700 is used with the JBL

Cinema Vision CVPD50 screen, no other

video monitor connections need to be

made. Do not connect this output to any

other device. Doing so may cause serious

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700R2 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Power Off (All)

Power On (All)

LCD Information Display

Input Selectors

Screen Selector

System Selector

Surround Mode Selector

Test Tone Button

Logic 7 Mode/Sports Preset Button

SPL Select Button

Audio Input Selector

Direct/Brightness/Window Button

Tone Mode/Color/List Button

OSD/Contrast Button

Angle/Tuning Mode Button

Level/Guide Button

G ^{⁄ ¤}

/‹/›Navigation Disc

Exit/Cancel Button

Set Button

Preset/Page Down/Reverse Skip

Button

Volume Up/Down Control

Tuning Down/Reverse Search Button

Record/Stop/Pause Transport

Controls

Status/Settings/Button

Title/Freeze Button

Random/Letterbox Button

Repeat/Frame Button

A-B/Auto Button

Program/PVR Replay Button

Disc Skip/PVR List Button

Audio/Screen Saver Button

Subtitle/TV/Video Button

Light Button

Macro/A/B/C Buttons

Sleep/PIP Move Button

Night Mode/PIP Channel Down

Button

a Disc Direct/PVR Live Button

b Remote Menu/PIP Channel Up

Button

c DVD Setup/PIP On-Off/PIP Swap

Button

™

d JBL On Screen Library /Favorite

Button

e Play Transport Control Button

f Tuning Up/Forward Search Button

g Channel/Slow Play Up/Down

Control

h Preset/Page Up/Forward Skip Button

i Last Channel/Distance Button

j Screen Setup/Disc Menu/Info Button

k Zoom/Memory Button

l Alphanumeric Keys

o DTS Digital Surround Mode Button

p Dolby Surround Mode Button

q Mute Button

r EzSet Microphone Sensor

s IR Transmitter/Receiver

m Stereo Mode/Movies Preset Button

n DTS Neo:6 Mode/Broadcast Preset

Button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700R2 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS

IMPORTANT NOTE: The JBL Cinema

Vision remotes are powerful devices

capable of controlling virtually your entire

home cinema system. In comparison to a

traditional system of the same capabili-

ties, these remotes can replace up to 10

separate remote controls and therefore

end the confusion and clutter associated

with having a different remote for each

of your system components. In order to

achieve this goal, the JBL Cinema Vision

remotes are designed to assume the

duties of controlling different devices

within your system by first pressing one

of the 10 Selector Buttons dfg

. Pressing one of these

• Some buttons have special functions

when they are pressed and held for 3

seconds.

3 Input Selectors: Pressing one of

these buttons will perform two actions.

The CVR700 will switch to the source

selected, and the remote will switch to

the control codes for the selected source.

In order to control the CVR700 again,

press the System Selector 5, and to

control the CVPD50 screen, press the

Screen Selector 4.

• The jack on the upper right side of the

remote is reserved for future use. Do

not remove the plug provided or con-

nect any device to the jack.

• To make it easier to follow the instruc-

tions that refer to this illustration, a

larger copy may be downloaded from

the Product Support section for this

product at www.jbl.com.

Press and hold any of these buttons to

power on the CVR700, the CVPD50 and

the source device, and to begin play of

the source device.

4 Screen Selector: Press this button

to select the control codes for the

CVPD50 screen.

• The JBL Cinema Vision main remote

control may be programmed to control

up to eight devices, including the

CVR700 receiver with disc changer and

the CVPD50 screen. Before using the

remote, it is important to press the

Input Selector 3 that corresponds

to the device you wish to operate.

buttons places your remote control in a

different “page”, where the remote but-

tons are assigned control functions avail-

able for that specific purpose. For exam-

ple, all internal DVD changer functions

are accessed by pressing the DVD

5 System Selector: Press this button

to select the control codes for the CVR700.

6 DSP Surround Mode Selector: In

System mode, press this button to select

one of the DSP audio surround modes,

such as Hall 1, Hall 2 or Theater. Each

press of the button selects another mode.

See page 62 for descriptions of the vari-

ous surround modes.

Button d

first, and all CVPD50

• The remote is capable of operating a

wide variety of products made by other

manufacturers using control codes that

are programmed into the remote’s code

library. As described on pages 76–78,

it is simple to program the remote to

operate your device by selecting the

device type and brand, and then pro-

gramming the correct set of codes for

that brand.

Plasma Display functions are accessed

by pressing the Screen Button e

first, and all overall audio and system

commands for the CVR700 are accessed

by first pressing the System Button f

7 Test Tone Button: Press this button

to activate the CVR700’s test tone that is

used to calibrate speaker output levels.

See pages 50–51 for more information on

calibrating speaker output levels.

. Throughout this manual, you will

see references to the system being active

in DVD, SYSTEM, SCREEN, CABLE/SAT,

or other modes. This means that one of

these 10 keys is to be pressed first to

place your remote in the prescribed mode

before accessing any specific controls. It

is important to always remember to press

the appropriate page selection button

before trying to access any specific func-

tions for a system or source. This may

take a little bit of discipline and practice

at first, but it should become second

nature in a very short time.

8 Logic 7 Mode/Sports Preset

Button: When the System Selector

5 is active, press this button to select

from among the available Logic 7 sur-

round modes. (See page 62 for descrip-

tions of the various surround modes.)

When the Screen Selector 4 is

active, press this button to select the

CVPD50 picture settings that were preset

at the factory for optimal viewing of

sporting events.

0 Power Off (All): Press this button

to place the CVR700 (and the CVPD50) or

a selected device in the Standby mode.

Press and hold this button to place all

devices, including the CVR700, the

CVPD50 and any other products whose

codes you have programmed into the

remote, into the Standby mode.

1 Power On (All): Press this button

to power on the CVR700 (and CVPD50) or

another device you selected by first press-

ing the appropriate Input Selector 3.

NOTES:

NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies

• The function names shown here are

each button’s function when used with

the CVR700 (System), its internal DVD

changer (DVD/Main) and the CVPD50

(Screen). Most buttons have additional

functions when used with other

devices, and some of these functions

may be assigned to different buttons,

depending on which device was select-

ed. The device name will appear in the

upper line of the LCD Information

Display 2 and the function

assigned to that device will appear in

the lower line when the button is

pressed. See pages 89 through 91 for a

list of the functions assigned to each

button for each device type.

Buttons imn

optimize picture

settings for a specific viewing medium.

The Broadcast settings are the most neu-

tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-

mized for clarity. The Movies settings are

softer and less bright. The Sports settings

are more vibrant and optimized for fast-

moving action.

Press and hold this button to power on

all devices, including the CVR700, the

CVPD50 and any other products whose

codes you have programmed into the

remote.

2 LCD Information Display: This

two-line screen displays various informa-

tion depending on the commands that

have been entered into the remote.

Normally, the upper line will display the

current device (e.g., DVD/MAIN), and

the lower line will display the name of

the function key when pressed (e.g.,

DISC SKIP). See page 85 for informa-

tion on renaming devices and keys.

9 SPL Select Button: This button

activates the EzSet function to quickly

and accurately calibrate the speaker out-

put levels. The EzSet remote also has a

manual SPL meter function to assist with

manual setting of the output levels, or

trimming the settings to an external

source. See page 51 for more information

on EzSet.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A Audio Input Selector: Press this

button to select one of the digital audio

inputs 9)cdefhijk for

use with its source or to select the analog

audio input for that source. It is not possi-

ble to reassign a digital audio input to

another source. See page 60 for more

information on using digital inputs.

E Angle/Tuning Mode Button: When

the DVD mode is active, press this button

so select an alternate camera angle, if

available on the current DVD.

H Exit/Cancel Button: When pro-

gramming the remote, press this button

to cancel the current function and return

to the previous remote function. When

using the remote to enter frequencies for

direct tuner access or track numbers for

direct access on a CD, press this button

to clear previous entries.

When the tuner is in use, press this but-

ton to change the tuner scan mode

between manual and automatic. When

the button is pressed so that TUNE

AUTOappears in the Lower Display

Line E, only stations with acceptable

signal quality will be tuned when scan-

ning, and the tuner will play FM stations

in stereo, when available. In the Auto

mode, when the Tuning Up/Down

B Direct/Brightness/Window

Button: Press this button when the tuner

is in use to directly enter a station’s fre-

quency, or when a CD is in use to directly

enter a track number. After pressing this

button, press the appropriate Alpha-

numeric Keys l to select a station

or track.

I Set Button: This button is used to

enter settings into the CVR700’s memory,

or to confirm a selection while setting

delay distances, speaker configuration

and output level adjustments. It is used

as the Enter or OK button for most other

devices.

Buttons 8Lf

are pressed

and held, the unit will automatically

search for the next available station with

good signal strength. When the Tuning

Mode Button ois pressed so that

TUNEMANUALappears in the

Lower Display Line E, pressing and

holding the Tuning Up/Down Buttons

J Preset/Page Down/Reverse Skip

Button: This multipurpose button has a

different function depending on the

source in use.

When the Screen mode is active, press

this button to adjust the brightness of

the CVPD50. Use the ‹/›Navigation

Controls q

to increase or decrease

When used with the tuner, this button

scrolls through the preprogrammed sta-

tion presets.

the brightness setting.

See page 55 for more information on

screen adjustments. This button also

activates the Window function for TiVo

players. See your TiVo owner’s manual

for more information on the Window

function.

8Lf

will cause the tuner to

When used with optical sources, such as

the internal disc changer or an external

CD player, press this button once to

return to the beginning of the current

track, and again quickly to go to the

beginning of the previous track.

scan up or down through the frequencies

and stop when the button is released,

even if that frequency does not provide

an acceptable signal. In either TUNE

AUTOor TUNEMANUALmode,

each tap of the Tuning Up/Down

C Tone Mode/Color/List Button:

This button controls the tone settings,

enabling adjustment of the bass and tre-

ble boost or cut. You may also use it to

disable the tone controls, for a “flat”

response. The first press of the button

displays a TONEINmessage in the

Lower Display Line Eand on-screen

display. To disable the controls, press the

⁄/¤ Navigation Controls G until

the display reads TONEOUT. To

change the bass or treble settings, press

this button again until the desired control

appears in the Lower Display Line E

and in the on-screen display, and then

press the ⁄/¤ Navigation Controls

G until the desired setting appears.

Buttons 8Lf

will cause the

The Page Down function is used with

cable and satellite television to page

quickly through on-screen menus.

tuner to step through the frequencies in

single-step increments.

When the FM band is in use, pressing the

button so that the TUNEMANUAL

mode is activated will enable you to tune

stations with weak signals by changing

to monaural reception. See page 64 for

more information on tuner operation.

When a disc containing JPEG still images

is being played using the internal changer,

press this button to scroll to the previous

image.

K Volume Up/Down Controls: To

raise the volume, press towards the top

of the disc, where it is marked ⁄ Vol,

and to lower the volume, press towards

the bottom of the disc, where it is marked

¤ Vol. The left and right arrows on this

disc have different functions, depending

on the source in use. See Channel/Slow

Play Up/Down Control g below for

more information.

F Level/Guide Button: This button is

used to start the process of setting the

CVR700’s output levels to an external

source, such as a favorite DVD. While

the source is playing, press this button,

and then press the ⁄/¤ Navigation

Controls G until the channel to adjust

appears. Press the Set Button I to

select that channel, and then use the

⁄/¤ Navigation Controls G again

to adjust the level setting. See page 64

for more information.

When the Screen mode is active, press

this button to adjust the color tempera-

ture of the CVPD50 display. See page 55

for more information on screen adjust-

ments. This button also activates the List

function for TiVo players. See your TiVo

owner’s manual for more information on

the List function.

L Tuning Down/Reverse Search

Button: This button has different func-

tions depending on whether the tuner or

another source is in use.

G ⁄/¤/‹/›Navigation Disc:

This single disc-like button is used to nav-

igate the on-screen configuration menus,

to scroll through options lists and to

select various settings such as delay,

speaker configurations, surround modes,

digital inputs, etc. To use the button, sim-

ply press it left, right, up or down in the

direction indicated by the ⁄/¤/‹/›

icons printed on the disc.

Press this button when the tuner is in use

to change the station to one with a lower

frequency. Each tap of this button will

decrease the frequency by one increment.

When the tuner receives a strong enough

signal for adequate reception, MANUAL

TUNEDwill appear in the Lower

Display Line E. When the tuner is in

the Auto/Stereo mode, press and hold the

button to cause the tuner to scan for the

D OSD/Contrast Button: Press this

button when the System mode is active

to access the setup menu for the

CVR700’s audio functions. When the

Screen mode is active, press this button

to adjust the contrast of the CVPD50 dis-

play. See page 55 for more information on

screen adjustments.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

next lower station with acceptable signal

strength and stop. The Lower Display

Line Ewill indicate AUTOTUNED.

When an FM Stereo station is tuned, the

display will read AUTOSTTUNED.

When the tuner is in Manual/Mono mode,

you may press and hold this button to

scan downward through the frequencies,

and the tuner will stop immediately

when you release this button, even if no

acceptable signal is detected at that

frequency.

When the internal disc changer or tuner,

or an external cable television box is in

use, press this button to access the cur-

rent settings for the device.

of the program material and adjust the

display automatically to fill the screen.

However, in some cases the material may

be a movie displayed in widescreen

(2.35:1) format, or the material may not

contain embedded information necessary

for the CVR700 to make an automatic

adjustment. The available letterbox

modes are:

For digital VCRs and game consoles, this

button performs the Back function. For

some PVRs/DVRs this button performs

the Instant Replay function.

O Title/Freeze Button: This button’s

function differs, depending on whether

the internal disc changer (DVD/Main

mode) or the Screen mode is active. To

use this button, be careful to press only

on the upper portion of the button, as

other functions are accessed by pressing

on the lower portion of the button.

16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9

program material in the full-screen 16:9

mode on the CVPD50. This setting will

also apply a linear (consistent) stretch to

a 4:3 picture.

See page 64 for more information on

using the tuner.

When an optical player source, such as

the internal DVD changer, is in use, press

this button to search quickly in reverse

through the current track or chapter.

Depending on the type of disc used in the

internal DVD changer, each additional

press will cycle through the available

scan speeds as follows (available scan

speeds may differ for external optical

source devices):

4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This mode is used

to adjust an image which is designed to

display a 16:9 movie on a 4:3 screen. In

order to preserve the full width of the

movie on a narrower screen, the image

is reduced in size and black bars appear

above and below it. This setting zooms

in on the image, enabling it to fill the

CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing any

portion of the image. The image is simply

enlarged so that its two sides fit the

edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen and the

black bars on top and bottom are cropped

off. The image is stretched in a linear

fashion (evenly throughout the frame).

In DVD/Main mode, press this button

while a disc is playing to display the cur-

rent title number. Press it again to jump

to the next numbered title on the disc.

This function may be available even

when the disc’s software prohibits title-

jumping using the Forward/Reverse

Skip Buttons Jh. Many DVD-Audio

discs require you to press this button to

access the disc menu.

DVD-Audio and DVD-Video discs: 2x, 4x,

16x, 100x

CD and VCD discs: 2x, 4x, 8x

In Screen mode, you may use this button

to pause playback of the video picture

while allowing the audio playback to con-

tinue uninterrupted, enabling you to cap-

ture an instance or frame of the video.

MP3 and WMA discs: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x

See page 68 for more information on

using the internal DVD changer’s trans-

port controls.

2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL – This mode is used

to adjust an image from a widescreen

film which is actually at a wider ratio

than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to

fit on the smaller screen, the image is

compressed in a nonlinear fashion, but no

portion of the image is lost.

P Random/Letterbox Button: This

button’s function differs, depending on

whether the internal disc changer

(DVD/Main mode) or the Screen mode is

active. To use this button, be careful to

press only on the upper portion of the

button, as other functions are accessed

by pressing on the lower portion of the

button.

M Record/Stop/Pause Transport

Controls: These buttons have no func-

tion in the System or Screen modes, but

are used with sources such as the inter-

nal disc changer or external DVD or CD

players, tape or digital recorders or VCRs.

When the internal disc changer is in use,

pressing the Stop button once will place

a DVD in resume mode, meaning that you

may press the Play Button e to con-

tinue playing the disc from the point

where it was stopped. If you press the

Stop button twice, play will resume from

the beginning of the disc. Pressing the

Pause Button wwill pause play,

allowing you to step frame by frame for-

ward through a DVD with each additional

press of the Pause Button w. Press

the Play Button e, to resume normal

play, or press the Stop Button wto

stop.

2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode

is an alternative adjustment for a

widescreen film. The image is not com-

pressed or scaled in any way, but the

outer edges are cropped, sacrificing a

slight amount of the original content in

exchange for 100% accurate image pro-

portions.

In DVD/Main mode, press this button for

playback in random order. The Random

function is not available when playing

DVD-Audio or DVD-Video discs unless a

playlist has been programmed, and it is

not available at all for JPEG discs.

4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As HDTV is new to

the broadcast industry and there is still a

considerable amount of older 4:3 stan-

dard recording and broadcast equipment

in use, 4:3 material is sometimes broad-

cast in HD 16:9 format with black or

other color bars on its sides. Since these

bars are a part of the actual picture, con-

ventional picture resizing techniques do

not work in eliminating them. This setting

is specifically designed to address this

problem. It first crops the bars off the

sides of the 16:9 picture to render it a 4:3

picture, and then performs a natural-look-

ing nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16:9

screen.

In Screen mode, when using the internal

DVD changer, this button is only active if

the Auto Resize feature is turned off via

the SCREEN MENU (see page 57). This

button performs the Letterbox function,

which enables you to adjust the screen to

eliminate black bars that may appear on

the top and bottom or sides of the image

due to the aspect ratio of the program

material differing from the 16:9 aspect

ratio of the CVPD50. In most cases, the

CVR700’s video processor is able to auto-

matically detect the aspect ratio setting

N Status/Settings Button: This but-

ton has different functions, depending on

which device is in use.

Press it to display the CVR700 system’s

status, or an external DVD recorder’s

status.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Letterbox adjustment is temporary

and will only apply to that disc. We

encourage you to experiment with the

modes to find one that suits you for a

given presentation.

compressed, but no portion of the image

is lost.

In the Screen mode, this button selects

automatic detection of the aspect ratio of

program material from external sources,

with playback in the 16:9 format. It will

display 4:3 images stretched to fill the

16:9 screen. This function is not available

with HD (480p or better) signals. If the

4:3 image is in letterbox format, with

bars at the top and bottom of the screen,

those bars will remain. See pages 13 and

27 for more information on configuring

aspect ratios.

2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode

is an alternative adjustment for a

widescreen film. The image is not com-

pressed or scaled in any way, but the

outer edges are cropped, sacrificing a

slight amount of the original content in

exchange for 100% accurate image pro-

portions.

Additional aspect ratio adjustments are

available using the Frame Button Q.

Q Repeat/Frame Button: This but-

ton’s function differs depending on

whether the internal disc changer (DVD/

Main mode) or the Screen mode is active.

To use this button, be careful to press

only on the lower portion of the button,

as other functions are accessed by press-

ing on the upper portion of the button.

4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As HDTV is new to

the broadcast industry, and there is still

a lot of older 4:3 standard recording and

broadcast equipment in use, 4:3 material

is sometimes broadcast in HD 16:9 for-

mat with black or other color bars on its

sides. Since these bars are a part of the

actual picture, conventional picture resiz-

ing techniques do not work in eliminating

them. This setting is specifically designed

to address this problem. It first crops the

bars off of the sides of the 16:9 picture to

render it a 4:3 picture, and then performs

a natural-looking nonlinear stretch to fill

the entire 16:9 screen.

S Program/PVR Replay Button: In

the DVD/Main mode, press this button

to access the screen for programming

playlists. When a PVR (personal video

recorder) is in use, press this button for

replay of recorded materials. Refer to

your PVR’s owner’s manual for more

information.

In DVD mode, pressing this buttons

accesses the Repeat functions. You may

repeat a chapter, track, title, disc, file or

programmed playlist. For JPEG discs, you

may repeat one file or one folder, but the

repeat disc function is not available.

T Disc Skip/PVR List Button: In the

DVD/Main mode, press this button to

begin play of the next available disc in

the changer. When a PVR is in use, press

this button to list recorded materials.

Refer to your PVR’s owner’s manual for

more information.

In Screen mode, when using the internal

DVD changer, this button is only active if

the Auto Resize feature is turned off via

the SCREEN MENU. This button performs

the Frame function, which enables you to

set the desired aspect ratio for viewing

program materials, independent of the

aspect ratio encoded on the disc. The

following settings are available:

4:3 – This mode may be used with pro-

grams that are known to be in the 4:3

aspect ratio. The image’s original aspect

ratio is preserved unaltered, and black

bars will appear on the left and right

sides of the image to fill the CVPD50’s

16:9 aspect ratio screen.

U Audio/Screen Saver Button: This

button has different functions depending

on whether it is pressed in DVD/Main

mode or Screen mode.

16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9

program material in the full-screen 16:9

mode on the CVPD50.

In DVD/Main mode, pressing this button

accesses the available audio soundtracks

on a DVD. In some cases, the disc may

simply contain different languages. Other

discs may switch the audio format: e.g.,

to linear PCM or Dolby Digital 5.1.

The difference between the Frame and

Letterbox functions is that the Frame

function allows access to the 4:3 and

4:3 TO 16:9 NL modes, which are mainly

useful for materials originating in the

4:3 format.

4:3 TO 16:9 NL – This mode adjusts a 4:3

aspect ratio image to fill the CVPD50’s

6:9 screen while creating a more natural-

looking picture. This is accomplished by

stretching the two sides of the picture

more than the center of the picture where

most of the content is.

Pressing this button may sometimes pro-

vide access to commentary soundtracks.

NOTE: The Letterbox and Frame func-

tions are not available with the internal

DVD/CD changer unless the DVD Auto

Resize function has been turned off using

the screen setup menus. See page 57 for

more information.

In Screen mode, pressing this button

places the CVPD50 display in Screen

Saver mode, in which a JBL logo will

appear to move around the screen. It is

important to turn on the Screen Saver

any time a still image is likely to remain

on screen for more than a few minutes,

because a still image, such as a menu

display, may be “burned” into the display,

causing permanent damage to the plasma

screen that is not covered under warranty.

This danger is not present when a moving

image is displayed.

4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This mode is used

to adjust an image which is designed to

display a 16:9 movie on a 4:3 screen. In

order to preserve the full width of the

movie on a narrower screen, the image

is reduced in size and black bars appear

above and below it. This setting zooms

in on the image, enabling it to fill the

CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing

any portion of the image. The image is

simply enlarged so that its two sides fit

the edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen and

the black bars on top and bottom are

cropped off.

R A-B/Auto Button: This button’s

function differs depending on whether

the internal disc changer (DVD/Main

mode) or the Screen mode is active. To

use this button, be careful to press only

on the lower portion of the button, as

other functions are accessed by pressing

on the upper portion of the button.

V Subtitle/TV/Video Button: This

button has different functions depending

on whether it is pressed in DVD/Main

mode or Screen mode.

In the DVD mode, press this button once

to select the beginning (point A), and

again to select the end (point B) of a pas-

sage you wish to play repeatedly. Press

the button again to end repeat playback.

A-B repeat play is not available for VCD,

MP3, WMA or JPEG discs.

2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL – This mode is used

to adjust an image from a widescreen

film which is actually at a wider ratio

than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to

fit on the smaller screen, the image is

In DVD/Main mode, press this button to

select a subtitle language or to turn sub-

titling off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In Screen mode, or when used with a

video source device that is used for ob-

taining television broadcasts, such as a

cable box, satellite receiver, TiVo, PVR,

DVR or VCR, this button allows you to

select between the television signal or

one of the device’s video inputs. See the

device’s owner’s manual for more infor-

mation on the use of this function.

Z Night Mode/PIP Channel Down

Button: This button’s function differs

depending on the device in use when

it is pressed.

to turn on the PIP function, and again to

turn it off. Pressing and holding this but-

ton for several seconds causes the main

source to appear in the PIP inset display,

and the PIP source to appear in the main

display. Pressing and holding the button

again returns the PIP source to the inset,

and the main source to the main display.

When pressed in the System mode, this

button activates the Night mode, preserv-

ing dialogue (center-channel) intelligibility

at low volume levels when available in

specially encoded Dolby Digital sources.

™

d JBL On Screen Library / Favorite

W Light Button: Press this button to

activate the remote’s backlight for ease

of use in darkened rooms. The light will

remain active for 7 seconds after this but-

ton has been pressed, and will remain lit

for an additional 7 seconds after any

other button on the remote has been

pressed.

Button: This button performs different

functions depending on whether it is

used with the internal DVD changer or

another source.

When used with a compatible device

whose video output has been connected

to the Picture-in-Picture Composite

Video Input a, it changes the channel

of the PIP device to the next lower one. It

has no effect on the CVR700 or CVPD50.

In DVD/Main mode, this button accesses

the JBL On Screen Library, which displays

on screen a thumbnail image and descrip-

tion of each disc currently loaded in the

CVR700’s internal changer, including disc

type and title if available. Use the

⁄/¤/‹/›Navigation Controls G

and the Set Button I to conveniently

select and play any loaded disc.

a Disc Direct/PVR Live Button: This

button’s function differs depending on

which device is in use when it is pressed.

X Macro/A/B/C Buttons: Press these

buttons to store or recall a “Macro”, a

sequence of commands that you may pro-

gram into the remote. See page 80 for

more information on programming and

using macros. These buttons have unique

functions when used with game con-

soles, cable TV boxes and PVRs. See the

owner’s manual for the appropriate

device for further information.

In DVD/Main mode, press it, and then

press the numeric key corresponding to

the position number of the disc you wish

to play to immediately begin playback of

that disc.

When used with cable television boxes or

satellite receivers, pressing this button

scrolls through your list of prepro-

grammed favorite channels.

When a PVR is in use, this button switches

to play of the signal currently being

received by the PVR. See the PVR’s

owner’s manual for more information.

e Play Transport Control Button:

This button is used with the internal DVD

changer or an external DVD player, VCR,

tape deck, digital recorder, CD player or

any other device with a transport mecha-

nism to begin playback.

Y Sleep/PIP Move Button: This but-

ton has different functions depending on

which device is in use when it is pressed.

b Remote Menu/PIP Channel Up

Button: This button’s function differs

depending on whether it is pressed when

a picture-in-picture source is in use.

In the System mode, the Sleep function

is activated to automatically place the

CVR700 and CVPD50 in Standby mode

after a period of time. Each press of the

button changes the time until turn-off: 90

minutes, 80 minutes, 70 minutes, 60 min-

utes, 50 minutes, 40 minutes, 30 minutes,

20 minutes, 10 minutes, Sleep mode Off,

and then cycling back to 90 minutes, and

so forth. When the Sleep timer is in use,

the front-panel displays will dim to half

brightness.

In System mode, this button accesses

the menu system for the remote control,

enabling you to program product codes,

use the EzSet speaker calibration system,

record macros, rename functions, and

perform other functions, as described

on pages 76 through 91.

f Tuning Up/Forward Search

Button: This button has different func-

tions depending on whether the tuner or

another source is in use.

Press this button when the tuner is in use

to change the station to one with a higher

frequency. Each tap of this button will

increase the frequency by one increment.

When the tuner receives a strong enough

signal for adequate reception, MANUAL

TUNEDwill appear in the Lower

Display Line E. When the tuner is in

the Auto/Stereo mode, press and hold

the button to cause the tuner to scan for

the next higher station with acceptable

signal strength and stop. The Lower

Display Line Ewill indicate AUTO

TUNED. When an FM Stereo station is

tuned, the display will read AUTOST

TUNED. When the tuner is in Manual/

Mono mode, you may press and hold this

button to scan upward through the fre-

quencies, and the tuner will stop immedi-

ately when you release this button, even

if no acceptable signal is detected at that

frequency. See page 64 for more informa-

tion on using the tuner.

When used with a compatible device

whose video output has been connected

to the Picture-in-Picture Composite

Video Input a, pressing this button

changes the channel of the PIP device to

the next higher one. It has no effect on

the CVR700 or CVPD50.

In the Screen mode, this button places

the CVPD50 display in Standby mode,

without affecting use of the CVR700. This

function may be preferred for audio-only

listening sessions to prevent burning the

plasma display.

c DVD Setup/PIP On-Off/PIP Swap

Button: This button’s function differs

depending on whether it is used with the

internal DVD changer, or with a source

whose video output has been connected

to the Picture-in-Picture Composite

Video Input a.

When a composite video output from a

PIP-capable device, such as a cable box,

has been connected to the Picture-in-

Picture Composite Video Input a,

pressing this button enables you to move

the PIP inset display around the CVPD50

screen, using the ⁄/¤/‹/ ›

When used with the DVD changer, this

button accesses the DVD setup menu

and enables you to configure the DVD

changer.

Navigation Disc q.

When used in Screen mode with a PIP

source connected, press this button once

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When an optical player source, such as

the internal DVD changer, is in use, press

this button to search quickly forward

through the current track or chapter.

Depending on the type of disc used in the

internal DVD changer, each additional

press will cycle through the available

scan speeds as follows (available scan

speeds may differ for external optical

source devices):

When used with optical sources, such as

the internal disc changer or an external

CD player, press this button once to skip

to the beginning of the next track.

then either use the Preset Up/Down

Buttons Jh to scroll to the desired

preset station, or use the Alphanumeric

Keys l to directly enter the preset sta-

tion location.

The Page Up function is used with cable

and satellite television to page quickly

through on-screen menus. When a disc

containing JPEG still images is being

played using the internal changer, press

this button to scroll to the next image.

In DVD/Main mode, this button may be

used while a DVD-Video disc is playing to

zoom the picture so that it is enlarged.

There are four steps to the zoom function,

each progressively larger. Continue press-

ing the button to cycle through the steps

and return to the normal view. Depending

on the disc, you may also be able to use

the ⁄/¤/‹/›Navigation Controls

G to view different areas of the

enlarged image.

DVD-Audio and DVD-Video discs: 2x, 4x,

16x, 100x

i Distance/Last Channel Button:

This button’s function differs depending

on whether it is used in the System mode

or with another source.

CD and VCD discs: 2x, 4x, 8x

MP3 and WMA discs: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x

In the System mode, this button is used

to enter the distance from each speaker

group to the listening position to avoid

unnatural sound caused by the speakers

being placed at varying distances from

the listener, which could result in delay

artifacts. When this button is pressed,

DISTFRONT10FTwill appear

in the Lower Display Line E, with

FRONTand 10FTboth flashing.

Press the Set Button sto select

the front speaker group, and FRONT

will stop flashing. Use the ⁄/¤

Navigation Controls qto select the

desired distance, and press the Set

Button sagain to enter it. Use the

⁄/¤ Navigation Controls qto

scroll through the remaining speaker

groups: CENTER, SIDE-S(side

surround) or BACK-S(back surround –

this setting may only be available after a

6.1-channel bitstream has been detected;

for example, by playing a Dolby Digital

EX DVD).

See page 68 for more information on

using the internal DVD changer’s trans-

port controls.

l Alphanumeric Keys: Select num-

bers by pressing these keys. When

renaming functions or devices on the

remote, these keys may be used to

select letters.

g Channel/Slow Play Up/Down

Control: These controls use the ‹/›

icons on the same disc as the Volume

Up/Down Controls K. The left and

right arrows have different functions,

depending on the source in use.

m Stereo Mode/Movies Preset

Button: This button’s function varies

depending on whether the System or

Screen mode has been selected.

When a disc containing JPEG still images

is being played using an external disc

player, press the right side of this button

to advance to the next image on the disc

or the left side of this button to return to

the previous image. (When using the

internal changer, the Page Up/Down

Buttons Jh perform this function.)

In System mode, this button is used to

select a stereo listening mode. When the

button is pressed so that 2CHANNEL

STEREOappears in the Lower

Display Line Eand on-screen display,

and the DSP and Surround Off

Surround Mode Indicators Gare lit,

you will enjoy a two-channel presenta-

tion of the sound along with the benefits

of bass management. Depending on

whether your system is configured for 5.1

or 6.1/7.1 channels, the next press of the

button will cause 5CHSTEREOand

then 7CHSTEREOto appear, and

the stereo signal will be routed to all five

(or seven) speakers. See page 62 for

more information on stereo playback

modes.

When a cable television box, satellite

receiver, HDTV tuner or TiVO device is in

use, press the right side of this button to

tune in to the next higher channel, or the

left side to tune in to the next lower

channel.

When used with most video sources, this

button returns to the previously selected

broadcast channel.

When the internal DVD changer or an

external DVD player is in use and a DVD

is playing, press the right side of this but-

ton once to switch to the DVD slow for-

ward play mode. Each additional press

of the right side of the button will cycle

through the available slow-play speeds of

1/2x, 1/4x and 1/8x. Pressing the left side

of the button switches to the DVD slow

reverse play mode. Additional presses of

the left side of the button cycles through

the available slow-play speeds of 1/2x,

1/4x and 1/8x. No slow-play speeds are

available for CDs or other disc types.

j Screen Setup/Disc Menu/Info

Button: This button is used in Screen

mode to access the setup menus to con-

figure and adjust the CVPD50 display

screen. In DVD mode, this button access-

es the menu on the current disc, enabling

you to select the main feature or accom-

panying featurettes for playback or make

other selections, depending on how the

disc is programmed.

In the Screen mode, pressing this button

automatically adjusts the screen’s picture

settings to preprogrammed settings that

are recommended as optimal for viewing

movies.

NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies

Buttons imn

optimize picture

settings for a specific viewing medium.

The Broadcast settings are the most neu-

tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-

mized for clarity. The Movies settings are

softer and less bright. The Sports settings

are more vibrant and optimized for fast-

moving action.

k Memory/Zoom Button: When used

with the tuner, press this button to enter

the currently tuned radio station into a

desired preset location using the

Alphanumeric Keys l to select the

preset location between the numbers 01

and 30. Press this button a second time

to store your selection. To recall that sta-

tion later, select the tuner as the source,

h Preset/Page Up/Forward Skip

Button: This multipurpose button has

a different function depending on the

source in use.

When used with the tuner, this button

scrolls through the preprogrammed sta-

tion presets.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

n DTS Neo:6 Mode/Broadcast

Preset Button: This button’s function

varies depending on whether the System

or Screen mode has been selected.

s IR Transmitter/Receiver: The

infrared emitters and receivers behind

the plastic lens at the top of the remote

communicate the remote codes to the

CVR700 and other programmed devices.

Be certain that the lens is not covered

when using the remote, and point the

lens toward the CVR700 for the best

results. In learning mode, the remote

receives IR codes to be learned through

a receiver behind the lens. See page 78

for more information on learning remote

codes.

In System mode, this button is used to

select a DTS Neo:6 audio surround mode.

See page 62 for more information on the

available DTS Neo:6 options.

In the Screen mode, pressing this button

automatically adjusts the screen’s picture

settings to preprogrammed settings that

are recommended as optimal for viewing

broadcast television programs.

NOTE: DO NOT remove the rubber plug

that is supplied to cover the jack on the

upper right side of the remote. The jack is

not active and is reserved for future use.

NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies

Buttons imn

optimize picture

settings for a specific viewing medium.

The Broadcast settings are the most neu-

tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-

mized for clarity. The Movies settings are

softer and less bright. The Sports settings

are more vibrant and optimized for fast-

moving action.

o DTS Digital Surround Mode

Button: In System mode, when a DTS-

encoded digital source is playing, each

press of this button will scroll through the

available DTS audio surround modes. The

specific choice of modes will vary accord-

ing to the type of encoding on the disc

and your system’s speaker configuration

(5.1-channel or 6.1/7.1-channel). See

page 62 for more information on DTS

modes.

p Dolby Surround Mode Button:

In System mode, this button is used to

select from the available Dolby audio sur-

round modes. Each press of this button

will select one of the Dolby Pro Logic II

(available in 5.1-channel systems) or IIx

(available in 6.1/7.1-channel systems)

modes, Dolby 3 Stereo, or Dolby Digital

when a Dolby Digital-encoded source is

in use. Each press of this button will

scroll through the available modes. See

page 62 for more information on Dolby

modes.

q Mute Button: Press this button to

momentarily silence the CVR700. Press

it again, or use the Volume Up/Down

Control K to restore audio.

r EzSet Microphone Sensor: The

microphone sensor that is used by the

EzSet system is behind the three slots

at the top of the remote control. When

using EzSet to calibrate the CVR700, be

certain that the slots are not covered.

See page 51 for more information

on EzSet.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700R1 REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS

The CVR700R1 remote is capable of performing most of the same functions as the CVR700R2 remote control, which is intended mainly

for system setup, but is smaller and easier to handle on a day-to-day basis. The most noticeable functions missing from the CVR700R1

remote are the LCD information screen, and the EzSet speaker calibration function.

As it is a programmable, learning remote that is capable of controlling the source devices in your system, you will need to program it

separately from the CVR700R2 remote with the codes for your other components. It is already preprogrammed at the factory to control

your CVR700 and its internal disc changer, as well as the CVPD50 screen.

Power On (All)

DVD/Tuner/Auxiliary/VCR/CBL/SAT

Input Selectors

Sports, Broadcast and Movies

Preset Selectors

⁄/¤ Navigation Buttons

Level/DVD Setup/Guide Button

‹/›Navigation Buttons

Set Button

Exit/Cancel Button

Direct/Brightness/Window Button

Game/Digital Recorder/Computer

Input Selectors

Mute Button

Volume Up/Down Control

Disc Direct/Favorite Button

Alphanumeric Keys*

Angle/Tuning Mode (Tune-Manual)

Button

Screen Saver/Letterbox Button

PIP On-Off/PIP Swap Button

Auto/PIP Channel Up Button

Learn/Screen Standby/PIP Channel

Down Button

Light Button

Program/Record Button

Freeze/PVR List Button

Pause Button

Frame/Stop/PVR Live Button

Forward Play Button

Status/TV/Video/PVR Play Button

Tuning Down/Reverse Search Button

Memory/Zoom Button

Tuning Up/Forward Search Button

Preset/Page Up/Down/Forward/

Reverse Skip Buttons

Disc Skip/Last Channel Buttons

Picture/Channel Up/Down and Slow

Play Forward/Reverse Button

System Selector

Screen Selector

Tone Mode/Color/List Button

OSD/Contrast Button

*The alphanumeric keys function as such for all devices except in System mode of the

CVR700, where pressing each key will access certain audio functions as follows:

™

JBL On Screen Library /

1: Dolby Surround Mode Selector

2: DTS Digital Surround Mode Selector

3: DTS Neo:6 Surround Mode Selector

4: Logic 7 Surround Mode Selector

5: DSP Surround Mode Selector

6: Stereo Mode Selector

7: Test Tone

Settings/Distance Button

Menu/Info/Audio Input Selector

Power Off (All)

8: No additional function

9: Night Mode

IR Transmitter/Receiver

0: Sleep Timer

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMPORTANT NOTE: The JBL Cinema

Vision remotes are powerful devices

capable of controlling virtually your entire

home cinema system. In comparison to a

traditional system of the same capabili-

ties, these remotes can replace up to 10

separate remote controls and therefore

end the confusion and clutter associated

with having a different remote for each

of your system components. In order to

achieve this goal, the JBL Cinema Vision

remotes are designed to assume the

duties of controlling different devices

within your system by first pressing one

of the 10 Selector Buttons dfg

. Pressing one of these

another device you selected by first

In DVD mode, this button accesses the

DVD setup menu described on page 53,

and enables you to configure the DVD

changer.

pressing the appropriate Input Selector

Press and hold this button to place all

devices, including the CVR700, the

CVPD50 and any other products whose

codes you have programmed into the

remote, into the Standby mode.

‹ ›

Navigation Buttons: These

buttons are used to navigate the on-

screen configuration menus, to scroll

through options lists and to select various

settings such as delay, speaker configura-

tions, surround modes, digital inputs, etc.

DVD/Tuner/Auxiliary/VCR/CBL/

SAT Input Selectors: Pressing one of

these buttons will perform two actions.

First, the CVR700 will switch to the

source selected. Then, the remote will

switch to the control codes for the selected

source. In order to control the CVR700

Set Button: This button is used to

enter settings into the CVR700’s memory,

or to confirm a selection while setting

delay times, speaker configuration and

output level adjustments. It is used as

the Enter or OK button for most other

devices.

again, press the System Selector

buttons places your remote control in a

different “page”, where the remote but-

tons are assigned control functions avail-

able for that specific purpose. For exam-

ple, all internal DVD changer functions

are accessed by pressing the DVD

and to control the CVPD50 screen, press

the Screen Selector

Exit/Cancel Button: When pro-

Press and hold any of these buttons to

power on the CVR700, the CVPD50 and

the source device, and to begin play of

the source device.

gramming the remote, press this button

to cancel the current function and return

to the previous remote function. When

using the remote to enter frequencies for

direct tuner access or track numbers for

direct access on a CD, press this button

to clear previous entries.

Button d

first, and all CVPD50

Plasma Display functions are accessed

Sports, Broadcast and Movies

by pressing the Screen Button e

Preset Selectors: When the Screen

first, and all overall audio and system

commands for the CVR700 are accessed

by first pressing the System Button

Selector

is active, press any of

these buttons to select the CVPD50 pic-

ture settings that were preset at the fac-

tory for optimum viewing of sporting

events, broadcast television programs or

movies.

Direct/Brightness/Window

Button: Press this button when the

tuner is in use to directly enter a station’s

frequency, or when a CD is in use to

directly enter a track number. After press-

ing this button, press the appropriate

Alphanumeric Keys l to select a

station or track.

. Throughout this manual, you

will see references to the system being

active in DVD, SYSTEM, SCREEN, CABLE/

SAT, or other modes. This means that one

of these 10 keys is to be pressed first to

place your remote in the prescribed mode

before accessing any specific controls. It

is important to always remember to press

the appropriate page selection key before

trying to access any specific functions for

a system or source. This may take a little

bit of discipline and practice at first, but

it should become second nature in a very

short time.

NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies

Buttons imn

optimize picture

settings for a specific viewing medium.

The Broadcast settings are the most neu-

tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-

mized for clarity. The Movies settings are

softer and less bright. The Sports settings

are more vibrant and optimized for fast-

moving action.

When the Screen mode is active, press

this button to adjust the brightness of the

CVPD50. See page 55 for more informa-

tion on screen adjustments. This button

also activates the Window function for

TiVo players. See your TiVo owner’s man-

ual for more information on the Window

function.

⁄

Navigation Buttons: These

buttons are used to navigate the on-

screen configuration menus, to scroll

through options lists and to select various

settings such as delay, speaker configura-

tions, surround modes, digital inputs, etc.

Each function on the CVR700R1 remote

has the same effect on the CVR700,

CVPD50 and other devices as described

earlier for the CVR700R2 remote control

functions; however, functions may be

combined on different keys. Each key has

an independent function depending on

the device currently in use. Be careful to

press the input selector, or the System or

Screen mode selector, corresponding to

the device you wish to control prior to

pressing a button to be sure that your

button press will operate the desired

function. Refer to the function list on

pages 96 through 97 for information on

which function is assigned to a given key

for a given device.

NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies

Buttons imn

optimize picture

settings for a specific viewing medium.

The Broadcast settings are the most neu-

tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-

mized for clarity. The Movies settings are

softer and less bright. The Sports settings

are more vibrant and optimized for fast-

moving action.

Level/DVD Setup/Guide Button:

This button is used to start the process of

setting the CVR700’s output levels to an

external source, such as a favorite DVD.

While the source is playing, press this

button, and then press the ^⁄

Game/Digital Recorder/

Navigation Controls

until the

Computer Input Selectors: Pressing

one of these buttons will perform two

actions. First, the CVR700 will switch to

the source selected. Then, the remote

will switch to the control codes for the

selected source. In order to control

the CVR700 again, press the System

channel to adjust appears. Press the

Set Button

to select that channel,

and then use the ^⁄

Navigation

Controls

again to adjust the

level setting. See page 64 for more

information.

Power On (All): Press this button

Selector

, and to control the

to power on the CVR700, the CVPD50 or

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVPD50 screen, press the Screen

4: Logic 7 Surround Mode Selector:

Press this button to select from among

the available Logic 7 surround modes.

(See page 62 for descriptions of the vari-

ous surround modes.)

Angle/Tuning Mode (Tune-

Selector

Manual) Button: When the DVD mode

is active, press this button to select an

alternate camera angle if available on

the current DVD.

Press and hold any of these buttons to

power on the CVR700, the CVPD50 and

the source device, and to begin play of

the source device.

5: DSP Surround Mode Selector: Press

this button to select one of the DSP audio

surround modes, such as Hall 1, Hall 2 or

Theater. Each press of the button selects

another mode. See page 62 for descrip-

tions of surround modes.

When the tuner is in use, press this but-

ton to change the tuner mode between

manual and automatic. When the button

is pressed so that TUNEAUTO

appears in the Lower Display Line E,

only stations with acceptable signal quality

will be tuned when scanning, and the

tuner will play FM stations in stereo,

when available. In the Auto mode, when

the Tuning Up/Down Buttons 8L

Mute Button: Press this button to

momentarily silence the CVR700. Press

it again, or use the Volume Up/Down

Control

to restore audio.

Volume Up/Down Control: To raise

the volume, press towards the top of the

button (marked ⁄); to lower the volume,

press towards the bottom of the button,

6: Stereo Mode Selector: This button is

used to select a stereo listening mode.

When the button is pressed so that

SURROUNDOFFappears in the

Lower Display Line E, the CVR700

will operate in a bypass mode with true,

fully analog, two-channel left/right stereo

mode with no surround processing or

bass management, as opposed to other

modes where digital processing is used.

When the button is pressed so that

SURROUNDOFFappears in the

Lower Display Line E, and the DSP

and Surround Off Surround Mode

Indicators Gare lit, you will enjoy a

two-channel presentation of the sound

along with the benefits of bass manage-

ment. Depending on whether your system

is configured for 5.1 orf 6.1/7.1 channels,

the next press of the button will cause

either 5CHSTEREOor 7CH

STEREOto appear, and the stereo

signal will be routed to all five (or seven)

speakers. See page 62 for more informa-

tion on stereo playback modes.

where it is marked

¤.

are pressed, the unit will

Disc Direct/Favorite Button: In

DVD mode, press this button, and then

press the numeric key corresponding to

the position number of the disc you wish

to play to immediately begin playback of

that disc.

automatically search for the next avail-

able station with good signal strength.

When this button is pressed so that

TUNEMANUALappears in the

Lower Display Line E, pressing and

holding the Tuning Up/Down Buttons

8Lf

will cause the tuner

When used with cable television boxes or

satellite receivers, pressing this button

scrolls through your list of preprogrammed

favorite channels.

to scan up or down and stop when you

release the button, even if there is no

acceptable signal at that frequency. In

either Auto or Manual mode, each tap of

the Tuning Up/Down Buttons 8L

Alphanumeric Keys: Select num-

bers or letters by pressing these keys,

except in System mode (when operating

the audio section of the CVR700), in

which case each key has the following

functions:

will move the frequency up

or down in single-step increments. When

the FM band is in use, pressing the button

so that the Tune Manual mode is activated

will enable you to tune stations with

weak signals by changing to monaural

reception. See page 64 for more informa-

tion on tuner operation.

1: Dolby Surround Mode Selector:

This button is used to select from the

available Dolby audio surround modes.

Each press of this button will select one

of the Dolby Pro Logic II (available in

5.1-channel systems) or IIx (available in

6.1/7.1-channel systems) modes, Dolby 3

Stereo, or Dolby Digital when a Dolby

Digital-encoded source is in use. Each

press of this button will scroll through the

available modes. See page 62 for more

information on Dolby modes.

Letterbox/Screen Saver Button:

7: Test Tone: Press this button to activate

the CVR700’s test tone that is used to cal-

ibrate speaker output levels. See pages

50 through 52 for more information on

calibrating speaker output levels. (The

EzSet function is not available on the

secondary remote.)

This button performs the Letterbox func-

tion, which enables you to adjust the

screen to eliminate black bars that may

appear on the top and bottom or sides of

the image due to the aspect ratio of the

program material differing from the 16:9

aspect ratio of the CVPD50. In most

cases, the CVR700’s video processor is

able to automatically detect the aspect

ratio setting of the program material and

adjust the display automatically to fill the

screen. However, in some cases the mate-

rial may be a movie displayed in wide-

screen format, or the material may not

contain embedded information necessary

for the CVR700 to make an automatic

adjustment. The available letterbox

modes are:

8: No Additional Function

2: DTS Digital Surround Mode

9: Night Mode: This button activates the

Night mode, which preserves dialogue

(center-channel) intelligibility at low vol-

ume levels when available in specially

encoded Dolby Digital sources.

Selector: When a DTS-encoded digital

source is playing, each press of this but-

ton will scroll through the available DTS

audio surround modes. The specific

choice of modes will vary according to the

type of encoding on the disc and your sys-

tem’s speaker configuration (5.1-channel

or 6.1/7.1-channel). When a DTS source is

not in use, this button has no function in

System mode. See page 62 for more

information on DTS modes.

0: Sleep Timer: The Sleep function is

activated to automatically place the

CVR700 and CVPD50 in Standby mode

after a period of time. Each press of the

button changes the time until turn-off: 90

minutes, 80 minutes, 70 minutes, 60 min-

utes, 50 minutes, 40 minutes, 30 minutes,

20 minutes, 10 minutes, Sleep mode Off,

and then cycling back to 90 minutes, and

so forth. When the Sleep timer is in use,

the front-panel displays will dim to half

brightness.

16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9

program material in the full-screen 16:9

mode on the CVPD50. This setting will

also apply a linear (consistent) stretch to

a 4:3 picture.

3: DTS Neo:6 Surround Mode

Selector: This button is used to select

a DTS Neo:6 audio surround mode. See

page 62 for more information on the

available DTS Neo:6 options.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This mode is used

to adjust an image which is designed to

display a 16:9 movie on a 4:3 screen. In

order to preserve the full width of the

movie on a narrower screen, the image

is reduced in size and black bars appear

above and below it. This setting zooms

in on the image, enabling it to fill the

CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing any

portion of the image. The image is simply

enlarged so that its two sides fit the

edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen and the

black bars on top & bottom are cropped

off. The image is stretched in a linear

fashion (evenly throughout the frame).

which a JBL logo will appear to move

around the screen. It is important to turn

on the Screen Saver any time a still

image is likely to remain on screen for

more than a few minutes, as a still

image, such as a menu display, may be

“burned” into the display, causing perma-

nent damage to the plasma screen that is

not covered under warranty. This danger

is not present when a moving image is

displayed.

connected to the Picture-in-Picture

Composite Video Input a, pressing

this button changes the channel of the

PIP device to the next lower one. It has

no effect on the CVR700 or CVPD50.

Light Button: Press this button to

activate the remote’s backlight for ease

of use in darkened rooms. The light will

remain active for 7 seconds after this but-

ton has been pressed, and will remain lit

for an additional 7 seconds after any other

button on the remote has been pressed.

PIP On-Off/PIP Swap Button:

When used with a PIP source whose

composite video output has been con-

nected to the Picture-in-Picture

Composite Video Input a, press this

button once to turn on the PIP function,

and again to turn it off.

²¹Program/Record Button: In the

DVD mode, press this button to access

the screen for programming play lists.

2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL – This mode is used

to adjust an image from a widescreen

film which is actually at a wider ratio

than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to

fit on the smaller screen, the image is

compressed in a nonlinear fashion, but

no portion of the image is lost.

The Record function is used when the DR

Input Selector

has been activated

for use with an external recorder.

Pressing and holding this button for sev-

eral seconds causes the main source to

appear in the PIP inset display, and the

PIP source to appear in the main display.

Pressing and holding the button again

returns the PIP source to the inset, and

the main source to the main display.

Freeze/PVR List Button: In Screen

mode, you may use this button to pause

playback of the video picture while allow-

ing the audio playback to continue unin-

terrupted.

2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode

is an alternative adjustment for a

widescreen film. The image is not com-

pressed or scaled in any way, but the

outer edges are cropped, sacrificing a

slight amount of the original content in

exchange for 100% accurate image pro-

portions.

When a PVR is in use, press this button

to list recorded materials. Refer to your

PVR’s owner’s manual for information.

Auto/PIP Channel Up Button: In

the Screen mode, this button selects

automatic detection of the aspect ratio

of program material, with playback in the

16:9 format, inserting black bars on the

right and left sides as required for 4:3

images, unless you have configured your

system to display 4:3 images stretched

to fill the 16:9 screen. This function is

not available with HD (480p or better)

signals. See pages 13 and 27 for more

information on configuring aspect ratios.

Pause Button: This button may be

used with the internal disc changer or

with an external DVD or CD player or

other playback device. Pressing the Pause

button will pause play, allowing you to

step forward frame by frame through a

DVD with each press of the Forward

4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As HDTV is new to

the broadcast industry and there is still a

considerable amount of older 4:3 stan-

dard recording & broadcast equipment in

use, 4:3 material is sometimes broadcast

in HD 16:9 format with black or other

color bars on its sides. Since these bars

are a part of the actual picture, conven-

tional picture resizing techniques do not

work in eliminating them. This setting is

specifically designed to address this

problem. It first crops the bars off the

sides of the 16:9 picture to render it a 4:3

picture, and then performs a natural-look-

ing nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16:9

screen.

Skip Button

Button again, or the Play Button

. Press the Pause

to resume normal play.

Frame/Stop/PVR Live Button: In

Screen mode, this button performs the

Frame function, which enables you to

set the desired aspect ratio for viewing

program materials, independent of the

aspect ratio encoded on the disc. The

following settings are available through

the Frame function:

When used with a PIP-capable device

whose composite video output has been

connected to the Picture-in-Picture

Composite Video Input a, pressing

this button changes the channel of the

PIP device to the next higher one. It has

no effect on the CVR700 or CVPD50.

Learn/Screen Standby/PIP

16:9 – This setting is used to display 16:9

program material in the full-screen 16:9

mode on the CVPD50.

Channel Down Button: Press this but-

ton to begin the process of “learning” the

codes from another product’s remote into

the CVR700 secondary remote. (See page

93 for more information on using the

remote’s learning function.)

The Letterbox adjustment is temporary,

and will only apply to that disc. We

encourage you to experiment with the

modes to find one that suits you for a

given presentation.

4:3 TO 16:9 NL – This mode adjusts a 4:3

aspect ratio image to fill the CVPD50’s

16:9 screen while creating a more natural

looking picture. This is accomplished by

stretching the two sides of the picture

more than the center of the picture where

most of the content is.

NOTE: The Letterbox and Frame func-

tions are not available with the internal

DVD/CD changer unless the DVD Auto

Resize function has been turned off using

the Screen setup menus. See page 57 for

more information.

When used in the Screen mode, this but-

ton places the CVPD50 display in Standby

mode, without affecting use of the CVR700.

This function may be preferred for audio-

only listening sessions to aviod burning a

still image into the plasma display.

4:3 LTRBOX TO 16:9 – This mode is used

to adjust an image which is designed to

display a 16:9 movie on a 4:3 screen. In

order to preserve the full width of the

When pressed and held for at least two

seconds, this button places the CVPD50

display screen in Screen Saver mode, in

When used with a PIP-capable device

whose composite video output has been

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

movie on a narrower screen, the image

is reduced in size and black bars appear

above and below it. This setting zooms

in on the image, enabling it to fill the

CVPD50’s 16:9 screen without losing

any portion of the image. The image is

simply enlarged so that its two sides fit

the edges of the CVPD50 16:9 screen and

the black bars on top and bottom are

cropped off.

The stop function may be used with the

internal disc changer or with an external

DVD or CD player or other playback

device. When the internal disc changer is

in use, pressing the Stop button once will

place a DVD in resume mode, meaning

that you may press the Play Button e

Depending on the type of disc used in the

internal DVD changer, each additional

press will cycle through the available

scan speeds as follows (available scan

speeds may differ for external optical

source devices):

DVD-Audio and DVD-Video discs: 2x, 4x,

16x, 100x

to continue playing the disc from the

point where it was stopped. If you press

the Stop button twice, play will resume

from the beginning of the disc.

CD and VCD discs: 2x, 4x, 8x

MP3 and WMA discs: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x

2.35 LB TO 16:9 NL – This mode is used

to adjust an image from a widescreen

film which is actually at a wider ratio

than the CVPD50’s 16:9 ratio. In order to

fit on the smaller screen, the image is

compressed, but no portion of the image

is lost.

See page 68 for more information on

using the internal DVD changer’s trans-

port controls.

When a PVR is in use, this button switches

to play of the signal currently being

received by the PVR. See the PVR’s

owner’s manual for more information.

Memory/Zoom Button: When

used with the tuner, press this button to

enter the currently tuned radio station

into a desired preset location using the

Forward Play Button: This button

may be used with the internal disc changer

or with an external DVD or CD player or

other playback device.

2.35 LB TO 16:9 CROPPED – This mode

is an alternative adjustment for a

widescreen film. The image is not com-

pressed or scaled in any way, but the

outer edges are cropped, sacrificing a

slight amount of the original content in

exchange for 100% accurate image pro-

portions.

Numeric Keys

to select the preset

location between the numbers 01 and 30.

Press this button a second time to store

your selection. To recall that station later,

select the tuner as the source, then either

Status/TV/Video/PVR Play

Button: Press it to display the CVR700

system’s status, or an external DVD

recorder’s status.

use the Preset Up/Down Buttons

In Screen mode, or when used with a

video source device that is used for

obtaining television broadcasts, such as a

cable box, satellite receiver, TiVo, PVR,

DVR or VCR, this button allows you to

select between the television signal or

one of the device’s video inputs. See the

device’s owner’s manual for more infor-

mation on the use of this function.

to scroll to the desired preset station, or

use the Numeric Keys

to directly

4:3 HDTV TO 16:9 – As HDTV is new to

the broadcast industry and there are still

a considerable amount of older 4:3 stan-

dard recording and broadcast equipment

in use, 4:3 material is sometimes broad-

cast in HD 16:9 format with black or other

color bars on its sides. Since these bars

are a part of the actual picture, conven-

tional picture resizing techniques do not

work in eliminating them. This setting is

specifically designed to address this prob-

lem. It first crops the bars off of the sides

of the 16:9 picture to render it a 4:3 pic-

ture, and then performs a natural-looking

nonlinear stretch to fill the entire 16:9

screen.

enter the preset station location.

In DVD mode, this button may be used

while a DVD-Video disc is playing to zoom

the picture so that it is enlarged. There

are four steps to the zoom function, each

progressively larger. Continue pressing

the button to cycle through the steps and

return to the normal view. Depending on

the disc, you may also be able to use the

²⁷Tuning Down/Reverse Search

Button: Press this button when the tuner

is in use to change the station to one

with a lower frequency. Each tap of this

button will decrease the frequency by one

increment. When the tuner receives a

strong enough signal for adequate recep-

tion, MANUALTUNEDwill appear in

the Lower Display Line E. When the

tuner is in the Auto/Stereo mode, press

and hold the button to cause the tuner to

scan for the next lower station with

acceptable signal strength, and stop. The

Lower Display Line Ewill indicate

AUTOTUNED. When an FM Stereo

station is tuned, the display will read

AUTOSTTUNED. When the tuner

is in Manual/Mono mode, you may press

and hold this button to scan downward

through the frequencies, and the tuner

will stop immediately when you release

this button, even if no acceptable signal

is detected at that frequency. See page

64 for more information.

⁄/¤/‹/›Navigation Controls

to view different areas of the

enlarged image.

Tuning Up/Forward Search

Button: Press this button when the tuner

is in use to change the station to one

with a higher frequency. Each tap of this

button will increase the frequency by one

increment. When the tuner receives a

strong enough signal for adequate recep-

tion, MANUALTUNEDwill appear in

the Lower Display Line E. When the

tuner is in the Auto/Stereo mode, press

and hold the button to cause the tuner

to scan for the next higher station with

acceptable signal strength, and stop. The

Lower Display Line Ewill indicate

AUTOTUNED. When an FM Stereo

station is tuned, the display will read

AUTOSTTUNED. When the tuner

is in Manual/Mono mode, you may press

and hold this button to scan downward

through the frequencies, and the tuner

will stop immediately when you release

this button, even if no acceptable signal

4:3 – This mode may be used with pro-

grams that are known to be in the 4:3

aspect ratio. The image’s original aspect

ratio is preserved unaltered, and black

bars will appear on the left and right

sides of the image to fill the CVPD50’s

16:9 aspect ratio screen.

The difference between the Frame and

Letterbox functions is that the Frame

function allows access to the 4:3 and

4:3 TO 16:9 NL modes, which are mainly

useful for materials originating in the

4:3 format.

NOTE: The Letterbox and Frame functions

are not available with the internal DVD/

CD changer unless the DVD Auto Resize

function has been turned off using the

Screen setup menus. See page 57 for

more information.

When an optical player source, such as

the internal DVD changer, is in use, press

this button to search quickly in reverse

through the current track or chapter.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

is detected at that frequency. See page

64 for more information on using the

tuner.

in to the next higher channel, or the bot-

tom to tune in to the next lower channel.

Screen mode is active, press this button

to adjust the contrast of the CVPD50 dis-

play. See page 55 for more information on

screen adjustments.

When the internal DVD changer or an

external DVD player is in use, press the

top of this button once to switch to the

DVD slow forward play mode. Each addi-

tional press of the top of the button will

cycle through the available slow-play

speeds of 1/2x, 1/4x and 1/8x. Pressing

the bottom of the button switches to the

DVD slow reverse play mode. Additional

presses of the bottom of the button

cycles through the available slow-play

speeds of 1/2x, 1/4x and 1/8x. No slow-

play speeds are available for CDs or other

disc types.

When an optical player source, such as

the internal DVD changer, is in use, press

this button to search quickly forward

through the current track or chapter.

Depending on the type of disc used in the

internal DVD changer, each additional

press will cycle through the available

scan speeds as follows (available scan

speeds may differ for external optical

source devices):

NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies

Buttons imn

optimize picture

settings for a specific viewing medium.

The Broadcast settings are the most neu-

tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-

mized for clarity. The Movies settings are

softer and less bright. The Sports settings

are more vibrant and optimized for fast-

moving action.

DVD-Audio and DVD-Video discs: 2x, 4x,

16x, 100x

JBL On Screen Library/Settings/

Distance Button: In DVD mode, this but-

ton accesses the JBL On Screen Library,

which displays on screen a thumbnail

image and description of each disc cur-

rently loaded in the CVR700’s internal

changer, including disc type and title

if available. Use the ⁄/¤/‹/›

CD and VCD discs: 2x, 4x, 8x

System Selector: Press this button

MP3 and WMA discs: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x

to select the control codes for the CVR700.

See page 68 for more information on

using the internal DVD changer’s trans-

port controls.

Screen Selector: Press this button

to select the control codes for the

CVPD50 screen.

Preset/Page Up/Down/Forward/

Navigation Controls

Set Button

and the

Tone Mode/Color/List Button:

Reverse Skip Buttons: When used with

the tuner, these buttons scroll through the

preprogrammed station presets.

to conveniently select

This button controls the tone settings,

enabling adjustment of the bass and tre-

ble boost or cut. You may also use it to

disable the tone controls, for a “flat”

response. The first press of the button

displays a TONEINmessage in the

Lower Display Line E. To disable the

controls, press the ⁄/¤ Navigation

and play any loaded disc.

In the System mode, this button is used

to enter the distance from each speaker

to the listening position to avoid unnatu-

ral sound caused by the speakers being

placed at varying distances from the

listener, which could result in delay

artifacts. When this button is pressed,

When used with optical sources, such as

the internal disc changer or an external

CD player, press the forward button once

to skip to the beginning of the next track.

Press the reverse button once to return to

the beginning of the current track, and

once again quickly to skip to the begin-

ning of the previous track. When the

Controls

until the display reads

TONEOUT. To change the bass or tre- DISTFRONT10FTwill appear

ble settings, press this button again until in the Lower Display Line E, with

the desired control appears in the Lower FRONTand 10FTboth flashing.

Pause Button

has been pressed

while a DVD is playing, the picture

advances frame by frame each time the

forward skip button is pressed.

Display Line Eand in the on-screen

display, and then press the⁄/¤

Press the Set Button

to select

the front speaker group, and FRONT

will stop flashing. Use the ⁄/¤

Navigation Controls

until the

desired setting appears.

Navigation Controls

to select the

The Page Up and Down functions are

used with cable and satellite television to

page quickly through on-screen menus.

desired distance, and press the Set

again to enter it. Use the

⁄/¤ Navigation Controls

scroll through the remaining speaker

groups: CENTER, SIDE-S(side

surround) or BACK-S(back surround,

available only after a 6.1-channel bit-

stream has been detected).

When the Screen mode is active, press

this button to adjust the picture settings

of the CVPD50 display. See page 55 for

more information on screen adjustments.

This button also activates the List func-

tion for TiVo players. See your TiVo

owner’s manual for more information

on the List function.

Button

Disc Skip/Last Channel Buttons:

In the DVD mode, press this button to

begin play of the next available disc in

the changer.

When used with most video sources, this

button returns to the previously selected

broadcast channel.

Menu/Info/Audio Input Selector:

NOTE: The Sports/Broadcast/ Movies

In DVD mode, this button accesses the

menu on the current disc, enabling you to

select the main feature or accompanying

featurettes for playback or make other

selections, depending on how the disc is

programmed.

Buttons imn

optimize picture

Picture/Channel Up/Down and

settings for a specific viewing medium.

The Broadcast settings are the most neu-

tral, balanced and accurate, and are opti-

mized for clarity. The Movies settings are

softer and less bright. The Sports settings

are more vibrant and optimized for fast-

moving action.

Slow Play Forward/Reverse Button:

When a disc containing JPEG still images

is being played using the internal disc

changer, press the top of this button to

advance to the next image on the disc or

the bottom of this button return to the

previous image.

In System mode, press this button to

assign one of the Digital Audio Inputs

9)cdefhijk to a source.

See page 60 for more information on

using digital inputs.

OSD/Contrast Button: Press this

When a cable television box, satellite

receiver, HDTV tuner or TiVo device is in

use, press the top of this button to tune

button when the System mode is active

to access the setup menu for the

CVR700’s audio functions. When the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power Off (All): Press this button

to place the CVR700 and CVPD50, or a

selected device, in the Standby mode.

Press and hold this button to place all

devices, including the CVR700, the

CVPD50 and any other products whose

codes you have programmed into the

remote, into the Standby mode.

IR Transmitter/Receiver: The

infrared emitters and receivers behind

the plastic lens at the top of the remote

communicate the remote codes to the

CVR700 and other programmed devices.

Be certain that the lens is not covered

when using the remote, and point the

lens toward the CVR700 for the best

results. In learning mode, the remote

receives IR codes to be learned through

a receiver behind the lens. See page 93

for more information on learning remote

codes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLING AND CONNECTING THE EQUIPMENT

Before unpacking and placing the JBL

Cinema Vision components, it is impor-

tant to select appropriate locations for

each component. Make sure that all

power switches are turned off and all

equipment remains unplugged from AC

power until the system is completely

installed and connected in order to pre-

vent electric shock, or transient signals

that may damage equipment.

connect one end of a Y-adaptor intercon-

nect to the Subwoofer Output §, and

connect each end to the LFE input of a

powered subwoofer.

ware and/or bracket installation. Be sure

to follow these bracket assembly and

installation instructions carefully. If

you have any questions or doubts about

your ability to correctly wall-mount the

CVPD50 plasma display, consult with your

authorized JBL dealer or custom installer.

In 5.1-channel applications, two of the

surround speakers should be placed

slightly behind the listening position and,

ideally, should face each other and be at

a level higher than the listeners’ ears. If

that is not possible, they may be placed

on a wall behind the listening position,

facing forward. In 7.1-channel applica-

tions, place two of the surround speakers

in the side positions, and place the two

surround back speakers on the rear wall.

It is appropriate to configure the CVR700

for either 5.1- or 7.1-channel operation,

but not for 6.1 channels. When 6.1-chan-

nel program material or a 6.1-channel

processing mode is in use, material for

the surround back channel will be out-

putted simultaneously through both

the Surround Back Left and Right

Speaker Outputs ¡. Connecting only

one loudspeaker to these speaker termi-

nals will not only deprive you of the bene-

fits of 7.1-channel surround modes, such

as Logic 7, but will also interfere with the

functioning of EzSet speaker calibration,

as described on page 51. It may also put

undesirable strain on the surround back

amplifier circuits and power supplies.

The bracket must be installed in wood

studs; there is no wall-anchor option. The

slot holes in the bracket are designed to

accommodate 16-inch on-center wall

studs. See the illustration (Figure 1) for

the dimensions of the bracket.

IMPORTANT NOTES:

•

Never attempt to lift the CVPD50 plasma

screen by yourself. Always make sure

an assistant is available to lift the plasma

screen with you.

20-1/4"

• Do not block the ventilation holes of

the CVR700, and make sure that air can

circulate freely around it.

• Read through this manual before begin-

ning installation.

• Remember to observe the color coding

when connecting audio and video

cables.

16"

Figure 1

The bracket must be installed using four

lag bolts, each at least 1/4 inch in diame-

ter. Each bolt must be long enough to

engage in the stud by at least 2 inches.

Recommended Placement

The JBL Cinema Vision system will

provide the best results when installed

in a rectangular room, with the screen

installed on one of the shorter walls.

In order to avoid splintering the wall

studs, it is necessary to drill pilot holes

for each lag bolt.

The front speakers should be placed the

same distance from each other as they

are from the listening position. They

should be placed at about the same

height from the floor as the listeners’

ears will be, or they may be angled

toward the listeners.

Use a carpenter’s level to ensure that the

bracket is installed squarely. You will

observe that the bracket uses slotholes

to assist you in making adjustments to

level the bracket before fully tightening

the lag bolts.

In Dolby Digital and DTS systems, it is

best to aim all of the speakers (except the

subwoofer) toward the listening position

at about ear-level height. The low-fre-

quency material reproduced by the sub-

woofer is mostly omnidirectional, and this

speaker may be placed in a convenient

location in the room. However, bass

reproduction will be maximized when the

subwoofer is placed in a corner along

the same wall as the front speakers.

Experiment with subwoofer placement by

temporarily placing the subwoofer in the

listening position and moving around the

room until the bass reproduction is best.

Place the subwoofer in that location.

The center channel speaker should be

placed slightly behind the front left and

right speakers, and no more than 2 feet

above or below the tweeters of the left

and right speakers. This placement may

be obtained by placing the CVPD50

screen, and the left, right and center

speakers on a credenza using the included

pair of CVTS50 table stands for the left

and right CVSAT50 speakers, and the

included credenza stand for the CVPD50

screen and CVCEN50 center speaker.

Figure 2

Once the bracket has been installed. Two

people may carefully lift the CVPD50

screen and lower it onto the bracket so

that the two hooks on either side of the

bracket engage in the openings on the

underside of the CVPD50.

Wall-Mounting the CVPD50 Plasma

Display

The JBL Cinema Vision speaker system

may be used in 5.1- or 7.1-channel appli-

cations. Your system includes enough

loudspeakers for a 5.1-channel system.

Additional pairs of CVSAT50 satellite

speakers are available from your JBL

dealer or custom installer, along with

pairs of CVSAT50 table stands, should

you wish to upgrade to a 7.1-channel

system.

Due to its weight and fragility, there are

special concerns in wall-mounting the

CVPD50 screen. The customer is solely

responsible for proper selection of mount-

ing hardware not included with the

CVPD50 plasma screen, and for proper

installation of the wall bracket, including

but not limited to the selection of appro-

priate weight-bearing supports and proper

use of the bracket. JBL disclaims any lia-

bility for the selection of mounting hard-

Installing the CVPD50 Plasma Display

On the Included Credenza Stand

If wall-mounting the CVPD50 plasma

screen is not convenient or practical, you

may prefer to install the CVPD50 on a cre-

denza or other sturdy piece of furniture

using the included credenza stand. In

addition to offering an elegant appear-

If desired, a second subwoofer may be

added to create a 5.2 or 7.2 system. If so,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ance that matches that of the optional

CVTS50 speaker stands, the stand

includes a cradle for placement of the

center speaker.

To ensure a proper fit, GENTLY place the

plasma display on a carpeted floor with

one end up. Make sure that the screen

itself is at all times perpendicular to the

floor. While one person holds the unit

steady, the other person should check the

fit of each column in the two openings on

the underside of the unit. Loosen, move

and retighten the column feet until a

proper and secure fit is achieved. Then

secure the columns in their openings

using the two supplied hex bolts and the

same 5mm hex wrench you used to

attach the feet to the columns.

of opening a new world of video enjoy-

ment with sharpness and beauty far

beyond any television you have ever

owned. As this may be the first plasma

display device you have ever owned, it is

important to be aware of some unique

properties of this technology.

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES:

• The credenza stand consists of three

main parts: two metal columns and a

glass base. Be extremely careful in

handling the fragile glass base to

avoid breakage that might result in

personal injury.

A plasma display works by using a grid

containing millions of “cells”, each filled

with phosphorous that glows in red,

green or blue when it receives an electri-

cal charge. The charge is supplied by a

wired grid that allows the video process-

ing logic to pinpoint each individual cell

to determine whether or not to turn it

“on”. The cells are sandwiched by glass

plates that seal the phosphorous in place.

The combination of cells, known as pixels

in video display terminology, when prop-

erly functioning can present a color pic-

ture with incredibly high resolution.

• The credenza stand is only intended for

use with the CVPD50 plasma screen.

Attempting to use the stand with any

other model plasma screen or any

other device is unsafe and may result

in personal injury and damage to the

equipment.

This method is preferable to placing the

stand on the credenza and lowering the

plasma display onto it, which may cause

the installers to place the display’s

weight unevenly on the columns for a

moment, causing the glass base to snap,

which may result in personal injury.

• The stand must be placed in a safe

location, protected from young children

and pets who might topple the stand,

possibly resulting in serious injury.

Never place the stand so that any part

of it is sticking out over the edge of

the credenza, table, shelf or other sur-

face underneath it.

It is the responsibility of the person

installing the display to properly and

securely mount the credenza stand to the

plasma display.

Given its construction, the CVPD50 is very

fragile, and requires extreme care in han-

dling. Once installed, it’s easy to use,

although there are a few points for you

to be aware of.

Two people may now right the CVPD50

and carefully place it in the desired loca-

tion. Do not lean the CVPD50 on the

stand while righting it, as this will cause

the glass to snap, possibly resulting in

personal injury. Carry the assembly by

holding the bottom and sides of the

CVPD50 plasma display itself, not by

holding the stand.

1. It is possible for a phenomenon known

as “burn-in” to occur when the phos-

phorous cells remain turned on for too

long a stretch of time. This is liable to

occur when a still image, such as a

menu screen or even the CVPD50’s

own start-up screen, remains on

screen for more than a few minutes.

In order to protect against burn-in, the

CVPD50’s screen saver will be activated

after it detects 2 minutes of no move-

ment on screen. It is not possible to

disable the screen saver.

• Make certain that your credenza or

other furniture is capable of supporting

the weight of the CVPD50 in a stable

fashion.

• If it becomes necessary to move the

CVPD50 to another location, two people

should carry it by holding the plasma

screen. Do not attempt to carry the

CVPD50 while holding it by the stand.

However, the screen saver does not

function for the DVI source. Therefore,

it is crucial that you set your source

device to activate its screen saver after

2 minutes of inactivity on screen, par-

ticularly if you are using the CVPD50

with your computer, where an image

such as a spreadsheet may remain on

screen for a long period of time.

Figure 4

Figure 3

After the video cable has been connected

to the CVPD50 as described below, and

after the speaker wire has been connected

to the CVCEN50 speaker as described in

its owner’s manual, you may carefully

place the CVCEN50 speaker in the cradle

below the screen formed by the two top

feet of the credenza stand. The bottom of

the grille will fit snugly behind the two

stops at the front of the top feet.

Each column is made up of two parts: the

main column and the top foot. Using the

supplied bolts, attach each foot to its col-

umn, but do not fully tighten the bolts.

Use a 5mm hex key (not supplied).

Burn-in is also of concern when you are

listening to audio CDs, which have no

visual information so that the CVPD50’s

start-up screen remains on. You may

wish to activate the Screen Standby

function, which places the screen in

standby mode, by pressing the Screen

Selector e ³⁴followed by the

Carefully insert the glass base into the

slot in the column, making sure to line up

each column flush with the edge of the

base. This will insure that the base is

installed evenly for maximum stability

and so that the columns will line up prop-

erly with the openings on the underside

of the CVPD50.

Important Information About the

CVPD50 Plasma Display

Screen Standby Button Y

Press the button again to restore the

video display.

Your new JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50

high-definition plasma display is capable

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following tips can help you avoid

burn-in:

4. There are ergonomic concerns that

apply generally to reduce viewer

fatigue and eyestrain.

• Be particularly careful during the first

100 hours of use to display mainly

moving images or frequently changing

still images.

• The optimal viewing distance for the

50-inch CVPD50 plasma display is 12

to 16 feet.

• Use your display in full-screen (16:9)

format, rather than letterbox (black

bars at top and bottom of screen) or

4:3 (black bars to left and right of

screen).

• The background lighting in the room

should be sufficient to read by, as

too much light reduces the contrast,

and too little light is difficult for your

eyes to adjust to.

• Remember to activate your comput-

er’s own screen saver when using

it with the CVPD50. This also holds

for a DVD player or other device con-

nected to the DVI input.

• When using the CVPD50 plasma dis-

play with your computer, select fonts

and backgrounds that are rich in con-

trast, such as a black font on a white

background, to avoid eye fatigue that

can result from using red or blue

fonts on a dark background.

• Even after the first 100 hours of use,

try to display moving images as much

of the time as possible.

• Switch off the display when it is not

being used by pressing the Screen

Standby Button Y

described above.

• Avoid increasing the contrast and

brightness settings.

• Whenever possible, choose to display

images containing a variety of colors

and color shades.

2. Although extreme care is taken during

the manufacturing process, it is possi-

ble that your CVPD50 plasma display

will at some point develop some minor

pixel dropouts. It is extremely unlikely

that this will occur or be noticeable

and, as such, in most cases it will not

be considered a sufficient defect for

warranty replacement (repair of indi-

vidual pixels is not possible). Should

you have any concerns, kindly contact

your custom installer for further

guidance.

3. Over a long period of time, the natural

consumption of the phosphorous layer

may result in a slight loss of brightness

or contrast. This is normal, and should

not be noticeable.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE: While most speaker manufactur-

ers adhere to an industry convention of

using black terminals for negative and

red ones for positive, some may vary from

this configuration. To ensure proper

phase and optimal performance, consult

the identification plate on your speaker

or the speaker’s manual to verify polarity.

If you do not know the polarity of your

speaker, ask your dealer for advice before

proceeding, or consult the manufacturer.

We also recommend that the length of

cable used to connect speaker pairs be

identical. For example, use the same

length piece of cable to connect the

front-left and front-right or surround-left

and surround-right speakers, even if the

speakers are a different distance from

the CVR700.

Subwoofer

Basic Installation

The JBL Cinema Vision system offers a vari-

ety of entertainment options, including play-

back of DVDs and CDs, and radio listening,

and it may be enjoyed with no additional

equipment. However, it is also compatible

with most available audio/video devices.

IMPORTANT NOTE: For your personal

safety and to avoid possible damage to

your equipment and speakers, it is

always a good practice to turn off and

unplug the CVR700, CVPD50 and ALL

source equipment from AC power before

making any audio or video system con-

nections.

Surround Speakers

†

Step One: Connect the Front, Center,

Surround and Surround Back Speaker

Outputs ¡™£¢ to the respective

speakers.

†

It is appropriate to configure the CVR700

for either 5.1- or 7.1-channel operation,

but not for 6.1 channels. When 6.1-chan-

nel program material or a 6.1-channel

processing mode is in use, material for

the surround back channel will be out-

putted simultaneously through both

the Back Surround Left and Right

Speaker Outputs ¡. Connecting only

one loudspeaker to these speaker termi-

nals will not only deprive you of the ben-

efits of 7.1-channel surround modes, such

as Logic 7, but will also interfere with the

functioning of EzSet speaker calibration,

as described on page 51. It may also put

undesirable strain on the surround back

amplifier circuits and power supplies.

— 6 f

1.5 — 1.

To ensure that all the audio signals are

carried to your speakers without loss of

clarity or resolution, we suggest that you

use high-quality speaker cable. Many

brands of cable are available and the

choice of cable may be influenced by the

distance between your speakers and the

receiver, the type of speakers you use, per-

sonal preferences and other factors. Your

dealer or installer is a valuable resource

to consult in selecting the proper cable.

Regardless of the brand of cable selected,

we recommend that you use a cable con-

structed of multistrand copper with a

gauge of 14 or smaller. Remember that in

specifying cable, the lower the number,

the thicker the cable. Cable with a gauge

of 16 may be used for short runs of less

than 3 meters (10 feet). We do not recom-

mend that you use cables with an AWG

equivalent of 18 or higher, due to the

power loss and degradation in perform-

ance that will occur. Cables that are run

inside walls should have the appropriate

markings to indicate listing with UL, CSA

or other appropriate testing agency stan-

dards. Questions about running cables

inside walls should be referred to your

installer or a licensed electrician who is

familiar with the NEC and/or the applica-

ble local building codes in your area.

^†Alternate placement for surround speak-

ers when only 5.1 channels are used;

required placement for back surround

speakers in 7.1-channel systems.

The front speakers should be placed the

same distance from each other as they are

from the listening position. They should be

placed at about the same height from the

floor as the listeners’ ears will be, or they

may be angled toward the listeners.

The center channel speaker should be

placed slightly behind the front left and

right speakers, and no more than 2 feet

above or below the tweeters of the left

and right speakers. It may be convenient

to place the center speaker in the cradle

of the CVPD50 credenza stand, as shown

in the drawing.

Connections to a subwoofer are normally

made via a line-level audio connection

from the Subwoofer Output § to the

line-level input of a subwoofer with a

built-in amplifier.

Speaker Placement

Front Speakers

The JBL Cinema Vision system may be

used in 5.1- or 7.1-channel applications. In

5.1-channel applications, two of the surround

speakers should be placed slightly behind

the listening position and, ideally, should

face each other and be at a level higher

than the listeners’ ears. If that is not possible,

they may be placed on a wall behind the

listening position, facing forward.

When connecting wires to the speakers,

be certain to observe proper polarity.

Note that the positive (+) terminal of each

speaker connection now carries a specific

color code, as noted on page 20. How-

ever, most speakers still use a red

terminal for the positive (+) connection.

Connect the “negative” or “black” wire to

the same terminal on both the receiver

and the speaker.

Center Channel Speaker

NOTE: In 5.1-channel systems, the

two rear speakers are called simply the

surround speakers, whether they are

placed to the sides of or behind the

listening position. In 7.1-channel systems,

there are four surround speakers, two of

which are referred to as side surround

speakers, due to their placement to the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

sides of the listening position. The two

remaining speakers are referred to as

back surround speakers, as they are

placed in back of (behind) the listening

position. In 7.1-channel applications,

place two of the surround speakers in the

side positions, and place the two back

surround speakers on the rear wall.

the two remotes are preprogrammed to

operate only certain types of devices,

as listed below, although you may con-

nect any compatible audio/video device

to any of the inputs. Although you may

reprogram an input selector on the

main remote control so that its device

type matches the device you wish to

connect, the secondary remote’s input

selectors may not be reprogrammed.

Therefore, we recommend that you con-

nect compatible devices to each source.

Connect the supplied FM antenna to the

FM (75-ohm) Connection . The FM

In Dolby Digital and DTS systems, such as

JBL Cinema Vision, it is best to aim all of

the speakers (except the subwoofer)

toward the listening position at about ear-

level height.

antenna may be an external roof antenna,

an inside powered or wire-lead antenna

or a connection from a cable TV system.

If the antenna or connection uses 300-

ohm twin-lead cable, you must use an

optional 300-ohm-to-75-ohm adaptor to

make the connection.

Input

Device Types Preprogrammed

Source In Main Remote

The low-frequency material reproduced by

the subwoofer is mostly omnidirectional,

and this speaker may be placed in a con-

venient location in the room. However,

bass reproduction will be maximized when

the subwoofer is placed in a corner, along

the same wall as the front speakers.

Experiment with subwoofer placement by

temporarily placing the subwoofer in the

listening position and moving around the

room until the bass reproduction is best.

Place the subwoofer in that location.

AUX

VCR

TV, HD Tuner, VCR/Combo,

DVD, CD, CABLE, SAT

If you would like to install any external

source devices in your system, proceed

to Step Four below. Otherwise, you are

almost ready to begin enjoying your JBL

Cinema Vision home theater system.

VCR/Combo

CBL/SAT CABLE, SAT, HD Tuner

GAME/ GAME, CAMCORDER

CAM

Step Four: You may wish to install addi-

tional components to your system. We re-

commend installing devices to the source

input jacks labeled for the corresponding

device type to benefit from both the pre-

assignment of digital audio inputs, and the

programming of the two remote controls.

DVDR, CDR, DVHS, TIVO, PVR

DVI/

DVI/DVD, DVI/CABLE,

COMP DVI/SAT, HD Tuner

• The analog and digital audio connec-

tions, as well as the composite, S-

video and component video connec-

tions, are dedicated to each source

input as labeled and may not be reas-

signed to another source. Be certain to

make all of the connections for each

source device to the correct jacks.

Step Two: Thanks to its sophisticated

video processor, the CVR700 is able to

upconvert composite, S-video and compo-

nent video source signals for a single-

cable connection to the screen. Connect

Audio/video components require that

both an audio and a video connection be

made. The type of connection will depend

on the capabilities of your component.

™

the included proprietary JBL Digital Link

cable to the Output to JBL Cinema

Audio connections may be analog or digi-

tal. We recommend using digital audio

connections whenever possible for supe-

rior sound reproduction. You may also

wish to make analog audio connections

as a backup.

Vision CVPD50 Screen

on the back

of the CVR700, and to the digital input on

the underside of the CVPD50. The connec-

tor is located on the right side of the

screen when facing it. You may wish to

use a mirror to assist you in orienting the

cable connector correctly. Note that this

cable uses a proprietary system, and

should not be connected to any display

device other than the CVPD50.

Cable/Satellite Source Input

Since the JBL Cinema Vision system does

not include a TV tuner, you may wish to

connect a cable TV box, satellite TV

receiver, HDTV set-top tuner or another

device capable of receiving TV broad-

casts to the CVR700. This device should

be connected to the Cable/Sat source

input jacks. Select either the Cable/

Satellite Coaxial Digital Audio Input

d or the Cable/Satellite Optical

Digital Audio Input i for your digital

audio connection. If desired, connect the

analog audio outputs of the component

to the Cable/Satellite Analog Audio

Inputs ‹. If available, connect the com-

ponent video outputs of your device to

the Cable/Satellite Component Video

Inputs °. Otherwise, connect either an

S-video or composite video output from

the component to the Cable/Satellite

Analog Video Inputs ‹.

Video connections for most devices may

be composite video (yellow jacks), S-

video (four-pin connector) or component

(Y/Pr/Pb – green, red and blue jacks)

video. Choose only one type of video

connection for each source component.

Whenever possible, we recommend using

component video connections for the best

quality. S-video provides an excellent

alternative, and composite video may be

used when neither S-video or component

video signals are available. As mentioned

above, the CVR700 will upconvert each

video format to the proper digital video

format for the CVPD50. However, if you

are using another display device, you will

need to make a video monitor output con-

nection to the display corresponding to

each type of video format used by your

source components.

The jack for the AC power cord is located

on the left side of the CVPD50. Make

sure the master power switch next to the

jack is in the “0” position before plugging

in the AC power cord. Again, a mirror

may be helpful in locating the jack and

switch. Do not turn the master power

switch to the “1” or on position until after

all components have been connected.

Step Three: Assemble the supplied

AM Loop Antenna so that the tabs at

the bottom of the antenna loop snap

into the holes in the base. Connect

it to the AM Antenna Terminals

NOTE: When using a source connected

via the Cable/Satellite Component

Video Inputs °, due to limitations in

the CVR700’s audio section, it is neces-

sary to also connect the corresponding

NOTES:

• The input source selectors and their

associated control codes on each of

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cable/Satellite Analog S-Video Input

‹ in order to view the CVR700’s audio

on-screen menu system.

Next, connect the VCR Analog Audio

Outputs ¤ to the analog audio record

inputs on your recorder. Connect the

same type of VCR Analog Video Output

¤ (composite or S-video) that you used

for the input to the CVR700 to the record

input of your device.

IMPORTANT: The Screen Saver function

does not operate when using the DVI

video input. Therefore, to prevent an

image from burning into your CVPD50

screen, it is extremely important that you

activate the Screen Saver function on

your PC or other DVI device. If none is

available, we recommend you place the

CVPD50 screen in Sleep mode by press-

ing the Screen Standby/Sleep Button

Digital Recorder Source Input

If you have a personal video recorder

(PVR), such as a TiVo, we recommend

that you connect it to the Digital Recorder

(DR) source input and output jacks.

DVI/Computer Source Input

Alternatively, use the Digital Recorder

source for a DVD Recorder, a CD recorder,

a MiniDisc recorder, a tape deck or any

other audio or A/V recording device.

Select either the Digital Recorder

Coaxial Digital Audio Input f or the

Digital Recorder Optical Digital

Audio Input j for your digital audio

connection (but not both), and connect

the appropriate digital audio output on

the recorder to the corresponding digital

audio input. If desired, connect the ana-

log audio outputs of the recorder to the

Digital Recorder Analog Inputs ª.

Due to its advanced video processing and

reproduction capabilities, the JBL Cinema

Vision system may be used with your per-

sonal computer (PC) for no-compromise

video displays. A dedicated DVI (digital

video interface) may be used with com-

patible computers to enjoy activities from

video games to surfing the Internet. The

large screen is perfect for displaying pre-

sentations to a group, or simply for pro-

viding a better view of an intricate

on either remote when you

anticipate that a still image will remain

on screen for more than a few minutes.

A/V Auxiliary Source Input

An auxiliary audio/video source input is

provided in case you have an additional

component you’d like to connect to your

JBL Cinema Vision system, such as an

additional cable television box, satellite

receiver, HDTV tuner, laserdisc player, or

any other audio/video device. Do not con-

nect a turntable to this input unless you

are using it with a phono preamp with

conventional analog audio outputs.

spreadsheet. This source input may also

be used with the latest compatible DVD

players or other devices with high-quality

DVI video outputs.

For PVRs and DVD recorders, connect the

component video outputs to the Digital

Recorder Component Video Inputs

‡. Note that there are no corresponding

component video outputs, as copy-pro-

tection measures incorporated in most

devices prohibit recording component

video signals due to their high quality.

Alternatively, you may connect the com-

posite or S-video outputs of your recorder

to the Digital Recorder Analog S-Video

Input ª, but note that a separate source

is available for analog VCRs.

Select either the DVI/Computer Coaxial

Digital Audio Input f or the DVI/

Computer Optical Digital Audio Input

k for connecting the corresponding digi-

tal audio output on your PC. Alternatively,

or as a backup, connect the analog audio

outputs on your PC to the DVI/Computer

Analog Audio Inputs ¶. If your PC’s

analog audio output is a stereo 1/8-inch

mini-jack, you will need to supply a Y-

cable with a stereo 1/8-inch mini-plug

at one end and conventional left and

right analog audio interconnect plugs

at the other.

Connect the coaxial or optical digital

audio output of the device to the

Auxiliary Coaxial Digital Audio Input

c or the Auxiliary Optical Digital

Audio Input h. As a backup, you may

wish to connect the device’s analog audio

outputs to the Auxiliary Analog Audio

Inputs •. If the device has composite or

S-video outputs, connect one or the other

to the corresponding Auxiliary Analog

Video Input •.

Connect either the Coaxial Digital

Main Room Remote Control

Extension

Audio Output b or the Optical Digital

Audio Output g to the corresponding

record input on your recording device. If

you also connect the Digital Recorder

Analog Audio Outputs ‚ to the analog

record inputs on your device, remember to

select the correct input on your recorder.

Connect the video output port on your

PC to the DVI (HDCP)/Computer Video

Input 5.

An infrared receiver located on the front

of the CVPD50 is capable of receiving

control commands for both the CVPD50

and the CVR700, enabling you to place

the CVR700 inside a cabinet. If you wish

to control an external source component

that is also hidden from view, simply con-

nect the CVR700’s Remote IR Output

Jack ﬁ to the Remote IR input jack on

compatible equipment. Now you may

simply point the remote control at the

plasma screen to send commands to any

device in your JBL Cinema Vision system.

If your computer has an analog VGA

video output instead of a DVI output, you

may use the included VGA-to-DVI adaptor

cable to connect the computer’s video

output to the DVI (HDCP)/Computer

Video Input 5.

Connect either the composite video or S-

video Digital Recorder Analog Video

Output ‚ to the corresponding record

input on your recording device.

NOTE: When using a source connected

VCR Source Input

via the DVI (HDCP)/Computer Video

Input

it is not possible to view the

If you have an analog VCR or other ana-

log recording device, we recommend that

you connect it to the VCR source input

and output jacks.

CVR700’s video on-screen menu system.

In addition, although you may access the

audio menus, if you attempt to do so, you

will temporarily lose the video signal at

the DVI input. If the last previous source

used provided an S-video signal, such as

an external VCR, then that signal will

appear when you attempt to access the

on-screen menus while using the

If the CVR700 is used without the CVPD50

and is placed inside a cabinet or other

location that prevents the remote sensor

from receiving commands, an optional

remote IR sensor may be connected to the

Remote IR Input Jack ﬂ.

Connect the analog audio outputs of the

recorder to the VCR Analog Audio

Inputs ⁄. If available, connect the S-

video output of your recorder to the VCR

Analog Video Input ⁄. Otherwise, use

the composite video jacks.

DVI/Computer source.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

NOTE: All remotely controlled compo-

nents must be linked together in a “daisy

chain.” Connect the IR OUT jack of one

unit to the IR IN of the next to establish

this chain.

4. Press the Main Power On/Off Switch

• When viewing the on-screen menus, it

is important that they not be left on the

screen for an extended period of time.

The constant display of a static image

such as these menus or video game

images is likely to cause the image to be

permanently “burned into” the plasma

screen. This type of damage is not covered

by the JBL Cinema Vision warranty.

to turn on the CVR700 and

the CVPD50.

5. The remote control contains several pre-

programmed special functions that may

be activated by pressing and holding par-

ticular buttons rather than pressing and

releasing. One such function is the “All

On/Off” power function. To turn on the

CVR700, CVPD50 display screen, and other

devices programmed into the remote,

press and hold the Power All On Button

buntil all units turn on. The LED inside

the CVR700’s Main Power On/Off

You are now ready to power up the sys-

tem, make minor configuration settings,

and then begin enjoying your JBL Cinema

Vision system.

Making Configuration

Adjustments

The on-screen menu system for the audio

1. Plug the AC power cords for the CVPD50,

CVR700 and any source devices into

unswitched AC outlets. Make sure the

master power switch on the underside of

the CVPD50 (next to the power cord jack)

is in the “1” position. Use a small mirror

to locate the switch. The LED inside the

Main Power On/Off Switch 1on the

CVR700 will turn red, indicating that the

unit is in Standby mode. The LED on the

front of the CVPD50 will turn amber, indi-

cating that it, too, is in Standby mode.

section is available by pressing the OSD

Button n

. When this button is

Button 1will turn orange to confirm that

the unit is on, and the Information

Display Ôwill also light. The CVPD50

will turn on and display the JBL logo screen.

pressed, the MAINMENU(Figure 6)

will appear, and adjustments are made

from the individual menus. To use the

on-screen menu system in the audio

section of the CVR700, press the ⁄/¤

Using the On-Screen Display

Navigation Controls q

until the

When making the following adjustments,

you may find it easier to use the on-screen

display system. These easy-to-read displays

give you a clear picture of the current status

of the unit and make it easy to see which

selection you are making. To view the on-

screen menus, make certain that you have

made a connection to the CVPD50 from the

Output to JBL Cinema Vision CVPD50

on-screen ^›cursor is next to the item

you wish to adjust, and then press the

NOTE: It is possible to see the LED on the

front panel of the CVPD50 flashing red and

yellow alternately even though you have

unplugged the CVPD50’s power cord. This is

because the CVPD50 also receives power

through its connection to the CVR700 in

order to trigger turn-on when the CVR700 is

powered on for seamless operation; this is

normal. However, the CVPD50’s power cord

must be plugged in for proper operation; the

LED will flash when the CVR700 is turned

on to alert you that the power cord is

unplugged. If the CVPD50 does not turn on

when the CVR700 is powered up and the

LED on the CVPD50 is not flashing red and

yellow, then turn off both units, unplug them

both from AC power, unplug the JBL Digital

Link cable that connects them and then

reconnect everything. If this does not resyn-

chronize the components, contact your

authorized JBL custom installer or dealer for

assistance.

Set Button s

to select that item.

In some cases, the selection will cause a

new submenu to appear, and when the

lowest level submenu has been reached,

pressing the Set Button s

will

select the item that the on-screen ^›cur-

sor is pointing to. Some settings in the

ADVANCEDsubmenu will require you

to press the. ‹/›Navigation Controls

Screen Port

on the rear panel of the

CVR700. The CVR700’s on-screen menus

are not available when a component video

source device is in use unless the corre-

sponding S-video connection has been

made to the CVR700. The on-screen menus

are not available at all when the DVI

to scroll through the available

settings. Throughout this manual, when

you are asked to “scroll” to a certain

item, that means to use the ⁄/¤

Navigation Controls q

until the

(HDCP)/Computer Video Input

on-screen ^›cursor is next to the item.

in use. If you attempt to use the on-screen

menus, the DVI video input will be tem-

porarily lost.

MAIN

›

SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION

SOURCES

IMPORTANT NOTES:

SPEAKERS

ADVANCED

• In order to access the on-screen menus

for the CVR700’s audio section, make sure

the remote control is in System mode

(NOT set to control an external source

device or even the CVPD50 screen). To set

the remote to System mode, press the

LIP

SYNC

2. Remove the protective plastic film from

the front-panel lens. If left in place, the

film will affect the performance of your

remote control.

Figure 6

System Selector j

The menus will remain on the screen for

20 seconds, and then they will “time-out”

and disappear from the screen. The time-

out may be increased to as much as 50

seconds by going to the ADVANCED

SETTINGSmenu, and changing the

item titled OSDTIMEOUT.

3. Install the four supplied AAA batteries in

the main remote as shown in Figure 5. Be

certain to follow the (+) and (–) polarity

indicators that are on the top of the bat-

tery compartment.

• Both the CVPD50 and CVR700 contain

separate IR sensors that are capable of

receiving commands from either remote

control. JBL recommends that you point

the remote at the CVPD50 screen for all

commands, as the JBL Digital Link cable

is able to pass remote commands to the

CVR700 for system and DVD control, as

well as to any other devices you have

connected to the Remote IR Output

Jack ﬁ. However, video control com-

mands received by the CVR700 cannot be

passed to the screen.

Selections will also be shown in the

Upper Display Line Hor the Lower

Display Line E, depending on which

parameter is being adjusted. In general,

the Upper Display Line Hwill indicate

the name of the current menu and the

Lower Display Line E, will indicate

Figure 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the menu line or option that the on-

screen ›cursor is currently pointing to.

However, the ADVANCEDsubmenu

functions differently, in that the settings

are adjusted directly on screen rather

than by using submenus. At that time

both the setting name and the currently

selected setting will be displayed in the

Lower Display Line E.

mation screen (Figure 9) will appear, giv-

ing you the opportunity to opt out of

source configuration. To continue, scroll

to the YESline and press the Set

SOURCES

› SOURCE: GAME/CAMERA

AUDIO INPUT:ANALOG

AUDIO MODE:LOGIC

TYPE:MOVIE 7.1

NIGHT MODE:N/A

VIDEO INPUT: COMPOSITE

SOURCE A.R.: 16:9

Button s

again. Note that you

RESET TO FACTORY SETTING

BACK TO MAIN MENU

may reset all sources to their factory

default settings from this screen by

scrolling to the RESETALL

SOURCESline and selecting it.

Figure 12

*AUDIO

INPUT*

System Configuration

SYSTEM

ANALOG

With the MAINMENUon screen,

make sure that the › cursor is pointing to

the SYSTEMCONFIGURATION

ARE

WANT

YOU

SURE

YOU

OPTICAL DIGITAL

COAXIAL DIGITAL

CHANGE

SETTINGS?

SOURCE

BACK TO SOURCES MENU

›

YES

line and press the Set Button s

RESET

ALL

SOURCES

FACTORY SETTINGS?

The SYSTEMmenu (Fig. 7) will appear

on screen, with the ^›cursor pointing to

the 5.1CHANNELline (the default

setting). If your system consists of only

front left, center and right speakers,

two surround speakers and a subwoofer,

scroll down to the BACKTOMAIN

MENUline and press the Set Button

Figure 13

Figure 9

For most sources, you will want to assign

a default surround audio mode. Refer to

the chart on page 62 for descriptions of

each available surround mode. You may

temporarily change the audio mode

assignments at any time during playback

using the remote control. It is recom-

mended that for initial setup you select

Dolby Digital for digital audio sources,

and Logic 7 for analog sources.

Once you have confirmed that you

wish to change source settings, the

SOURCESmenu (Figure 10) will

appear. The first line indicates the cur-

rently selected source.

. Otherwise, use the ⁄/¤

Navigation Controls q

to move

› SOURCE

AUDIO

SOURCES

DVD/CD

MODE:

the ^›cursor to point to the desired sys-

tem configuration; then press the Set

CHNGR

DVD-V:LOGIC

DVD-A:BASS

CD-V:LOGIC

CD-A:LOGIC

7. 1

MOV

MANAGEMENT

Button s

. A confirmation screen

7. 1

MOV

MUS

(Fig. 8) will appear, giving you the opportu-

nity to retain the previous setting. Select

NOif you wish to retain the previous

setting, or YESto update the setting.

MP3

WMA:LOGIC

7. 1

16:9

SETTNG

The internal DVD/CD changer enables

you to program an audio mode for each

type of disc, thus empowering you to

choose two-channel stereo reproduction

for older two-channel CD recordings,

Dolby Digital for video DVDs, and Logic 7

matrix surround processing for analog

Video CD programs.

SOURCE

A. R. :AUTO

TO FACTORY

TO MAIN MENU

RESET

BACK

Figure 10

SYSTEM

If you wish to change the current source,

or make adjustments to a different

source, then make sure that the ›cursor

is next to the SOURCEline, and select

SYSTEM

5. 1

7. 1

CHANNEL

›

BACK

MAIN

it by pressing the Set Button s

With the SOURCESmenu on screen

and the DVD/CD changer source selected,

scroll down to the AUDIOMODE

menu (Figure 14).

A list of available sources will appear

(Figure 11). Scroll to the desired source

and select it, or to retain the previous

source, scroll to the BACKTO

Figure 7

SYSTEM

AUDIO

MODE

SOURCESMENUline and select it.

ARE

WANT

YOU

SURE

YOU

›

DVD

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO

WMA

CHANGE

SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION

SOURCES

› CABLE/SAT

DVD/CD CHANGER

5. 1?

MP3

›

A/V

AUX

BACK

AUDIO

MODE

YES

VCR

DIGITAL

RECORDER

DVI

INPUT/COMPUTER

GAME/CAMERA

TUNER

Figure 8

BACK

SOURCES

Figure 14

Source Configuration

The options available for the DVD-Audio

disc audio modes differ from the other

disc types because the DVD-Audio format

outputs 5.1-channel audio that is not sub-

ject to further surround processing. How-

ever, as indicated by the available options

shown in Fig. 15, you may select whether

to pass the audio output directly to the

speakers without any bass management

Figure 11

The SOURCESsubmenu enables you

to configure both the internal DVD/CD

changer and any external sources for dig-

ital audio inputs, audio surround mode,

video input (for external sources only) and

video screen aspect ratio (for external

sources only).

For external sources, you may assign a

digital audio input by scrolling to the

AUDIOINPUTline and selecting

from the analog audio input, or the coaxial

or optical digital audio input assigned to

that source (see Figures 12 and 13). This

selection is not available for the internal

DVD/CD changer, which internally passes

its digital audio signal directly to the

audio section of the CVR700.

With the MAIN MENUon screen,

scroll down to the SOURCESline and

(

)

processing DIRECT , or you may

select the BASSMANAGEMENT

press the Set Button s

. A confir-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

mode, which passes the digital audio to

the CVR700’s processor so that low-fre-

quency portions of the audio may be

steered to the appropriate speakers

depending on the capabilities of your

specific speakers. If you are using the

JBL Cinema Vision speaker system,

you may leave the DVD-Audio disc

audio mode at the default BASS

MANAGEMENTsetting. If you are

using other speakers, you should select

DIRECT, and make sure to configure

your speakers using the SPEAKERS

submenu as described on page 48.

signals are played, which are only found

on DVD-Video (or DVD-Audio) discs. To

adjust the Night mode setting, make

certain that the ›cursor is on the

NIGHTline. Next, press the ‹/›

› DIGITAL

DIGITAL

DOLBY

5. 1

MOVIE

MUSIC

5. 1

7. 1

5. 1

7. 1

5. 1

IIx

EMUL

3-STEREO

Navigation Controls q

to choose

BACK TO

SOURCES

between the following settings, as they

appear in the Lower Display Line E:

Figure 17

OFF: When OFF is highlighted, the

Night mode will not function.

Although you are encouraged to experi-

ment with the various audio surround

modes as you become more familiar with

your system, at this time it is recommended

that you select Logic 7 Cinema (Movie)

for DVD-Video and VCD discs, and for

video sources such as cable television,

and Logic 7 Music for audio CDs, MP3s,

WMAs, the AM/FM tuner and other

audio-only sources to complete the setup

process. Select the 7.1 version if your

system is in 7.1-channel operation, or the

5.1 version if you are using 5.1-channel

operation.

MEDIUMCOMPRESSION: A

mild compression will be applied, when

MEDIUMCOMPRESSIONis

highlighted.

DVD

AUDIO

MAXIMUMCOMPRESSION: When

MAXIMUMCOMPRESSIONis

highlighted, a more severe compression

algorithm will be applied.

›

DIRECT

BASS

MANAGEMENT

We recommend that you select the

BACK

SOURCES

MEDIUMsetting as a starting point

and change to the MAXIMUMsetting

later, if desired. The Night mode may also

be adjusted directly any time a Dolby

Digital source is playing by pressing the

Figure 15

The available audio modes for DVD -

Video, audio CD, Video CD and com-

pressed audio discs are reflected in

Figure 16. Note, however, that the

options shown each encompass a suite of

surround modes. Although a more com-

plete explanation of the available sur-

round modes may be found on page 62,

the DOLBYsurround mode submenu

serves as a good example (Figure 17).

Note that some modes may not be avail-

able, depending on how you set your

system configuration in the SYSTEM

submenu above (Figure 7). For example,

the DIGITALEX,PLIIx

MOVIE7.1and PLIIx

Note that the audio mode setup for

DVD-Video discs is slightly different

than for the other disc types. With the

SOURCESmenu (Figure 10) on

screen, instead of scrolling to the

AUDIOMODEline as for the other

disc types, continue scrolling until the

›cursor is next to the DVD-Vline

and select it. The DVD VIDEOsub-

menu (Figure 18) will appear. Although

audio mode selection is similar to the

other disc types, the sub mode (e.g.,

Music 7.1 for Logic 7) is displayed

separately on the TYPEline.

Night Mode Button Z

. When the

button is pressed, D-RANGEwill

appear in the lower third of the video

screen and in the Lower Display Line

E. Press the ⁄¤ Navigation

Controls qwithin 3 seconds to select

the desired setting.

DOLBY

DIGITAL

MODE

NIGHT

›

OFF

MEDIUM

COMPRESSION

MAXIMUM

BACK

DVD

VIDEO

DVD/CD

CHANGER

DVD VIDEO

MUSIC7.1modes are only available

for 7.1-channel systems. In addition, the

DIGITAL5.1and DIGITAL

EXmodes are only available when source

materials that are encoded in the Dolby

Digital 5.1 or Dolby Digital EX format are

actually playing.

›

AUDIO

MODE:

LOGIC

MOVIE

N/A

Figure 18a

TYPE:

MODE:

7. 1

NIGHT

RESET

FACTORY

SETTNG

No additional adjustments are available

for the internal DVD/CD changer, as the

SOURCE A.R.line of Figure 10 is

automatically set to 16:9and may not

be adjusted.

BACK

MAIN

Figure 18

However, the video input and aspect ratio

(video screen) for external sources may

be adjusted. Scroll to the VIDEO

INPUTline to select a composite

video, S-video, or for the CABLE/SAT,

DIGITAL RECORDER and GAME/CAMERA

sources only, a component video input for

each external source. In addition, scroll to

the SOURCE A.R.line to specify

whether the source uses a 16:9 or 4:3

aspect ratio, or select auto detection.

VIDEO

The DVDVIDEOsubmenu (Fig. 18)

also enables you to adjust the Night

Mode setting. The Night Mode setting

may be accessed directly from the

›

LOGIC

DOLBY

DTS

STEREO

DSP

SOURCESmenu (Figure 12) for other

source inputs. The Night mode is a fea-

ture of Dolby Digital that preserves the

dynamic range and full intelligibility of a

movie soundtrack while reducing the

peak level. This prevents abruptly loud

transitions from disturbing others, with-

out reducing the sonic impact of a digital

source. The Night mode is only available

when specially encoded Dolby Digital

BACK

SOURCES

Figure 16

The SOURCESmenu also

contains a RESETTOFACTORY

SETTINGSline that allows you to

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

reset that source to the factory default

settings.

When SMALLis selected, low-fre-

quency sounds will be sent only to the

subwoofer output. If you choose this

option and there is no subwoofer con-

nected, you will not hear any low-fre-

quency sounds from the front channels.

* SPEAKER

CONFIGURATION

BASS MANAGER

:SMALL

AND

FRONT

›

CENTER:SMALL

Speaker Configuration

SIDE

BACK

SURROUNDS:SMALL

SUBWOOFER:ON

It is important to make sure that the

CVR700 is correctly configured for your

speakers so that low frequency portions

of the audio program will be steered to

the appropriate loudspeakers (this is

called bass management). Speaker con-

figuration also ensures that there are no

time delay artifacts caused by the speak-

ers being placed at varying distances

from the listening position. And it is in

this section that the output levels are

adjusted to ensure that all speaker chan-

nels are balanced, preserving the direc-

tionality and dynamism of the original

recording.

BASS

MGR:GLOBAL

THESE SETTINGS?

RESET

BACK

SPEAKERS

When LARGEis selected, a full-range

output will be sent to the front left and

front right outputs. Only LFE-channel infor-

mation will be directed to the subwoofer.

Figure 21

Configuring Speaker Sizes

When you have completed your selection

for the front channel, press the ⁄/¤

The first step is to configure speaker sizes.

You may skip this step if you are using JBL

Cinema Vision speakers at all positions. If

you are using other model or brand loud-

speakers, you should NOT skip this menu.

Scroll to the CONFIGURATIONline

and select it to display the SPEAKER

CONFIGURATIONANDBASS

MANAGERsubmenu (Figure 21). For

each of these settings, use the LARGE

setting if the speakers for a particular

position are traditional full-range loud-

speakers. Use the SMALLsetting for

smaller, frequency-limited satellite speak-

ers that do not reproduce sounds below

200Hz. Note that when “small” speakers

are used, a subwoofer is required to

reproduce low-frequency sounds.

Navigation Controls q

to move

the cursor to CENTER. Press the ‹/›

Navigation Controls q to select

the option that best describes your sys-

tem, based on these speaker definitions:

When SMALLis selected, low-fre-

quency center channel sounds will be

sent only to the subwoofer output. If you

choose this option and there is no sub-

woofer connected, you will not hear low-

frequency sounds from the center channel.

If you are using JBL Cinema Vision loud-

speakers, you will be able to skip some

of these settings, as the CVR700 has

been preprogrammed at the factory to

accommodate your speakers. However,

you will need to program the distances

and speaker output levels to conform to

your specific listening room.

When LARGEis selected, a full-range

output will be sent to the center speaker

output, and NO center channel signal will

be sent to the subwoofer output.

With the MAINMENU(Figure 6) on

screen, scroll to the SPEAKERSline

and select it, and the confirmation screen

(Figure 19) will appear, allowing you an

opportunity to retain the previous set-

tings. Note that the RESETline indi-

cates that all sources will have their

speaker settings reset if you choose the

reset option. Speaker settings are global,

and only need to be set once, unless you

change the BASSMGRline in the

SPEAKERCONFIGURATION

submenu (Fig. 21) to INDEPENDENT.

Select YESto change the speaker set-

tings and continue to the SPEAKERS

submenu (Figure 20).

NOTE: If you choose Logic 7 as the sur-

round mode for the particular input

Remember that the “large” and “small”

descriptions do not refer to the actual

physical size of the speakers, but to

their ability to reproduce low-frequency

sounds. If you are in doubt as to which

category describes your speakers, consult

the specifications in the speakers’

source for which you are configuring

your speakers, the CVR700 will not make

the LARGEoption available for the

center speaker. This is due to the require-

ments of Logic 7 processing, and does

not indicate a problem with your receiver.

owner’s manual, or ask your dealer.

When NONEis selected, no signals will

be sent to the center channel output. The

receiver will operate in a “phantom” cen-

ter channel mode and center channel

information will be sent to the left and

right front channel outputs.

The factory default sets all channels

to SMALL, except for the BACK

SURROUNDS, which are set to

NONE, as the factory default system

configuration is for a 5.1-channel system.

NOTE: This setting is not affected by

changing the System Configuration setting

(see Figure 7). In order to benefit from

full 7.1-channel operation, you must

change both the System Configuration

setting and you must enable the Back

Surround speakers in the SPEAKER

CONFIGURATION AND BASS

MANAGERsubmenu (Figure 21).

When you have completed your selection

for the center channel, press the ⁄/¤

SPEAKERS

ARE

YOU

SURE

YOU

Navigation Controls q

to move

WANT

CHANGE

SPEAKER

SETTINGS?

the cursor to SIDESURROUNDS.

Press the ‹/›Navigation Controls

›

YES

RESET

ALL

SPEAKERS

to select the option that best

FACTORY SETTINGS?

describes the surround speakers in your

system based on these speaker definitions:

Figure 19

When SMALLis selected, low-fre-

quency surround channel sounds will be

sent to the subwoofer output only. If you

choose this option and there is no sub-

woofer connected, you will not hear any

low-frequency sounds from the side sur-

round channels.

Begin the speaker setup process by mak-

ing certain that the cursor is pointing at

the FRONTline, which sets the config-

uration for the front left and right speak-

ers. If you wish to make a change to the

front speakers’ configuration, press the

SPEAKERS

CONFIGURATION

CROSSOVERS

DISTANCES

LEVELS

›

‹/›Navigation Controls q

so that either LARGEor SMALL

appears, matching the appropriate

description from these definitions:

BACK

MAIN

When LARGEis selected, a full-range

output will be sent to the side surround

channel outputs, and NO surround channel

Figure 20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

signals will be sent to the subwoofer output.

appears in the on-screen menu. When

this option is selected, all bass infor-

mation will be routed to the front

left/right “main” speakers.

of reproducing, but it may be different for

speakers that include a powered woofer

section intended to reproduce the LFE

channel. Before making any changes to

the settings for the crossover point, we

suggest that you find the crossover point

for the speakers in each of the four

groupings, front left/right, center front,

side surround and back surround, by look-

ing at the specifications page of each

speaker’s owner’s manual, by getting that

information from the manufacturer’s Web

site, or by contacting your dealer or the

manufacturer’s customer service depart-

ment. You will need this figure to accu-

rately configure the next group of settings.

When NONEis selected, surround

sound information will be split between

the front left and front right outputs. For

optimal performance when no surround

speakers are in use, the Dolby 3 Stereo

mode should be used.

• If a subwoofer is connected to the

CVR700, you have the option to have

the front left/right “main” speakers

reproduce bass frequencies at all

When you have completed your selec-

tions for the side surround channels,

press the ⁄/¤ Navigation Controls

times, and have the subwoofer operate

only when the CVR700 is being used

with a digital source that contains a

dedicated low-frequency effects, or LFE

soundtrack. This allows you to use both

your main and subwoofer speakers to

take advantage of the special bass

sounds created for some movies. Note,

however, that the subwoofer will only

play the LFE information. Press the

to move the cursor to BACK

SURROUNDS. Press the ‹/›

Navigation Controls q to select

the option that best describes the speakers

in use at the left and right back surround

positions based on these definitions:

Note that when any speaker group other

than the front left/right speakers is set to

LARGE, the crossover may not be

adjusted, as the feed will be full-range,

with no sound being derived for the sub-

woofer at that position. The factory

default setting for all speaker positions

is 90Hz. To change one of the settings,

return to the SPEAKERSsubmenu

(Figure 20), and then scroll to the

CROSSOVERSline and select it.

The SPEAKERCROSSOVERS

submenu (Figure 22) will be displayed.

To change the setting for any of the

four speaker groups, press the ⁄/¤

When NONEis selected, the system

will adjust so that only 5.1-channel sur-

round processing/decoding modes are

available and the surround back amplifier

channels will not be used. This setting will

override any setting made previously in

the SYSTEMCONFIGURATION

submenu (Figure 7).

‹/›Navigation Controls q

so that ONappears in the on-screen

menu.

The BASSMGRsetting allows you to

use the same speaker configuration set-

tings for all inputs, or to have different

settings for each input. In most cases, the

factory default setting of GLOBALwill

be appropriate, as most listeners do not

need to have individualized speaker set-

tings. However, some listeners, particu-

larly those with full-range front speakers

that are used for both movies and music,

may prefer that different bass manage-

ment settings be used when listening to

music through a CD player as opposed

to a movie from a DVD player, VCR or

cable/satellite set-top.

When SMALLis selected, the system

will adjust so that the full complement of

6.1/7.1 surround processing/ decoding

modes are available, and low-frequency

information below the crossover point

will be sent to the subwoofer output. If

you choose this option and there is no

subwoofer connected, you will not hear

any low-frequency sounds from the sur-

round back channels.

Navigation Controls q

until the

cursor is next to the speaker group where

you wish to make a change and then

press the ‹/›Navigation Controls

until the desired setting

When LARGEis selected, the system

will adjust so that the full complement

of 6.1/7.1 surround processing/decoding

modes are available, and a full-range

signal will be sent to the surround back

channels, with no low-frequency informa-

tion sent to the subwoofer output.

appears. The available choices for low-

frequency information to be sent to the

subwoofer, rather than to the main

Use the ‹/›Navigation Controls

to change this setting to

INDEPENDENT. You may now

change the source input and return to the

SPEAKERCONFIGURATION

menu and adjust the speaker sizes to suit

the source.

speaker channel, are 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz,

90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz and 200Hz. Pick the

choice that is identical to the information

for your speakers, or if an exact match is

not possible, pick the closest choice that

is ABOVE the speaker’s low-frequency

limit or crossover point to avoid the cre-

ation of a low-frequency “hole” where

your system will have no bass informa-

tion. The setting for the crossover point

for the LFE channel, which is created to

provide specific low-frequency informa-

tion in many movies with digital sound-

tracks, may be set to match the cross-

over for any of the four speaker groups.

Since the crossover point commonly

used in the creation of the LFE channel

SUBWOOFERis 120Hz, we recom-

mend that you select the speaker group

whose crossover point is closest to

When you have completed your selection

for the back surround channels, press the

Speaker Crossover

Configuration

⁄/¤ Navigation Controls q

to move the cursor to SUBWOOFER.

When all initial speaker “size” settings

have been made, you now have the

option to take advantage of the CVR700’s

Quadruple Crossover system, which

allows individual crossover settings to be

made for each speaker grouping. Again,

if you are using JBL Cinema Vision loud-

speakers, you may skip this submenu, as

the factory default settings are appropri-

ate for your speakers.

Press the ‹/›Navigation Controls

to select the option that best

describes your system. The choices avail-

able for the subwoofer position will

depend on the settings for the other

speakers, particularly the front left/right

positions. If the front left/right speakers

are set to SMALL, the subwoofer will

automatically be set to ON. If the front

left/right speakers are set to LARGE,

two options are available:

The low-frequency crossover point is set

by the design of your speakers. Depending

on the design and driver complement of

your speakers, it is usually the lowest

possible frequency the speaker is capable

• If no subwoofer is connected to the

CVR700, press the ‹/›Navigation

120Hz. To do this, press the ⁄/¤

Controls q

so that OFF

Navigation Controls q

until the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delay times are adjustable only for the

Dolby and DTS modes, so you will notice

that the DISTANCESmenu may not

be accessed for other modes, such as

Logic 7. In addition, when a non-Dolby

Digital mode such as Dolby 3 Stereo or

Dolby Pro Logic II is selected, adjust-

ments may be made to the Surround

speakers only. To set the delay time for a

specific input, you will need to access the

SPEAKERDISTANCESsubmenu

(Figure 23). With the SPEAKERSsub-

menu (Figure 20) on screen, scroll down

to the DISTANCESline and select

it. Note that this line will not be available

if the audio surround mode for the current

source was not set to a Dolby mode. You

may need to return to the SOURCES

submenu (Figure 10) and select a Dolby

audio mode before adjusting the distance

settings.

speaker position in place of a distance

setting indicates that you have not config-

ured an active speaker for that location.

cursor is next to the SUBWOOFER

line, and then press the ‹/›

Navigation Controls q

until

the name of the speaker group with the

desired crossover frequency appears. Of

course, you may also experiment with dif-

ferent settings to find the one that pro-

vides the smoothest and most complete

bass response in your particular listening

environment.

When the delay time for all speaker posi-

tions has been set you may return to the

master menu by scrolling to BACKTO

MASTERMENUand then pressing

the Set Button s

. However, if you

have a digital video source or a digital

video display that causes lack of lip sync

you may use the Lip Sync adjust feature

to delay the audio signal as it is sent to

all channels (as opposed to the individual

settings) so that the picture and sound

are brought back together. That adjust-

ment is available in the LIPSYNC

submenu of the MAINMENU, and

will be described on page 53.

SPEAKER

CROSSOVERS

›

FRONT

CENTER:

SIDE

BACK

SURROUNDS:

SUBWOOFER:

RESET

THESE

SETTINGS?

BACK

SPEAKERS

Figure 22

Output Level Adjustment

Speaker Distances

Output level adjustment is a key part of

the configuration of any surround sound

product. It is particularly important for

a digital system such as JBL Cinema

Vision, as correct outputs ensure that you

hear soundtracks with the proper direc-

tionality and intensity.

Due to the different distances between

the listening position and each speaker

position, the amount of time it takes for

sound to reach your ears from each chan-

nel is different. You may compensate for

this difference through the use of the dis-

tance settings to adjust the timing for the

speaker placement and acoustic condi-

tions in your listening room or home the-

ater. The CVR700’s advanced software

enables you to quickly and easily set

delay times without the need to calculate

them using a complex formula. Instead,

all you need to do is measure the approx-

imate distance between your listening

position and each of the speakers in your

system. When you enter those distances

into the CVR700’s memory as shown below,

the CVR700’s microprocessor does the

rest of the work, calculating the proper

delay time. The measurements need not

be accurate to the inch, as the system is

designed to accommodate a typical lis-

tening area rather than require the pre-

cise measurement to one “sweet spot”

position.

SPEAKER

FRONT

DISTANCES

›

CENTER:

SIDE

BACK

UNIT

RESET

SURROUNDS:

MEASURE:

FEET

THESE

SETTINGS?

BACK

SPEAKERS

IMPORTANT NOTE: Listeners are often

confused about the operation of the sur-

round channels. While some assume that

sound should always be coming from

each speaker, most of the time there will

be little or no sound in the surround

channels. This is because they are only

used when a movie director or sound

mixer specifically places sound there to

create ambience, a special effect or to

continue action from the front of the

room to the rear. When the output levels

are properly set, it is normal for surround

speakers to operate only occasionally.

Artificially increasing the volume to the

rear speakers may destroy the illusion of

an enveloping sound field that duplicates

the way you hear sound in a movie the-

ater or concert hall.

Figure 23

Once the SPEAKERDISTANCES

submenu (Figure 23) is on your screen,

note that the default unit of measure for

distance settings is feet. If your measure-

ments are in feet, proceed to the next

step; if your measurements are made in

meters, press the ⁄/¤ Navigation

Controls q

until the on-screen ›

cursor is at the UNITOFMEASURE

line on the menu. Then, press the ‹/›

Navigation Controls q

so that

METERis highlighted. When the

change in measurement units is made,

press the ⁄/¤ Navigation Controls

to return the ›cursor to the

FRONTposition. With the on-screen ›

cursor pointing to FRONT, press the

Before beginning the output level adjust-

ment process, make certain that all

Due to the differences between the way

surround modes operate, some modes

allow for a greater range of delay times

than others. To avoid problems, we rec-

ommend that delay times be adjusted

using the Dolby Digital mode. It may be

necessary to play a Dolby Digital disc so

that the CVR700 can process the signal

and make the DISTANCESsubmenu

accessible. If a different mode is selected

at a later time, the CVR700 will automati-

cally select the closest delay settings

available for the surround mode in use.

‹/›Navigation Controls q

speaker connections have been properly

made. The system volume should be set

to the level that you will use during a typ-

ical listening session. While the CVR700

allows you to set output levels manually,

we recommend that the EzSet system be

used when the CVR700 is first installed

to establish the initial level settings.

until the distance from the front left and

right speakers to the preferred listening

position is entered. Next, scroll down to

the CENTERline and enter the dis-

tance from the main listening position to

the center speaker. Repeat the procedure

for all active speaker positions. Note that

only the speaker positions that have been

set to LARGEor SMALLin the

SPEAKERCONFIGURATION

submenu (Figure 21) may be adjusted.

The appearance of five dashes next to a

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

speaker position on the left side of the

display and the offset from reference

level on the right side of the display.

As the levels are adjusted, the speaker

position and a level indication will

appear in the bottom line of the

damage to your hearing or your equip-

ment, it is important to avoid setting

the master volume above 0dB.

Using EzSet

The JBL Cinema Vision EzSet (main)

remote makes it possible to quickly and

accurately set the output levels without

the use of a sound-pressure meter,

although manual adjustment is also avail-

able. However, for the easiest setup, fol-

low these steps while seated in the listen-

ing position that will be used most often:

NOTE: The subwoofer output is not

adjusted when the test tone is in use. To

adjust the subwoofer output, you must

use an external source, following the

instructions on page 64.

remote’s LCD display (Figure 26).

^{E T}

C H A N N E L S :

S P E A K E R : 1

6 8

Manual Output Level

Adjustment

1. Make certain that all speaker positions

have been properly configured for their

“large” or “small” settings and turn off

the OSD system if it is in use.

Figure 26

Output levels may also be adjusted man-

ually, either to set them to a specific

level with an SPL meter, or to make fine

tuning adjustments to the levels obtained

using the EzSet remote. In order to adjust

the subwoofer’s output level, you must

use the manual adjustment method.

• The channel position being adjusted

will flash in the Speaker/Channel

Input Indicators F. If the test noise

is heard from a channel other than the

one shown in the indicator, there is an

error in the speaker connections. If this

is the case, press the Remote Menu

Button b to stop the adjustment.

Then turn the unit off and verify that all

speakers are connected to the proper

Speaker Outputs ¡™£¢.

2. Adjust the volume so that it is at –2dB,

as shown in the on-screen display or

Lower Display Line E.

3. Press and hold the SPL Button j

until the red LED under the SPL

Manual output level adjustment may be

performed using either the on-screen

SPEAKERLEVELSsubmenu,

or using the main remote control.

Button jlights and the LCD screen

in the remote changes to the display

shown in Figure 24. (You may also nav-

igate to the screen shown in Figure 24

by pressing and holding the Remote

Menu Button b for 3 seconds until

the main remote menu appears; then

scroll to the SET SPKR LEVELS option

and press the Set Button s.)

Using the On-Screen Menu System

• During the adjustment process for each

channel, you will see indications of

With the SPEAKERSsubmenu on

screen, scroll down to the LEVELS

LOW, HIGH and a level readout in

This is normal, and it confirms that

EzSet is doing its job of changing the

levels to match the desired reference.

line and press the Set Button s

The SPEAKERLEVELSsubmenu

(Figure 27) will appear. All of the values

should be set at 0dB. If not, you may

wish to scroll down to the RESET

THESESETTINGSline and press

• If a channel cannot be adjusted to the

proper reference level, you will see

S E T

S P K R

L E V E L S

E T

FAIL displayed in the remote’s bottom

LCD line before the test tone moves to

the next channel. This is usually an

indication that the volume control was

set too low. When EzSet stops circulat-

ing the tone through all channels and

returns to normal, adjust the volume

level and repeat the procedure from

Step 3.

Figure 24

the Set Button s

effect the reset.

4. Press the Set Button jwithin 5

seconds so that the screen shown in

Figure 25 appears. Press the ⁄/¤

Navigation Controls quntil the

lower line of the remote’s LCD display

shows the number of speakers in your

system. (Don’t count the subwoofer.)

For example, if you have left, center,

right, side surround left and right, and

back surround left and right speakers

for a full 7.1 system, press the button

twice so that the bottom line reads

7 CHANNELS, as shown in Fig. 25.

SPEAKER

LEVELS

› FRONT

CENTER

FRONT

LEFT

RIGHT

SURR

SIDE

BACK

SIDE

RIGHT:

SURR

LEFT

SUBWOOFER

RESET

TEST

BACK

THESE

TONE

TO SPEAKERS

SETTINGS?

OFF

6. After the test noise has circulated once

through each channel, it will send the

tone to each channel once again, to

verify the settings.

Figure 27

Scroll down to the TESTTONEline

and use the ‹/›Navigation Controls

7. After two complete circulations of the

tone, the levels are set. Upon comple-

tion of the second circulation, the LCD

Information Display 2 will flash

COMPLETE four times and then go

out. The tone will stop and the CVR700

will return to normal operation.

so that ON appears. The inter-

nal test tone will begin to circulate from

speaker to speaker in a clockwise direc-

tion and will be heard from all speakers

in turn, playing for two seconds in each

speaker before continuing, and a blinking

on-screen cursor will appear next to the

name of each speaker location when the

sound is at that speaker.

S E L E C T

S P K R S

C H A N N E L S

Figure 25

5. Hold the remote in front of you at arm’s

length, being sure not to cover the

EzSet Microphone Sensor at the top of

the remote, and press the Set Button

jwithin 5 seconds to begin the

EzSet calibration process. At this point,

EzSet will take control of your system,

starting the test tone at the front left

speaker, and automatically adjusting

the output level so that it is correct.

During the adjustment, the Lower

Display Line Ewill display the

If you find that the output levels cho-

sen by EzSet are either uncomfortably

low or high, you may repeat the proce-

dure. Return to Step 2 and adjust the

master volume either slightly higher or

lower to accommodate your particular

room layout and your tastes. You may

repeat this procedure as many times

as necessary to achieve a desired

result. In order to prevent possible

Alternatively, you may leave the test tone

turned off and play a favorite piece of

program material, such as a CD music

selection or a DVD movie. With the

SPEAKERLEVELSsubmenu on

screen you will be able to adjust the out-

put levels using the source material as a

reference.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE: Remember to verify that the

speakers have been properly connected.

As the test noise circulates, listen to

make certain that the sound comes from

the speaker position shown in the Lower

Display Line E. If the sound from a

speaker location does NOT match the

position indicated in the display, stop the

test tone by pressing the Test Tone

It is not necessary to make these adjust-

ments during the initial setup, and you

may skip this section, returning to it later

when you have more experience with

the system.

S E T

S P K R

L E V E L S

M A N U A L

S P L

Figure 28

3. Press the Set Button swithin 5

seconds to activate the remote’s manual

mode, so that it functions as an SPL

meter. The right corner of the bottom

line of the remote’s display will show

the output level of the speakers as the

test tone circulates. The level will

show as a direct SPL indication

ADVANCED

SETTINGS

FRNT

PNL

BRGHTNESS:FULL

›

VOLUME DEFAULT

:ON

VOL

DEFAULT

LEVEL

:Ð25

MAIN

FAN:

RESET

TIMEOUT

MINIMUM

ALL OF

SETTINGS?

MAIN MENU

NOISE

Button h

twice, then turn the

THE ABOVE

CVR700 off using the Main Power

Switch 1and check the speaker wiring

to make certain that each speaker is con-

nected to the correct output terminal.

FACTORY

BACK

between 66dB and 79dB. Below 66dB

the remote will read LOW and above

79dB it will read HIGH.

Figure 29

After checking for speaker placement, let

the test noise circulate again, and listen

to see which channels sound louder than

the others. Using the front left speaker as

a reference, press the ‹/›Navigation

Front-Panel Brightness

4. When all channels have an equal vol-

ume level, the adjustment is complete.

When you are finished with all adjust-

ments, press the Test Tone Button

7 to return the remote to normal

operation. The word EXITING will

blink four times, and the remote will

switch to the DVD/MAIN mode.

The CVR700’s front-panel displays and

indicators are set at a default brightness

level that is sufficient for viewing in a

normally lit room. However, you may wish

to occasionally lower the brightness of

the display, or turn it off completely. The

FRNTPNLBRGHTNESSsetting

defaults to full brightness, but you may

adjust it to dim the display to half bright-

ness, or turn the display off altogether.

The LED inside the Main Power On/Off

Button 1will always remain lit to

Controls q

the same volume level. When the ‹/›

Navigation Controls q are

to bring all speakers to

pressed, the test noise circulation will

pause on the channel being adjusted to

give you time to make the adjustment.

When you release the button, the circula-

tion will resume after 5 seconds. Continue

to adjust individual channels until the vol-

ume level sounds the same from each

speaker. Adjustments should be made

with only the ‹/›Navigation Controls

q, NOT the main volume controls.

NOTE: The subwoofer level is not

adjustable when the normal test tone is

in use. The subwoofer output level may

be adjusted when the channel levels are

being trimmed to a program source rather

than the test tone.

remind you that the unit is turned on. The

setting is temporary, and will only remain

in effect until the unit is turned off.

The output levels may also be adjusted at

any time using the remote control and

front-panel display. To adjust the output

levels in this fashion, press the Test

Tone Button 7. As soon as the button

is pressed, the test tone will begin to cir-

culate as indicated earlier. The correct

channel from which the test noise should

be heard will be shown in the Lower

Display Line E. While the test noise is

circulating, the proper channel position

will also be indicated in the Speaker/

Channel Input Indicators Fby a

blinking letter within the correct channel.

To adjust the output level, press the

⁄/¤ Navigation Controls quntil

the desired level is shown in the display.

Once the buttons are released, the test

noise will begin to circulate again in 5

seconds. When all channels have the

same output level, press the Test Tone

Button 7 again to complete the process.

Volume Default

If you are using a sound-pressure level

(SPL) meter for precise level adjustment,

set the volume so that the meter reads

75dB on the C-Weighting, Slow scale.

As is the case with most audio/video

receivers, when the CVR700 is turned on,

it will always return to the volume setting

in effect when the unit was turned off.

However, you may prefer to always have

the CVR700 turn on at a specific setting,

regardless of what was last in use when

the unit was turned off. The VOLUME

DEFAULTfeature may be turned on

or off. The factory default setting is OFF.

To set the feature, first turn the OSD sys-

tem off and adjust the system volume to

the desired default turn-on level. This

level will be displayed on the front panel

as a negative offset from the reference

volume of 0dB, which is the system maxi-

mum. For example, you may find a level

of –25dB to be a comfortable default

turn-on volume. Make a note of this num-

ber, as you will not be able to adjust the

volume from within the ADVANCED

SETTINGSsubmenu.

Using the Remote as an SPL Meter

The EzSet feature on the main remote

may also be used as an SPL meter to

assist in accurate setting of the output

levels, when either the internal test tone

or favorite source material, such as a test

disc, is used. To use the remote as an

SPL meter, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the SPL Select Button

9 until the red LED under the Set

Button slights and the LCD screen

in the remote changes to the display

shown in Figure 24. (You may also nav-

igate to the screen shown in Figure 24

by pressing and holding the Remote

Menu Button b for 3 seconds until

the main remote menu appears; then

scroll to the SET SPKR LEVELS

NOTE: Output level adjustment is not

available for the Surround Off mode.

Advanced Settings

Next, press the OSD Button D

option and press the Set Button s.)

display the MAINMENU, and then

scroll to the ADVANCEDline and

select it to display the ADVANCED

SETTINGSsubmenu (Figure 29).

Scroll down to the VOLUME

The ADVANCEDSETTINGSsub-

menu (Figure 29) may be accessed from

the MAINMENU(Figure 6). It con-

tains some additional settings that will

enhance the convenience of the CVR700.

2. Press the ⁄/¤ Navigation

Controls qto change the bottom

line of the remote’s LCD display to read

MANUAL SPL as shown in Figure 28.

DEFAULTline and set it to ON.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the CVR700 in a location with adequate

ventilation, and several inches clearance

on the top and sides.

appear. Use the ⁄/¤ Navigation

Scroll down one more line to the VOL

DEFAULTLEVELline, and use the

Controls q

to scroll to the desired

delay setting and press the Set Button

Navigation Controls q

to select that setting. To retain

select the setting you chose above as a

comfortable default turn-on volume. Press

The CVR700 is equipped with a fan to

provide cooling. The fan is always turning

at one of three speeds, depending upon

the setting you choose for the FANline

of the ADVANCEDSETTINGS

submenu.

the current setting without making any

changes, scroll to the BACKTO

MAINMENUline and press the

the Set Button s

to enter your

selection into memory. Your setting will

be retained, even after the unit is pow-

ered off.

Set Button s

AUDIO

TIME

DELAY

Main Menu Time-Out

The default setting is MINIMUM

NOISE. At this setting, the fan will

turn at its slowest speed when the vol-

ume is set below –20dB, and slightly

faster at a medium speed whenever the

volume is –20dB or higher. This intelli-

gent cooling scheme minimizes distract-

ing fan noise while maintaining proper

operating temperatures.

›

The OSD menu system is used to simplify

the setup and adjustment of the CVR700

by using a series of on-screen menus.

The factory default setting for these

menus leaves them on the screen for 20

seconds after a period of inactivity before

they disappear from the screen (Time-

Out). Time-Out is a safety measure to

prevent image retention of the menu text

in your video display, which might happen

if it were left on indefinitely. This is of

particular concern for plasma displays

such as the CVPD50. However, some

viewers may prefer a slightly longer or

shorter period before the on-screen dis-

play disappears.

100

BACK

MAIN

Figure 30

This completes the setup of the CVR700

audio section. There remain a few minor

adjustments to be made, if desired, to the

setup menu for the internal DVD/CD

changer, and you may wish to make some

advanced settings to the Screen menus,

then you will be able to enjoy the finest

in home theater entertainment.

You may choose the MAXIMUM

COOLINGsetting instead. At this

setting, the fan runs at full speed at all

times. This setting is recommended when

the CVR700 is placed inside a cabinet.

ADVANCEDSETTINGSsubmenu

settings may be reset to their factory

defaults by scrolling to the RESET

ALLOFTHEABOVETO

DVD Setup

With the ADVANCEDSETTINGS

submenu on screen, scroll down to the

OSDTIMEOUTline. Use the ‹/›

The DVD Setup menus are accessed by

first making sure that the CVR700 and

CVPD50 are properly installed and con-

nected, and then pressing the Power On

FACTORYSETTINGS?line and

pressing the Set Button s

Navigation Controls q

to select

Lip Sync

a timeout period of 20, 30, 40 or 50 sec-

onds. Your selection will be retained even

after the unit is powered off.

(All) Button b

units. Press the DVD Setup Button

to display the SETUP

to turn on both

In addition to adjusting the delay time

for each individual speaker position, the

CVR700 allows you to adjust the delay for

the combined output of all speakers as a

group. This feature is called Lip Sync

Delay; it allows you to compensate for

delays to the video image that may be

caused by the processing in products

such as digital video displays, video

scalars, digital cable or satellite systems,

or personal video recorders. With proper

adjustment of the setting for Lip Sync

Delay, you can eliminate the loss of lip

sync that may be caused by digital video

applications.

NOTE: The CVR700 and CVPD50 also use

a screen saver function as an additional

safety measure to prevent burnout, which

may even occur if the CVPD50’s own start-

up display is left on screen for too long a

period of time. After 2 minutes during

which no on-screen movement is detected,

the screen saver will appear. Simply press

any key on either remote or on the CVR700’s

front panel to wake the system and return

it to normal operation. The screen saver

time-out is not adjustable. Important: The

screen saver is not available for devices

connected to the DVI/Computer source

input, due to the nature of the digital

MENU(Figure 31) for the DVD/CD

changer.

SETUP MENU

TV DISPLAY

VIDEO OUT

TV TYPE

16:9 WIDE

INTERLACED

MULTI

VIDEO MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

PASSWORD

AUTO

UNLOCK

DVD AUDIO

SLIDE SHOW

SEC

RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS

Figure 31

Important Note: The DVD Setup menu

functions differently from the CVR700

audio menu system. Although you will

still use the ⁄/¤ Navigation

When the CVR700 is used with the

CVPD50 plasma display, the delay due to

video processing is a known factor, and

the default Lip Sync delay time of 50ms

should be retained. However, if you are

using the CVR700 with another display, or

if you are experiencing lip sync problems

with an external source, you may wish to

adjust the delay time.

video interface. It is essential that you pro-

gram your computer or other DVI source

device to enter the screen saver mode to

prevent burnout of the CVPD50 screen.

Controls q

to scroll from one

line to the next, in order to scroll through

the options available for each setting,

you must repeatedly press the Set

Fan Speed

Button s

The CVR700’s 700 watts of amplification

generate a significant amount of heat

that must be dissipated in order to pre-

vent damage to delicate electrical com-

ponents that could shorten the unit’s use-

ful life, or even lead to failure. For this

reason, it is extremely important to place

If you are using the CVR700 with the

CVPD50 display screen, then you should

leave the first four lines at their factory

default settings. These settings should

only be adjusted if you are using the

CVR700 with a different video display

device.

With the MAINMENU(Figure 6) on

screen, scroll down to the LIPSYNC

line and select it by pressing the Set

Button s

. The AUDIOTIME

DELAYsubmenu (Figure 30) will

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Rating Levels

The first line of the SETUPMENU

is the TVDISPLAYsetting, which

should be set to match the aspect ratio of

your video display device. For the CVPD50,

this setting should be left at its factory

default of 16:9WIDE. If you are

using a different video display monitor

that has a 4:3 aspect ratio screen and is

capable of displaying a progressive scan

image, you may select the 4:3PSset-

ting, or if your display monitor has a 4:3

aspect ratio screen but does not have

progressive scan capability, you should

select the 4:3LBsetting, which will

display widescreen (16:9) images with

black bars above and below the image.

Parental Control

The five MPAA rating symbols are

“G” (General, Level 1), “PG” (Parental

Guidance, Level 3), “PG13” (Parental

Guidance and 13 years old, Level 4), “R”

(Restricted, Level 6) and “NC 17” (from

17 years old, Level 7). The CVR700 will

accommodate a total of eight rating

steps, as set by the DVD creators. These

additional steps allow for more critical

control of program playback for all

audiences.

The CVR700’s Password System is used

to control viewing of restricted programs

and offers the capability to change the

password itself and the rating. The

CVR700 is shipped with “1234” as the

default password and with the parental

control settings off. The following

instructions will show how to change

the password and lock the settings.

NOTE: The DVD disc must be specifically

encoded with rating information for

Parental Control to work.

Level 8: All DVDs, including adult

materials, can be played.

Password

Levels 7 to 2: DVDs for general audi-

ences/children can be played.

If you change the password from the

factory default setting, please remember

to write the new password in a safe

place. You cannot access rated discs or

rating/password menus or change or

clear the password (see below) without

entering the correct password. If you for-

get your password, you can reset the

CVR700 to the factory default password

(1234) by scrolling to the RETURNTO

FACTORYSETTINGSline and

The second line sets the CVR700’s

Level 1: DVDs for children can be played;

DVDs for adults/general audiences are

prohibited.

Component Video Monitor Outputs

· to progressive scan or interlaced.

There is no need to adjust this setting if

you are using the CVPD50, but if you are

using these outputs with another video

display device, you must select the

INTERLACEDsetting if the display

monitor is not capable of displaying a

progressive scan signal, or you may

choose the PROGRESSIVEsetting

if your display monitor is capable of dis-

playing that type of video signal.

After you have entered or changed the

password, you may set the level of

access (see Figure 31). The lowest set-

ting, “1G” refers to materials targeted for

a general audience and considered to be

appropriate for all. Higher ratings are

given to materials targeted toward older,

more mature audiences; those materials

may not be appropriate for younger view-

ers, as described above. More informa-

tion about ratings is available at

www.mpaa.org/movieratings/. Press

the Set Button s

scroll through the rating levels. When

the desired level appears, simply use the

pressing the Set Button s

NOTE: This will restore all DVD menu

settings to the factory default settings.

Any changes you have made will be lost.

The TVTYPEline should be set to

MULTIif you will be viewing both

NTSC and PAL DVDs, or you may set it to

either NTSC, which is the video stan-

dard used for most discs available in the

United States, or PAL, which is the

video standard used for most discs avail-

able in other parts of the world.

We recommend that if you wish to

restrict access to DVDs for younger view-

ers, that you change the password as

part of the setup process. Scroll to the

PASSWORDline and select it by

repeatedly to

⁄/¤ Navigation Controls q

scroll to another line, and the setting will

be retained.

pressing the Set Button s

. The

display shown in Figure 32 will appear,

prompting you to enter the old password,

and then the new. Enter “1234” for the

old password, and then enter a new

password of your choice. Type carefully,

as a mistyped entry will be retained as

the new password, and it is not possible

to correct a mistyped digit without creat-

ing an entirely new password.

The VIDEOMODEsetting affects

the CVPD50 plasma display and the

Component Video Monitor Outputs

· (but not the other video outputs). This

setting allows you to compensate for

errors in the disc authoring where proper

maintenance of frame rate was not car-

ried out in the film-to-video conversion

process.

The DVDAUDIOline may be set to

enable playback of DVD-Audio discs or

disable playback of those types of discs.

Some DVD-Audio discs contain different

materials, including menus and audio

tracks, that are only available depending

on the capabilities of the player. For

example, when such a DVD-Audio disc is

played in a DVD-Video player that doesn’t

have DVD-Audio capability, a special

DVD-Video menu may be accessed, and

conventional audio tracks, such as Dolby

Digital 5.1 and 2-channel PCM, will be

available. However, when that same disc

is played in a DVD-Audio player, only the

DVD-Audio menu may be accessed, and

the only available audio tracks will be in

the high-resolution DVD-Audio formats.

SETUP MENU

The CVR700’s advanced adaptive inter-

lacer will handle most of these types

of problems, and it is therefore recom-

mended that you leave this line at the

factory default setting of AUTO.

However, if you observe problems with

vertical resolution on a specific disc,

experiment by selecting the FILM

mode for programs originally created

on film, or the VIDEOmode for pro-

grams originating on video.

TV DISPLAY

VIDEO OUT

TV TYPE

16:9 WIDE

INTERLACED

NTSC

VIDEO MODE

PARENTAL LOCK

PASSWORD

AUTO

OLD: ----

NEW: ----

DVD AUDIO

SLIDE SHOW

SEC

RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS

Figure 32

If for some reason you forget your pass-

word, you may override the password

control by entering “2580” as the pass-

word, and then program a new password.

JBL recognizes that there may be reasons

why you would wish to have access to all

of the materials on a DVD-Audio disc. To

access the DVD-Video materials on your

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DVD-Audio disc, change the DVD

AUDIOline to OFF. You may switch

back and forth between the ON and OFF

settings at any time to access either set

of materials.

35a), or the DVISETTINGSmenu

(Figure 35b), depending on the type of

source device you have connected to the

DVI/Computer input. Scroll down to the

Connecteddeviceline and

select the appropriate source type: DVD

HDCP, HD tuner or PC for a personal com-

puter. Any of these devices must be

equipped with either a DVI video output

or a VGA video output that you have con-

nected to the CVR700’s DVI (HDCP)/

SCREEN MENU

INPUTS/PIP

PICTURE

DISPLAY

ADVANCED

SETTINGS

INFORMATION

EXIT

The SLIDESHOWline allows you to

set the amount of time a JPEG still image

will remain on screen before the CVR700

automatically advances to the next image

on the disc. You may set this time to 2, 3,

4 or 5 seconds.

Figure 33

IMPORTANT NOTE: The Screen Setup

menus function differently from the

CVR700 audio menu system. Although

you will still use the ⁄/¤ Navigation

Computer Video Input

using the

This completes the setup of the internal

DVD/CD changer.

supplied VGA-to-DVI adaptor cable. This

menu affects the size and position of

the DVI/Computer source picture on the

screen, and it is set by the CVPD50 auto-

matically the first time you connect your

computer or other device to the DVI video

input. After the first use, these menu set-

tings are no longer user-adjustable for

the DVI/Computer input.

Controls q

to scroll from one line

Screen Setup

to the next, in order to scroll through the

options available for each setting, you

must repeatedly press the Set Button

The CVPD50 plasma display screen uti-

lizes state-of-the-art digital video pro-

cessing that is contained within the

CVR700, and it is not possible to use the

CVPD50 without the CVR700 processor.

Although the video processor is extremely

flexible, making adjustments to video

display devices requires knowledge and

experience to avoid making mistakes that

could require professional assistance to

correct. Although you will not do any

damage to the CVPD50 by making these

adjustments, you could set the picture in

such a way that it is not possible to view

your favorite materials.

It is recommended that for initial setup,

you avoid changing any of the video set-

tings and allow the CVPD50 and CVR700

to automatically display your materials

using the factory default settings. As you

become more familiar with the system

and desire to tweak it, you may wish to

explore some of these settings.

HD&PC SETTINGS

Horizontal Frequency

Vertical Frequency

Pixel Clock

31.3kHz

50.0Hz

27.0MHz

H/V Polarities

Auto Setup

Horizontal Position

Vertical Position

Hirizontal Total

Vertical Resolutioin

Phase

Inputs and Picture-in-Picture

Settings

Reset default settings

Back to screen menu

Figure 35a

Scroll to the INPUTS/PIPmenu

and select it. The INPUTS/PIP

menu (Figure 34) will be displayed.

To access the screen setup menus, first

make sure the remote control is set to

Screen mode by pressing the Screen

DVI SETTINGS

Horizontal frequency

Vertical frequency

Pixel polarities

33.7kHz

59.9Hz

+/+

INPUTS/PIP

Horizontal resolution 1805

Selector e

. If this is not done,

Main input

Digital

Off

Vertical resolution

Connected device

986

Input settings

PIP mode

the remote will execute the commands

programmed for the current source

device, or for the CVR700 audio section.

HDCP DVD

Back to screen menu

PIP size

PIP horiz. pos.

PIP vert. pos.

Back to screen menu

Press the Screen Setup Button

Figure 35b

to display the SCREEN

MENU(Figure 33). If the current source

is an external device that you are using

with component video, or if the source

has no video output, the background will

be black. If your source uses component

video, unless you have also made an S-

video connection from the source to the

CVR700, the menus will not be displayed.

Also, if the current source is the DVI/

Computer source, the menus will not be

displayed. Otherwise, the menus will be

transparent, with the program material

visible behind them. As described below,

you may adjust the transparency of

the menus from a setting in the

Figure 34

This menu is also used to align an HDTV

picture if necessary. Great caution should

be used to avoid ending up with a video

image that is too small in size to be view-

able. You may select the reset function

if you adjust these settings incorrectly.

MainInput: The Main

Inputline is informational only

and you should not attempt to change it.

The setting will reflect the video format

of the current source. For the internal

DVD/CD changer, this setting will read

Digital. For external sources, this

setting will indicate which video input is

in use: i.e., component video, composite

video or S-video.

The first four lines contain information

only and are not adjustable. The Phase

line simply reflects the settings of the

incoming signal and is not adjustable.

• AutoSetup: This initiates the

process of detecting the incoming video

signal and adjusting the horizontal and

vertical position and size of the display.

InputSettings: The Input

Settingsline will not be accessi-

ble when the internal DVD/CD changer is

in use. The available settings will vary

depending upon the video format of the

current source.

ADVANCEDmenu.

• HorizontalPosition:

This temperature bar reflects the hori-

zontal positioning of the image on

screen. When the dark square is com-

pletely to the left, the image is moved

as far to the left side of the screen as

For DVI sources, selecting Input

Settingstakes you to either the

HD&PCSETTINGSmenu (Figure

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

possible, and the numerical value is 0.

Use the ‹/›Navigation Controls

positioned toward the bottom of the

screen. Use the ‹/›Navigation

a. PIP mode is only available when the

current source input is using composite

video (not component or S-video). PIP

mode enables you to monitor the source

connected to the PIP input while watch-

ing another video source. When desired,

you may swap the images by pressing

and holding the PIP Swap Button

to adjust the position of the

Controls q

to adjust this setting.

image if it is not initially centered on

the screen.

Pressing the Set Button s repeat-

edly will only move the window upwards,

but not downwards.

• VerticalPosition: This

temperature bar reflects the vertical

positioning of the image on screen.

When the dark square is completely to

the left, the image is moved as far to

the bottom of the screen as possible,

and the numerical value is 0. Use the

Picture Settings

With the SCREENMENU(Fig. 33) on

screen, scroll down to the PICTURE

SETTINGSline and select it by

for several seconds. This will

display the main source in the PIP win-

dow and the PIP source in the main

viewing area.

pressing the Set Button s

. The

PICTURESETTINGSsubmenu

(Figure 37) will be displayed.

‹/›Navigation Controls q

There are two available PIP modes: in

one mode a small inset window will

appear on the CVPD50 screen, and it will

display the source connected to the PIP

input. The second mode splits the screen

into two equal halves, displaying the

main video signal on the left side and the

PIP source on the right. Press the Set

to adjust the position of the image if it

is not initially centered on the screen.

PICTURE SETTINGS

Digital Video Input

Mode

Broadcast

• HorizontalTotal: This

temperature bar reflects the horizontal

size of the displayed image. When the

gray square is completely to the left

and the numerical value is 0, the image

is at maximum width. Use the ‹/›

Contrast

Brightness

Sharpness

Color

DNC

Off

Photo CD

Reset input

Back to screen menu

Button s

repeatedly while at

the PIPModeline to cycle through

these modes and the Offsetting. The

remaining settings in the INPUTS/

PIPmenu enable you to adjust the size

and position of the PIP window.

Figure 37

Navigation Controls q

adjust the width of the image until it

fills the screen.

You may wish to use a test disc to guide

you through the adjustment process.

Several are available from Internet

retailers.

• VerticalResolution:

This temperature bar reflects the verti-

cal size of the displayed image in

terms of the number of pixels used.

When the gray square is completely

to the left and the numerical value is

0, the image is at maximum height.

Use the ‹/›Navigation Controls

PIPSize: The temperature bar at

this line reflects the size of the PIP win-

dow. When the dark square is towards

the right side of the bar, the window is

increased in size, and when the square is

towards the left side of the bar, the win-

dow is decreased in size. Use the ‹/›

Alternatively, we recommend that you

select one of the three factory preset

modes designed for optimal display of

various types of programs. These modes

are also directly accessible from both

remote controls. The Sports mode is

designed for the types of images normally

used in sporting events; the Movies

mode displays the images found in many

movies, which are often darker than

normal; and the Broadcast mode offers

the best display of broadcast television

programs.

to adjust the vertical height

Navigation Controls q

to adjust

of the image until it fills the screen.

this setting. Pressing the Set Button s

When a composite or S-video source

is in use, selecting the Input

repeatedly will only increase the

size of the window, but not decrease it.

Settingswill take you to the

VIDEOSETTINGSmenu (Fig. 36).

The VideoStandardline is

informational only, and will reflect the

video standard for your country. The

VCRStabilityfeature may be

set to either Onor Off. Turning it on

improves the display of VCR materials.

PIPHoriz.Pos.: The tempera-

ture bar at this line reflects the relative

horizontal position of the PIP window on

the CVPD50 screen. When the dark

square is towards the right side of the

bar, the window is positioned toward the

right side of the screen, and when the

square is towards the left side of the bar,

the window is positioned toward the

left side of the screen. Use the ‹/›

Contrast: This setting is also

known as “white level”, and is most easily

set using a test pattern containing a

grayscale – monochrome bars in different

shades of black, gray and white. Adjust

this setting between –64 and 63 to the

point just before the brightest bars of

your test pattern start to bleed into the

surrounding black background. If you do

not have a test pattern, adjust it to the

lowest level where all shades of a given

color remain visible.

VIDEO SETTINGS

Video Standard

VCR Stability

Auto

Navigation Controls q

to adjust

this setting. Pressing the Set Button

repeatedly will only move the

back to input menu

window towards the right, but not

towards the left.

Figure 36

PIPVert.Pos.: The tempera-

ture bar at this line reflects the relative

vertical position of the PIP window on the

CVPD50 screen. When the dark square is

towards the right side of the bar, the win-

dow is positioned toward the top of the

screen, and when the square is towards

the left side of the bar, the window is

Brightness: This setting is also

known as “black level”, and it should be

adjusted using a PLUGE pattern found on

a test disc. Adjust this setting between

–64 and 63 to the lowest point where

one of the moving lines in the black field

remains visible, but before both disap-

pear. If you do not have a test pattern,

PIPMode: This line of the

INPUTS/PIPmenu turns the pic-

ture-in-picture feature on or off. In order

to use this feature, you must connect the

composite video output of a source that

you desire to monitor to the Picture-in-

Picture (PIP) Composite Video Input

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

adjust it so that a typical video picture

has about the same appearance as the

surroundings in the room. That way the

eye is relaxed when watching the TV pic-

ture. This setting may be reduced when

the surrounding light is dimmed, thereby

usually improving the sharpness signifi-

cantly.

recommend for most installations.

screen, with options of 20, 40 or 60 sec-

onds available. It is particularly important

with plasma displays to avoid leaving a

still image, such as a menu, on screen for

an extended period of time, as the image

may be “burned” into the screen perma-

nently. Therefore, it is not possible to

set the menus to remain on screen

indefinitely.

However, you may prefer the colors to

appear more blue overall, or more red

overall. Select the Coldsetting for

more blue content, or the Warmsetting

for more red content. Alternatively, if you

prefer to adjust the degree of red, green

and blue more precisely, select the

USERsetting, which will activate user

color temperature settings for each color.

Sharpness: This temperature bar

and numerical value (ranging from 0 to 4)

reflect the sharpness of the picture. Due

to the pixel structure of video images,

lowering the sharpness setting will tend

to improve the quality of the picture.

OnScreenStatustime

PictureContrast:This set- out: This setting allows you to adjust

ting has three options: Ideal, Light and

Dark. The factory default setting is

named Ideal, and is what we recom-

mend for most installations. However,

you may prefer images to appear either

lighter or darker.

the amount of time the various system

status banners remain on screen, or to

disable them altogether. These banners

appear when a source is selected and a

new audio or video signal is detected.

The aspect ratio banner will first display

the aspect ratio of the source, and then

the aspect ratio in which it will be dis-

played, depending on how you have con-

figured the system. The source banner

will display the name of the source, the

audio input, and the video input or other

information as appropriate. This setting

does not affect the status bar displayed

by the CVR700’s internal DVD/CD changer

when a disc is being played. You may

choose to remove the status banners

from view after 2, 3, 4, or 5 seconds, or

you may choose the Off setting, in which

they are not displayed at all.

Color: This temperature bar and

numerical value (ranging from 0 to 31)

reflect the saturation of the color.

Decreasing this setting to 0 will remove

all color and make the picture appear

monochrome (black and white). Increasing

UserColorTemp.red: This

setting is only active when the User

settings has been selected at the

it will brighten the intensity of the colors. ColorTemperatureline

It may be adjusted using a blue filter and

color bars. If you do not have access to a

test pattern, you may adjust this setting

so that red objects are not too bright and

fuzzy around the edges.

above. The temperature bar and numeri-

cal value (ranging between 0 and 255)

reflect the intensity of the red pixels.

UserColorTemp.green:

This setting is only active when the

Usersettings has been selected at the

DNC: This temperature bar and numeri-

cal value (ranging from 0 to 15) is used to ColorTemperatureline

adjust dynamic noise control. Leave this

setting at its factory default, unless you

have a video image with interference that

is causing video “noise”. This setting may

be used to reduce the amount of noise

displayed.

above. The temperature bar and numeri-

cal value (ranging between 0 and 255)

reflect the intensity of the green pixels.

ShowStartupScreen: This

setting may be set to On or Off, and it

determines whether the JBL logo screen

appears when the CVPD50 is powered up.

UserColorTemp.blue:

This setting is only active when the

Usersettings has been selected at the

ColorTemperatureline

above. The temperature bar and numeri-

cal value (ranging between 0 and 255)

reflect the intensity of the blue pixels.

The reset line may be used to reset all of

the settings in this menu for the current

video input.

OSDTransparency: This tem-

perature bar reflects whether the Screen

menus appear transparent, so that the

current video image may be seen behind

them (dark square to the left), or opaque,

so that they have a black background that

blocks any view of the video image (dark

square to the right). There is a reset line

that may be used to reset the settings in

this menu only.

Display Settings

With the SCREENMENU(Fig. 33) on

screen, scroll down to the DISPLAY

SETTINGSline and select it by

Advanced Settings Menu

With the SCREENMENU(Fig. 33) on

screen, scroll down to the ADVANCED

line and select it by pressing the Set

pressing the Set Button s

. The

DISPLAYSETTINGSsubmenu

(Figure 38) will be displayed.

Button s

. The ADVANCED

submenu (Figure 39) will be displayed.

DVD auto picture

DISPLAY SETTINGS

ADVANCED

resize: JBL recommends that you

leave this setting in the default “On” posi-

tion so that images (video and still) on

DVDs, VCDs and JPEG discs will be auto-

matically resized by the CVR700 to fill the

CVPD50 screen. This setting only applies

to the CVR700’s internal disc changer; for

external video sources, you will still need

Color Temperature

Ideal

20s

Screen menu time out

On Screen Status

Show startup screen

OSD Transparency

DVD auto picture resize

Screen status LED

4:3 scaling

Picture Contrast

3s t/0

Yes

User color temp. red

User color temp. green

User color temp. blue

Back to screen menu

128

127

113

Non-Linear

Reset all

Back to screen menu

Figure 38

Figure 39

to use the Frame Button `

or the

This menu enables you to precisely adjust

the color display.

This menu is used to adjust the appear-

ance of the on-screen menus.

Letterbox Button z

to select a dis-

play mode for each source that fills the

screen. Also, note that some DVDs include

a letterboxed version in which black bars

above and below the picture are part of the

ColorTemperature: This

setting has four options: Ideal, Cold,

Warm and User. The factory default set-

ting is named Ideal, and is what we

Screenmenutimeout: This

setting allows you to adjust the amount

of time the Screen menus remain on

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

movie frame. For this reason, it is not possi-

ble to remove those black bars, and you

may prefer to watch a non-letterboxed ver-

sion of the movie if provided on the disc.

With the SCREENMENU(Fig. 33) on

screen, scroll to the INFORMATION

line and select it by pressing the Set

Button s

. The INFORMATION

submenu (Figure 40) will be displayed.

You may notice that the picture jumps as

it is resized, and this is normal. If the pic-

ture has large dark areas, particularly

near the frame edges, the picture may be

resized frequently. In that case, you may

prefer to turn off the Auto Resize function

while watching that disc and use the

INFORMATION

Hardware Version

Software Version

Rev02

251004R

Back to screen menu

Frame Button `

or the Letterbox

Button z

to select a display.

Figure 40

Screen status LED: Some

people may find the status LED on the

front panel of the CVPD50 to be distract-

ing while watching movies, and this set-

ting allows you to turn the LED off. If pos-

sible, it is recommended that you leave

the LED turned on to alert you to its sta-

tus, such as flashing red and yellow to

indicate that it has come unplugged.

This menu displays the version numbers

of your screen and its software drivers.

Your JBL Cinema Vision system is now

completely configured, and you are ready

to begin enjoying the finest in home the-

ater entertainment.

4:3 Scaling

The 4:3SCALINGsetting is only

needed for sources where the original

program material is in the 4:3 aspect

ratio. The default setting is NORMAL,

where 4:3 materials are displayed in their

original aspect ratio, with black bars

appearing on the left and right sides of

the image. If you wish to have the image

stretched to fill the CVPD50’s 16:9 screen,

select LINEARscaling to have the

picture stretched at the same rate through-

out the frame, or NON-LINEARto

leave the center of the frame virtually

untouched, with the degree of scaling

increasing towards the edges. You may

override this setting manually for a

specific disc by using the Frame

Button `

NOTE: Leaving the black bars on screen

for long periods of time, especially during

the first 1,000 hours of operation, may

cause burnout of the CVPD50 plasma

display, which is not covered under

warranty. JBL recommends using the

Frame Button `

or the Letterbox

Button z

to select a display mode

for each source that fills the screen.

Information Menu

The last submenu in the Screen menu

system is the INFORMATION

menu. It does not contain any user-

adjustable settings. In the unlikely event

that you have a problem with your CVPD50

screen, a customer service representative

may ask you to access this screen and

report the information it contains.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASIC OPERATION

Once you have completed the initial

setup and configuration of the JBL

Cinema Vision system, it is simple to

operate and enjoy. The following instruc-

tions will help you maximize the enjoy-

ment of your new home theater system:

controls and in the CVR700’s menu

system.

Main Power On/Off Control 1will

turn red, and the LED on the front of

the CVPD50 will turn amber. When the

remote is used to turn the unit “off” it is

actually placing the system in a Standby

mode, as indicated by the red color of the

LED on the CVR700 and the amber color

of the LED on the CVPD50.

• As the input source is changed, the

new input name will appear momentar-

ily as an on-screen banner display

along with the audio input and video

screen format. The input name will

also appear in the Main Information

Display Ô

Turning the CVR700 and CVPD50

On or Off

To program the CVR700 for automatic

Plug the CVPD50 and CVR700 power

cords into unswitched AC wall outlets.

When using the system for the first time,

you must make sure that the power

switch on the underside of the CVPD50

next to the AC power cord is switched on

to the “1” position. Use a mirror to assist

you in locating the switch and ascertain-

ing whether it is on or off. This places the

CVPD50 in a Standby mode, as indicated

by the amber color of the LED located on

the front of the screen, below the picture.

In addition, the LED in the middle of the

Main Power On/Off Switch 1on the

CVR700 will turn red.

turn-off, press the Sleep Button

• When an audio source is selected, the

last video input used remains routed

to the VCR Video Outputs ¤, the

Digital Recorder Video Ouptuts ‚

and the Video Monitor Outputs ›.

This permits you to simultaneously

view and listen to different sources.

on the remote. Each press of

the button will decrease the time before

shut-down in the following sequence: 90

minutes, 80 minutes, 70 minutes, 60 min-

utes, 50 minutes, 40 minutes, 30 minutes,

20 minutes, 10 minutes, Sleep Timer Off.

The sleep time will be displayed in the

Lower Display Line E, and it will

count down until the time has elapsed.

• When a video source is selected, the

video signal for that input will be routed

to the CVPD50 for viewing, and if it

is a composite or S-video source,

the video signal will be routed to the

Video Monitor Output ¤ and may

be viewed on an external TV monitor

connected to the CVR700.

When the programmed sleep time has

elapsed, the system will automatically

turn off. The CVR700’s front-panel display

will dim to one-half brightness when the

Sleep function is programmed. To cancel

the Sleep function, press and hold the

Once the units are in Standby, you may

begin a listening session by pressing the

Main Power On/Off Switch 1, which

will turn on both the CVR700 and the

CVPD50, or press the Power On (All)

Volume Control

Sleep Button Y

until the informa-

• Adjust the volume to a comfortable

level using the front-panel Volume

Control a or remote Volume Up/

tion display returns to normal brightness;

the Sleep indicator numbers will disap-

pear and the words SLEEPOFFwill

appear in the Lower Display Line E.

Button b

. If you hold it for 3

Down Buttons u

seconds, all devices programmed into

the remote will also turn on. The LED in

the center of the Main Power On/Off

Switch 1will turn orange, and the LED

on the front of the CVPD50 will turn green.

This will turn the CVR700 on and return it

to the input source that was last used.

• To temporarily silence all speaker out-

When you will be away from home for an

extended period of time it is always a

good idea to completely turn the unit off

by unplugging the CVR700, and switching

off the master power switch located on

the underside of the CVPD50 next to the

power plug. NOTE: Preset memories

should be retained indefinitely.

puts, press the Mute Button

This will interrupt the output to all

speakers and the headphone jack, but

it will not affect any recording or dub-

bing that may be in progress. When

the system is muted, the word MUTE

will flash in the Main Information

Display Ô. Press the Mute Button

The system may also be turned on from

Standby by pressing and holding any of

the Input Selector Buttons d

Source Selection

again, or adjust the volume to

. This will not only power on the

• To select a source, press any of the

Input Selector Buttons d

return to normal operation.

CVR700, CVPD50 and any source unit

associated with that button, it will also

begin play of the currently loaded disc

if the internal DVD/CD changer was

selected as the source.

• The unit’s tone controls may be taken

out of the signal path by pressing the

• The input source may also be changed

by slowly rotating the front-panel

Input Source Selector &. Each step,

which you may feel as a tactile detent

or click, will move the input selection

through the available inputs.

Tone Mode Button m

. The

first press will show a message in the

Lower Display Line Ewith the cur-

rent status of the tone controls. The

system default is TONEIN, which

indicates that the bass and treble

controls are active. Press the ⁄/¤

NOTE: After pressing one of the Input

Selector Buttons d

to turn

the unit on, press the System Selector

to set the remote control to the

CVR700 functions. Press the DVD Input

Selector d to control the internal

• As the input is changed, the CVR700

will automatically switch to the digital

input (if selected), surround mode,

speaker configuration, and night mode

status that were entered during the

configuration process for that source.

Navigation Control q

change the setting to TONEOUT,

which is “flat” response without the

tone controls being active.

DVD/CD changer.

To turn the unit off at the end of a listen-

ing session, simply press the Main

Power On/Off Control 1on the front

• When the tone controls are active,

the bass and treble boost/cut may be

adjusted by first pressing the Tone

• The Front-Panel Audio/Video Inputs

$may be used to temporarily con-

nect a device such as a video game or

camcorder to your home entertainment

system. This source is called the

panel or the Power Off Button a

on the remote. You may also press and

hold the Power Off (All) Button a

Mode Button m

until the

desired setting (BASSMODEor

TREBLEMODE) appears in the

to turn off any external source units.

Game/Cam input source on the remote

The LED indicator in the center of the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

other channels, but since it is intentionally

bandwidth-limited, sound designers have

given it that unique designation.

Lower Display Line E. Next, use

the ⁄/¤ Navigation Control

Surround Mode Selector *repeatedly

until the desired surround mode is selected.

to change the setting as

To select a surround mode using the

remote, press the button for the surround

mode group that includes the mode you

desired. The unit will return to normal

operation within 5 seconds after the

setting is changed.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a standard part of DVD,

available on specially encoded LD discs

and satellite broadcasts, and is a part

of the high-definition television (HDTV)

system.

wish to choose: Dolby p

, DTS

• For private listening, plug the 1/4"

stereo phone plug from a pair of stereo

headphones into the front-panel

Headphone Jack %. When the

headphone’s plug is connected, the

word HEADPHONEwill scroll once

across the Lower Display Line E

and all speakers will be silenced.

When the headphone plug is removed,

the audio feed to the speakers will be

restored.

Digital o

Logic 7 i

, DTS Neo:6 e

, Stereo p

DSP Surround g

. The first press

of the button will show the current mode

from that group if it is already in use, or

the first available mode if you are cur-

rently using another mode. To cycle

through the available modes in that

group, press the button again until the

desired mode appears in the Lower

Display Line Eand in the front-panel

Surround Mode Indicators G.

An optional, external RF demodulator is

required to use the CVR700 to listen to

the Dolby Digital soundtracks available

on laser discs. Connect the RF output of

the LD player to the demodulator and

then connect the digital output of the

demodulator to the Optical or Coaxial

Inputs cefhij9)of the

CVR700 corresponding to the source (e.g.,

AUX) you wish to use for your LD player.

No demodulator is required for use with

DVD players or DTS-encoded laser discs.

The CVR700’s internal DVD/CD changer

will automatically detect and play any

Dolby DVD loaded into it, and no external

connections need to be made. However,

the CVR700 is not capable of playing a

laser disc, and an external LD player

must be connected to the CVR700.

Surround Mode Selection

The Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, DTS

5.1, DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete

modes may only be selected when a digi-

tal input is in use. In addition, when a

digital source is present, the CVR700 will

automatically select and switch to the

correct mode, regardless of the mode

that has been previously selected. For

more information on selecting digital

sources, see the Digital Audio Playback

section below.

One of the most important features of the

CVR700 is its ability to reproduce a full

multichannel sound field from digital

sources, analog matrix surround-encoded

programs and standard stereo programs.

Selection of a surround mode is based on

personal taste, as well as the type of

program source material being used. For

example, motion pictures or TV programs

bearing the logo of one of the major sur-

round-encoding processes, such as Dolby

Surround or DTS Stereo may be played in

either the Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic II

Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS

Neo:6 Cinema, or Logic 7 Cinema surround

modes, depending on the source material.

DTS

DTS is a digital audio system capable of

delivering 5.1 or 6.1 discrete or matrix

sound field reproduction. Although both

DTS and Dolby Digital are digital, they

use different methods of encoding the

signals, and thus they require different

decoding circuits to convert the digital

signals back to analog.

When a DVD-Audio disc is in use, there

is no surround processing, as the analog

output signal from a DVD-Audio disc is

carried straight through to the preamp

section.

To listen to a program in traditional two-

channel stereo, using the front left and

right speakers only (plus the subwoofer,

if installed and configured), press the

NOTE: Once a program has been encoded

with matrix surround information, it

retains the surround information as long

as the program is available in stereo.

Thus, movies with surround sound may be

decoded via any of the analog surround

modes such as Dolby Pro Logic II or IIx

Movie, Logic 7 Cinema or DTS Neo:6

Cinema, when they are broadcast via con-

ventional TV stations, cable, pay-TV and

satellite transmission. Also, a number of

TV programs, sports broadcasts and radio

dramas are recorded in surround sound.

DTS-encoded soundtracks are available

on select DVD and LD discs, as well as

on audio-only DTS discs. The CVR700’s

internal DVD/CD changer will automati-

cally detect and play any DTS-encoded

DVD loaded into it, and no external con-

nections need to be made. If you are con-

necting an external device to the CVR700,

be aware that you may use any LD or CD

player equipped with a digital output to

play DTS-encoded discs with the CVR700.

All that is required is to connect the

player’s output to either an Optical

or Coaxial Input on the rear panel

Stereo Mode Select Button m

until SURROUNDOFFappears in the

Lower Display Line E. From the front

panel, press the Surround Mode Selector

*until SURROUNDOFFappears in

the Lower Display Line E.

Digital Audio Playback

Digital audio is a major advancement over

analog surround processing systems. It

delivers up to six discrete channels, and

each channel reproduces full frequency

range (20Hz to 20kHz) and offers dramati-

cally improved dynamic range and signifi-

cant improvements to signal-to-noise

ratios. In addition, digital systems have the

capability to deliver an additional channel

that is specifically devoted to low-fre-

quency information. This is the “.1” chan-

nel referred to when you see these sys-

tems described as “5.1,” “6.1” or “7.1.”

The bass channel is separate from the

Even when a program is not listed as car-

rying intentional surround information,

you may find that the Dolby Pro Logic II,

Logic 7, DTS Neo:6 and the Hall or Theater

modes often deliver enveloping surround

presentations through the use of the

natural information present in all stereo

recordings.

cefhij or front panel 9).

In order to listen to DVDs encoded with

DTS soundtracks, the DVD player must be

compatible with the DTS signal, which is

indicated by the “DTS Digital Out” logo

on the player’s front panel. Some early

DVD players were not able to play DTS-

encoded DVDs. This does not indicate a

problem with the CVR700, as those play-

Surround modes may be changed at any

time by using either the front panel or

remote control. To select a new surround

mode from the front panel, press the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ers cannot pass through the DTS signal.

If you’re in doubt as to the capability of

your DVD player to handle DTS discs,

consult the player’s owner’s manual.

data that is present. Using this informa-

tion, the correct surround mode will auto-

matically be selected. For example, DTS

bitstreams will cause the unit to switch

to DTS decoding, and Dolby Digital

bitstreams will enable Dolby Digital

decoding.

message with the letters PCM, in addi-

tion to a readout of the sampling frequency

of the digital signal.

In most cases, this will be PCM

44.1kHzor PCM48kHz, though

in the case of specially mastered, high-

resolution audio discs, you will see a

PCM96kHzindication.

NOTE: Many DVD players have a default

setting that does not pass through the

DTS data, even though the machine is

capable of doing so. If your external DVD

player has the “DTS Digital Out” logo but

does not trigger DTS playback in the

CVR700, change the player’s settings in

the “Audio” or “Bitstream” configuration

menu so that DTS playback is enabled.

The method for doing this will vary with

each player. In some cases, the proper

menu choice will be “Original,” while in

others it will be “DTS.” Consult the

owner’s manual for your player to find

the specific information to find the

proper setting.

When the unit senses PCM data from

CDs or LDs, you may select any of the

standard surround modes, such as Dolby

Pro Logic II or Logic 7. Since the range of

available surround modes is dependent

on the type of digital data that is present,

the CVR700 shows you what type of

signal is present. This will help you to

understand the choice of modes.

During PCM playback, you may select any

surround mode except one of the Dolby

Digital or DTS/DTS-ES modes.

Speaker/Channel Indicators

In addition to the bitstream indicators,

the CVR700 features channel-input indi-

cators that show how many channels of

digital information are being received

and/or whether the digital signal is inter-

rupted (see Figure 41).

When a digital source is first detected,

the CVR700 will indicate the type of bit-

stream being received by switching to the

appropriate surround mode, depending on

the bitstream and how you have config-

ured your system. The Speaker/Channel

Input Indicators Fwill light to indi-

cate which channels are contained in the

digital bitstream. For example, for a

Dolby Digital EX bitstream, the L, C, R,

SL, SR, SBL, SBR and LFE indicators will

light with a line between the SBL and

SBR boxes to indicate that those two

channels are in mono. This is the only

indication of the number of channels

present in the signal. The Surround

Mode Indicator Gthat identifies the

bitstream will also light. The Lower

Display Line Ewill indicate the sur-

round mode you have assigned to that

source using the AUDIOMODEsub-

menu system or the remote.

Selecting a Digital Source

To use either digital mode, you must have

properly connected a digital source to the

CVR700. Connect the digital outputs from

external DVD players, HDTV receivers,

satellite systems or CD players to the

Optical or Coaxial Inputs cefh

ij9). In order to provide a backup

signal and a source for analog stereo

recording, the analog outputs provided on

digital source equipment should also be

connected to the corresponding inputs on

the CVR700 rear panel (e.g., connect the

analog stereo audio output from a digital

recorder to the Digital Recorder Inputs

ª on the rear panel when you connect

the source’s digital outputs).

SBL

Figure 41

SBR

These indicators are the L/C/R/LFE/

SL/SR/SBL/SBR letters that are inside

the center boxes of the Speaker/

Channel Input Indicators Fon the

front panel. When a standard analog sig-

nal is in use, only the “L” and “R” indica-

tors will light, as analog signals have

only left and right channels.

Digital signals may have two, five, six or

seven channels, depending on the pro-

gram material, its method of transmission

and the way in which it was encoded.

When a digital signal is playing, the let-

ters in these indicators will light in

response to the signal being received. It

is important to note that although Dolby

Digital, for example, is referred to as a

“5.1” system, not all Dolby Digital DVDs

or programs are encoded for 5.1. Thus, it

is sometimes normal for a DVD with a

Dolby Digital soundtrack to trigger only

the “L” and “R” indicators.

If you have not already configured an

input for a digital source using the on-

screen menus as shown on page 46, first

select the desired input using the remote

or front-panel controls, as outlined in this

manual. Next, press the Audio Input

When Dolby Digital 5.1 or DTS or DTS-ES

signals are being played, the CVR700 will

automatically switch to the proper sur-

round mode, and no other processing may

be selected. When a Dolby Digital signal

with 4.0 or 2.0 channels is detected, you

may select any Dolby surround mode.

Button k

and then using the

⁄ ¤

Navigation Control q

choose the OPTICAL, COAXIAL

or ANALOGinput you wish to assign to

that source, as it appears in the Upper

Display Line H. When the digital

source is playing, the CVR700 will auto-

matically detect which type of digital

data stream is being decoded and display

that information in the Upper Display

Line H. However, the CVR700 will not

automatically detect which digital or ana-

log audio connection you have made.

When the digital audio data stream has

been interrupted or is no longer present,

such as when a DVD disc is paused or

stopped, the Speaker/Channel Input

Indicators Fwill flash to indicate that

no signal is present. This is normal and

does not indicate any problem with your

system.

NOTE: Many DVD discs are recorded

with both “5.1” and “2.0”, and Dolby

Digital and DTS versions of the same

soundtrack. When playing a DVD, always

be certain to check the type of material

on the disc. Most discs show this infor-

mation using icons on the back of the

disc jacket. When a disc offers multiple

soundtrack choices, you may have to

make some adjustments (usually with the

“Audio Select” button or in a menu

screen on the disc) to access the full 5.1

Continued on page 63

PCM Playback

PCM is the abbreviation for Pulse Code

Modulation, which is the type of digital

signal used for standard CD playback,

and other non-Dolby Digital and non-DTS

digital sources such as Mini-Disc. When

a PCM signal is detected, the Lower

Display Line Ewill briefly show a

Digital Bitstream and Surround Mode

Indicators

When a digital source is playing, the

CVR700 senses the type of bitstream

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUDIO SURROUND MODE CHART

MODE

FEATURES

Dolby Digital

Available only with digital input sources encoded with Dolby Digital data. It provides up to five separate main

audio channels and a special dedicated low-frequency effects channel.

Dolby Digital EX

Available when the receiver is configured for 6.1/7.1 channel operation, Dolby Digital EX is the latest version of

Dolby Digital. When used with movies or other programs that have special encoding, Dolby Digital EX reproduces

specially encoded soundtracks so that a full 6.1/7.1 sound field is available. When the receiver is set for

6.1/7.1 operation and a Dolby Digital signal is present, the EX mode is automatically selected. Even if specific EX

encoding is not available to provide the additional channel, the special algorithms will derive a 6.1/7.1 output.

DTS 5.1

When the speaker configuration is set for 5.1-channel operation, the DTS 5.1 mode is available when DVD,

audio-only music or laser discs encoded with DTS data are played. DTS 5.1 provides up to five separate main

audio channels and a special dedicated low-frequency channel.

DTS-ES 6.1

Matrix

Discrete

When the speaker configuration is set for 6.1/7.1 operation, playback of a DTS-encoded program source will

automatically trigger the selection of one of the two DTS-ES 6.1 Discrete DTS-ES modes. Newer discs with

special DTS-ES discrete encoding will be decoded to provide six discrete, full-bandwidth channels plus a

separate low-frequency channel. All other DTS discs will be decoded using the DTS-ES Matrix mode, which

creates a 6.1-channel sound field from the original 5.1-channel soundtrack.

Dolby Pro Logic II

Music

Dolby Pro Logic II decodes full-range, discrete, left, center right, right surround and left surround channels from

either matrix surround-encoded programs or conventional stereo sources when an analog input is in use. The

Dolby Pro Logic II Movie mode is optimized for movie soundtracks, while the Pro Logic II Music mode should be

used with musical selections. The Pro Logic mode re-creates original Pro Logic processing for those who prefer

that presentation.

Movie

Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Music

Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is the latest extension of Dolby Pro Logic II technology that creates a discrete 6.1 and 7.1

sound field from matrix surround or two-channel stereo sources in systems configured for surround back

speakers. Both Movie and Music versions of Pro Logic IIx are available.

Logic 7 Cinema

Logic 7 Music

Logic 7 Enhance

Logic 7 is an advanced mode that extracts the maximum surround information from either surround-encoded

programs or conventional stereo material. When the system speaker configuration has been set for 6.1/7.1

operation, you may choose between either 7.1 or 5.1 versions of the Logic 7 modes, while only the 5.1 versions

are available for 5.1-channel systems. The Logic 7 C (or Cinema) mode should be used with any source that contains Dolby

Surround or similar matrix encoding. Logic 7 C delivers increased center channel intelligibility, and more accurate placement

of sounds with fades and pans that are much smoother and more realistic than with other decoding techniques.

The Logic 7 M or Music mode should be used with analog or PCM stereo sources. Logic 7 M enhances the listening

experience by presenting a wider front soundstage and greater rear ambience. Both Logic 7 modes also direct low-frequency

information to the subwoofer (if installed and configured) to deliver maximum bass impact. The Logic 7 E (or Enhance) mode,

available only when the 5.1 option is chosen, is an extension of the Logic 7 modes that is primarily used with musical

programs. Logic 7 adds additional bass enhancement which circulates low frequencies in the 40Hz to 120Hz range to the

front and surround speakers to deliver a less localized soundstage that appears broader and wider than when the subwoofer

is the sole source of bass energy. The CVR700 features 96kHz-capable Logic 7 processing, for improved imaging and

accuracy when used with 96kHz source materials.

DTS Neo:6 Cinema

DTS Neo:6 Music

These two modes are available with analog sources playing to create a three-channel, five-channel or

six-channel surround presentation from matrix-encoded or stereo sources. Select the Cinema version of Neo:6

when a program with matrix surround encoding is present. Select the Music version of Neo:6 for optimal

processing when a nonencoded, two-channel stereo program is being played.

Theater

The Theater mode creates a sound field that resembles the acoustic feeling of a standard live-performance theater.

The two Hall modes create sound fields that resemble a small- (Hall 1) or medium-sized (Hall 2) concert hall.

Hall 1, Hall 2

5-Channel Stereo

7-Channel Stereo

These modes take advantage of multiple speakers to place a stereo signal at both the front and back of a room.

They place the same signal at the front-left and surround-left, and front-right and surround-right speakers.

The center channel is fed a summed mono mix of the in-phase material of the left and right channels.

Surround

Off (Stereo)

This mode turns off all surround processing and presents the pure left- and right-channel presentation of

two-channel stereo programs.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

feed to the CVR700 or to select between

Dolby Digital or DTS. It is also possible

for the type of signal feed to change dur-

inh the course of a DVD’s playback. In

some cases, the previews or special

material will be recorded in 2.0 audio,

while the main feature is available in 5.1

audio. The CVR700 will automatically

sense changes to the bitstream and chan-

nel count and reflect them in these indi-

cators.

SURROUNDmenu. See page 47 for

information on using the menus to set

this option.

cessing modes such as Logic 7, to

greatly enhance downloaded or

streaming audio playback.

MP3 and WMA Compressed

Audio Playback

IMPORTANT NOTES ON DIGITAL

PLAYBACK:

The CVR700 is one of the few audio/

video components equipped with onboard

decoding of the MP3 and WMA audio

formats used by computers and portable

audio devices. By offering MP3 and WMA

decoding, the CVR700 is able to deliver

precise conversion of the digital signals

to an analog output, along with the bene-

fits of listening to the MP3 or WMA

audio through the CVR700’s high-power

amplifier and the speakers from your sur-

round system, rather than the smaller

speakers and low-powered amplifiers

typically used with computers.

• When the digital playback source is

stopped, or in a pause, fast forward or

search mode, digital audio data will

momentarily stop, and the channel

position letters inside the Speaker/

Channel Input Indicators Fwill

flash. This is normal and does not indi-

cate a problem with either the CVR700

or the source machine. The CVR700

will return to digital playback as soon

as the data is available.

The letters used by the Speaker/

Channel Input Indicators Falso flash

to indicate when a bitstream has been

interrupted. This will happen when a digi-

tal input source is selected before the

playback starts, or when a digital source

such as a DVD is paused. The flashing

indicators remind you that the playback

has stopped due to the absence of a digi-

tal signal and not through any fault of the

CVR700. This is normal, and the digital

playback will resume once the playback

is started again.

• Some source devices, particularly cable

set-top boxes, will switch back and

forth between digital and analog audio

outputs, depending on the channel

being watched. To avoid losing sound

with this type of product, it is recom-

mended that you connect both the digi-

tal and analog audio outputs of the

source to the CVR700, with the digital

audio input set as the default following

the steps shown on page 46. If the dig-

ital data stream is interrupted and the

sound mutes, you will need to manually

switch to the analog audio input by

To take advantage of the CVR700’s MP3

and WMA capabilities, simply insert a

disc containing MP3 or WMA audio files

into the changer drawer. When the digital

signal is available, the Lower Display

Line Ewill indicate that an MP3 or

WMA bitstream is present, and the audio

will begin playing.

When a 6.1-channel mode, such as Dolby

Digital EX, is detected, a line will appear

connecting the SBL and SBR channels to

reflect that the same signal is being out-

putted through both back surround chan-

nels. The line will disappear when a 7.1-

channel mode, such as Logic 7, is in use.

At this time, there are no 7.1-channel dig-

ital formats available.

NOTES:

• The CVR700 is only capable of playing

signals in the MP3 (MPEG 1/Layer 3)

format, or in the Windows Media

Audio (WMA) format compatible with

Windows Media player version 9 or

greater. It is not compatible with other

computer audio codecs.

pressing the Audio Input Button

⁄ ¤

and using the

Navigation Buttons q

select the analog audio input for the

current source. Press the Set Button

Night Mode

A special feature of Dolby Digital is the

Night mode, which enables specially

encoded Dolby Digital input sources to be

played back with full digital intelligibility

while reducing the minimum peak level

by 1/4 to 1/3. This prevents abruptly

loud transitions from disturbing others,

without reducing the impact of the digital

source. The Night mode is available only

when Dolby Digital signals with special

data are being played.

to enter your selection and

• Due to the wide variation in MP3 and

WMA formats and encoding speeds,

it is possible that the CVR700 may not

be compatible with all MP3 or WMA

files. Some may produce unacceptable

results or may not be decoded. This is

not a fault of either the computer or

the CVR700, but rather a by-product of

return to normal operation. When

switching to a digital channel, follow

the same procedure, except select the

appropriate digital audio input for the

source. This switching is not a fault of

either the CVR700 or the cable box,

as it is caused by the use of different

audio technologies on different chan-

nels by the cable company or program

supplier.

the unpredictable nature of compressed

audio playback.

The Night mode may be engaged when a

Dolby Digital DVD is playing by pressing

• Even when your computer does not

• Although the CVR700 will decode virtu-

ally all current DVD movies, CDs and

HDTV sources, it may not be compatible

have a digital output that is compatible

with the CVR700, you may connect the

analog audio output available on virtu-

ally all computers to one of the analog

audio inputs using an optional adaptor

cable that converts the stereo mini

plug commonly used for computer

audio connections to the left/right RCA

jacks used on the CVR700. Connecting

your computer to the CVR700 will

the Night Mode Button Z

the remote. Next, press the

⁄ ¤

with future digital sources

Navigation Button q

to select

either the middle range or full compres-

• When a digital source is playing, you

may not be able to select some of the

analog surround modes such as Dolby

Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Hall,

Theater or Logic 7.

sion versions of the Night mode. To turn

⁄ ¤

the Night mode off, press the

Navigation Button q

until the

message in the lower third of the video

display and in the Lower Display Line

Ereads NIGHTMODEOFF.

• When a Dolby Digital or DTS

source is playing, it is not possible

to make an analog recording using

the Digital Recorder Analog

Audio/Video Outputs ‚ or the

enable you to take advantage of the

high-quality audio reproduction possi-

ble with a home theater system, as

well as enable the use of surround pro-

The Night mode may also be selected to

always be on at either level of compres-

sion using the options in the DOLBY

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VCR Analog Audio/Video Outputs

¤. However, the digital signals will be

passed through to the Digital Audio

Outputs ¶bg.

MANUALTUNEDwill neverthe-

less appear in the Lower Display

Line E.

Stations Selector Button 8t

on the front panel or remote.

When using the front-panel controls,

remember to first press the Tuning

Mode Selector 6to select Preset

as the function of the Tuning/Preset

Buttons 8.

4. Stations may also be tuned directly in

either the automatic or manual mode.

To enter a station’s frequency directly,

first select the AM or FM band as

Tuner Operation

The CVR700’s tuner is capable of tuning

AM, FM and FM Stereo broadcast sta-

tions. Stations may be tuned manually,

or they may be stored as favorite station

presets and recalled from a 30-position

memory.

desired be pressing the Tuner Button

Recording

. Next, press the Direct

Button l

. Within 5 seconds of

In normal operation, the audio or video

source selected for listening through the

CVR700 is sent to the record outputs.

This means that any program you are

watching or listening to may be recorded

simply by placing machines connected

to the Digital Recorder Analog Audio/

Video Outputs ‚ or VCR Analog

Audio/Video Outputs ¤ in the

record mode.

when DIRECTINscrolls in the

Lower Display Line E, enter the

station frequency by pressing the

Station Selection

Numeric Keys l

. If you press

1. Press the Tuner Button d

an incorrect button while entering a

direct frequency, press the Exit/

the remote to select the tuner as an

input. The tuner may be selected from

the front panel by turning the Source

Selector quntil the tuner is active.

Cancel Button r

to start over.

Preset Tuning

2. Press the Tuner Button d

Using the remote, up to 30 stations may

be stored in the CVR700’s memory for

easy recall using the front-panel controls

or the remote.

When a digital audio recorder is connected

to the Digital Audio Outputs bg7,

you are able to record the digital signal

using a CD-R, MiniDisc or other digital

recording system.

Tuner Band Selector !to switch

between AM and FM so that the

desired frequency band is selected.

3. When using the front-panel controls,

the Tuning Mode Button 6is

To enter a station into the memory, first

tune the station using the steps outlined

above. Then:

NOTES:

used to select the function of the

Tuning/Preset Up/Down Buttons

8. Press the Tuning Mode Button

6to toggle between TUNINGand

PRESET. Press the Tuning Mode

• The digital outputs are active only

when a digital signal is present, and

they do not convert an analog input to

a digital signal, or change the format

of the digital signal. In addition, the

digital recorder must be compatible

with the output signal. For example,

the PCM digital input from a CD

player may be recorded on a CD-R

or MiniDisc, but Dolby Digital or

DTS signals may not.

1. Press the Memory Button @k

; two underlines will flash in the

Upper Display Line H.

2. Within 5 seconds, press the Numeric

Selector o

on the remotes to

Keys l

corresponding to the

select manual or automatic tuning.

memory location where you wish to

store this station’s frequency. The pre-

set number will appear in the Upper

Display Line H.

In either mode, each press of the

Tuning Selectors 8vf

will increase or decrease the fre-

quency by one increment. When the

Tuning Mode Selector o has

3. Press the Memory Button @k

again to store the preset station.

• Please obey the copyright restrictions

on any material you copy. Unauthorized

duplication of copyrighted materials is

prohibited by law.

been pressed so that AUTOTUNE

appears in the Lower Display Line

E, pressing and holding the Tuning

4. Repeat the process after tuning any

additional stations to be preset.

Selectors 8vf

will

NOTE: By its nature, plasma display

devices tend to interfere with AM radio

reception. In any event, as mentioned

elsewhere in this manual, it is preferable

to leave the screen off to avoid burn-in

when no video signal is present and the

startup screen may be displayed for a

long time. Therefore, when the AM tuner

band is selected as the source, the CVPD50

will automatically enter the standby mode.

To wake it, simply select any other source

(including the FM tuner band).

cause the tuner to scan for the next

higher or lower frequency with an

acceptable signal. Release the button,

and AUTOTUNEDwill appear in

the Lower Display Line Eto indi-

cate that a station has been tuned.

AUTOSTTUNEDwill appear in

the Lower Display Line Efor FM

stereo stations.

Output Level Trim Adjustment

Normal output level adjustment for the

CVR700 is established using the test tone,

as outlined on pages 50–52. In some

cases, however, it may be desirable to

adjust the output levels using program

material such as a test disc, or a selection

you are familiar with. Additionally, the

output level for the subwoofer can only

be adjusted using this procedure.

When the Tuning Mode Selector

has been pressed so that

MANUALTUNEappears in the

Lower Display Line E, pressing

and holding the Tuning Selectors

To adjust the output levels using program

material, first set the reference volume for

the front left and front right channels

Recalling Preset Stations

• To manually select a station previously

entered in the preset memory, press

8vf

will cause the

using the Volume Control Óu

the Numeric Keys l

for the

tuner to scan up or down through

all frequencies, stopping when you

release the button, even if no accept-

able signal is present. The message

If you are using a disc with test signals

or an external signal generator as the

source used when the output levels are

desired station’s memory location.

• To manually scroll through the list of

preset stations, press the Preset

being trimmed, you may use the remote

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

as an SPL meter to guide you to the cor-

rect level settings. To use the EzSet

remote as an SPL meter, follow the

instructions on page 51.

Once the SPEAKER LEVELS

submenu appears on your video screen,

⁄ ¤

use the

Navigation Controls

›

to move the on-screen cursor

so that it is next to the TESTTONE

Once the reference level has been set,

‹ ›

line. Press the

Navigation Controls

press the Level Button p

and

so that OFFis highlighted.

SPLEVELFL0will appear in the

Lower Display Line Ewith FL0

flashing. To change the level, first press

This will turn off the test tone and allow

you to use your external test disc or other

source material as the reference. Then,

the Set Button s

to select the

⁄ ¤

use the

Navigation Controls

, and then use the

front left (FL) channel

to select the channels to be

⁄ ¤

Navigation Controls q

adjusted. At each channel position, use

raise or lower the level. DO NOT use the

volume control, as this will alter the

reference setting.

‹ ›

the

Navigation Controls q

to change the output level. Remember, the

goal is to have the output level at each

channel be equal when heard at the lis-

tening position.

Once the change has been made, press

the Set Button k

and then press

⁄ ¤

the

Navigation Control q

If you wish to reset all the levels to their

to select the next output-channel location

that you wish to adjust. To adjust the

⁄ ¤

original factory default of 0dB offset,

⁄ ¤

press the

Navigation Controls

subwoofer level, press the

so that the on-screen cursor is

Navigation Control q

until

next to the RESETline and press the

SPLEVELSUB0appears in the

Lower Display Line E.

Set Button s . After the levels are

reset, resume the procedure outlined

above to reset the levels to the desired

settings. When all adjustments are done,

scroll BACKTOMASTERMENU

Repeat the procedure as needed until all

channels requiring adjustment have been

set. When all adjustments have been

made and no further adjustments are

made for 5 seconds, the CVR700 will

return to normal operation.

and then press the Set Button s

if you wish to go back to the main menu

to make other adjustments. If you have

no other adjustments to make, press the

The channel output for any input may

also be adjusted using the on-screen

menu system. First, set the volume to

a comfortable listening level using the

OSD Button D

to exit the menu

system.

NOTE: Output levels may be separately

trimmed for each surround mode. If you

wish to have different trim levels for a spe-

cific mode, select that mode and then fol-

low the instructions shown above.

Volume Control Óu

. Then, press

the OSD Button D

to bring up the

MASTERMENU(Fig. 1). Use the

⁄ ¤

Navigation Controls q

scroll down to the SPEAKERSline,

Memory Backup

and press the Set Button s to

select it. The confirmation menu (Figure

18) will appear, and you should scroll

down to the YESline and select it. This

will cause the SPEAKERSmenu

(Figure 19) to be displayed. Scroll down

to the LEVELSline and select it,

which will bring up the SPEAKER

LEVELSsubmenu (Figure 27).

This product is equipped with a memory

backup system that preserves the system

configuration information and tuner pre-

sets if the unit is accidentally unplugged

or subjected to a power outage. This

memory will last virtually indefinitely.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPTICAL DISC CHANGER PLAYBACK BASICS

the quality of the disc. On some occa-

sions, it is possible that these discs may

not play on the CVR700. This does not

indicate any problem with the CVR700.

time elapsed or remaining for a title or

chapter (see Figure 41).

Loading Discs

To load discs in the CVR700, first turn the

CVR700 on by pressing the Main Power

On/Off Switch

• The CVR700 will only play discs that

are coded for Region 1 or discs that are

open to being played in all regions.

Discs that contain any other Region

Code will not play.

Set the CVR700 to the DVD source input

either by slowly rotating the Source

Selector &until it engages in the

notch and DVDappears in the

Figure 41

ATitle Number: The first item in the

Status Bar is the current Title Number.

When this number is highlighted, you

may use the Numeric Keys l

enter the number of the desired title, and

Information Display Ô, or by pressing

• Both 5-inch (12cm) and 3-inch (8cm)

discs may be used.

the DVD Input Selector d

Press the Eject Button 6, and you

will be prompted to select a disc number

by a message in the Lower Display

Line E. You must enter a number, either

by pressing one of the front-panel Disc

Selectors 5, or by entering a number

between 1 and 5 using the Numeric

• When loading CD audio discs, load the

discs with the label side up.

press the Set Button I to switch

to that title. Some discs may prohibit this

action during certain titles, such as the

warnings against copying the disc. Note

that when the DVD Audio setting in the

DVDSETUPmenu (Figure 31) has

been set to ON, this item will be the

Group number. When the DVD Audio set-

ting has been set to OFF, the disc will

be recognized as a DVD-Video disc, and

this item will be the title number.

•

When loading DVD discs with printed

labels, load them label side up.

• Some DVD discs are double-sided.

The title information for these will be

printed on the inner ring of the disc,

very close to the center hole. The title

for the side you wish to play should

be facing up.

Keys l

. If you don't enter a num-

ber, the CVR700 will cancel the command.

The Disc Indicator Dcorresponding to

the tray number you selected will flash.

The door will drop forward and the maga-

zine tray corresponding to the disc posi-

tion you have selected will slide forward.

Note that the door will open only enough

to allow the correct tray to slide forward,

so that the door opens wider for the higher

numbered trays located further down.

This is perfectly normal.

Once a disc is properly loaded, press the

Eject Button 6to close the disc drawer.

After the drawer closes, you will need to

instruct the CVR700 to play the disc by

BChapter Number: The second item is

the current Chapter Number. When this

number is highlighted, you may use the

Numeric Keys l

number of the desired chapter, and press

pressing the Play Button !e

to enter the

The Lower Display Line Ewill prompt

you for a disc number. You may enter

the number of any loaded disc either by

pressing its corresponding Disc Selector

5or by using the Numeric Keys

the Set Button I to switch to that

Hold the disc by the edge, and gently

place it into the disc drawer, making sure

the disc is properly seated in the tray’s

insert. If the disc is not correctly centered,

you may damage both the disc and the

player when the drawer closes. When

loading discs, please note the following:

chapter. Some discs may prohibit this

action during certain titles, such as the

warnings against copying the disc. Note

that when the DVD Audio setting in the

DVDSETUPmenu (Figure 31) has

been set to ON, this item will be the

Track number. When the DVD Audio set-

ting has been set to OFF, the disc will

be recognized as a DVD-Video disc, and

this item will be the chapter number.

. If you don't select a disc, the

CVR700 will load the last disc played.

However, if no other discs are loaded and

you press the Play Button !e

instead of the Eject Button 6to close

the disc drawer, the CVR700 will close

the door and begin play of the disc you

just loaded.

• The CVR700 will play discs with the

following logos, as well as most WMA

and JPEG discs. It will play Kodak

Picture CDs, but not Photo CDs. DO

NOT attempt to play another type

of disc.

You will briefly see LOADINGin the

CElapsed Time: The third item is the

Elapsed Time of the current chapter. It is

not possible to display other time vari-

ables. When this item is highlighted, you

may take advantage of the Time Search

feature, which allows you to begin play-

back from a specified point on the disc.

Information Display

to alert you to

the fact that the unit is determining the

type of disc (DVD, DVD-Audio, CD, VCD,

JPEG, WMA or MP3) and is reading the

data for track, chapter, title and other

information about the disc.

Use the Numeric Keys l

the hour/minute/second indication of the

to enter

Status Bar

Once the disc’s data has been read, the

type of disc will be displayed by the

Disc-Type Indicator Aand the disc

will begin playing. The disc’s track timing

information and other relevant data will

appear in the Upper Display Line H.

time at which you wish play to begin, fol-

lowed by the Set Button I

Playback from that point will begin imme-

diately. (See Figure 42).

• The CVR700 will play discs in the NTSC

and PAL video formats.

While a disc is playing, you may access

the Status Bar by pressing the Status

Figure 42

• Playback capability for CD-RW, DVD-RW

or DVD+RW discs will vary according to

Button

to view information on

DAudio: The fourth item is the Audio

track currently in use. The audio track is

the current title and chapter, to change

the current title or chapter, or to view

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

denoted by a number preceding it to indi-

cate its order of availability. Next, the

language is displayed, such as ENG for

English or SPA for Spanish. Following this

is the bitstream type, which may be PCM

for a two-channel format; or DTS or the

Dolby logo for one of those formats. Next

to the format is an icon that reflects the

number and location of the channels in

the bitstream. The icon is in the shape of

a square that represents a listening room,

with the front channels at the top. A

small block will appear at the location of

each channel encoded in the bitstream,

with only one block at each top corner for

a 2-channel format. Figure 41 depicts that

a Dolby Digital 5.1-channel bitstream has

been detected. Note that while the disc

is playing, a 0 or 1 may also appear to

the right of the icon to indicate whether

an LFE channel is present (0 if no LFE

channel is present or “1” if the LFE chan-

nel is detected). If the disc has more than

one audio track; such as 2.0-channel

PCM, 5.1-channel Dolby Digital or a

NOTES:

• The full Status Bar is only available

while a disc is playing. If you press the

Status Bar in Stop mode, an abbreviated

Status Bar will appear (see Figure 43)

that only indicates the current title, and

does not permit you to change the title

number.

Figure 46

Status banners may also appear on

screen briefly to display messages such

as “Disc Loading”, “Play”, “Stop”, “Pause”,

“Feature Not Available” or other status

messages. These messages are generated

by the DVD changer section of the CVR700,

and are separate from banner messages

generated by the CVPD50 screen.

Figure 43

Selecting a Disc For Playback

There are several methods for playing

a loaded disc in the CVR700:

• If you press the Audio Button U

, the Subtitle Button V

the Angle Button E

the Status Bar being on screen, the

without

• Turn on the CVR700 by pressing the

Main Power On/Off Button 1.

segment of the Status Bar relating to

the function you selected will appear

on screen by itself, and you will be

able to change the setting for that

function by continuing to press the

corresponding button. (See examples

of the Subtitle segment in Figures 44

and 45.)

director's commentary; you may cycle

through these tracks while the disc is

playing by repeatedly pressing the Audio

•

Any discs already loaded in the

changer will be indicated by the Disc

Indicators D. The indicator for the

last disc played will be flashing. Note

that the Upper Display Line Hwill

indicate that the unit is in Stop mode,

even when no discs are loaded. Check

for lit Disc Indicators Dto deter-

mine whether any discs are available

for play. Play will not begin automati-

cally. If you press the Play Button

Button U

ESubtitle: The fifth item is the current

Subtitle status. If the disc contains subti-

tles, you may cycle through the available

languages while the disc is playing by

repeatedly pressing the Subtitle Button

Figure 44

. In addition to displaying the

available languages, the Subtitle feature

may be set to Off by continuing to press

the button.

; you will be prompted on

Figure 45

the Lower Display Line Eto enter

the number of the disc you wish to

play. If you enter a disc number using

the Numeric Keys l

Disc Selectors S

play that disc. If you do nothing, the

CVR700 will play the last selected disc,

whose Disc Indicator Dwill be

flashing.

A different Status Bar is displayed on

screen when a CD is playing (see Fig. 46).

This Status Bar only contains two items:

the current Track number followed by the

total number of tracks on the disc and the

elapsed time. When the Track number is

highlighted, you may use the Numeric

Keys l

a track you wish to skip to. The Time

Search function is also available for CDs.

Use the Numeric Keys l

FAngle: The sixth item is the current

camera angle. This feature is only avail-

able on certain DVD discs; check the DVD

jacket to determine whether this feature

is available on the disc. You may change

the angle setting at any time by repeatedly

¹⁴or the

, the CVR700 will

pressing the Angle Button E

to enter the number of

However, the on-screen view will only

change during portions of the disc where

the multi-angle feature has been activated.

At the beginning of a passage where

multiple camera angles are available, a

Status Banner will appear indicating

“Angle Area In”. At any time after this

message appears, press the Angle

• If you wish to play a different disc,

you may skip to the next numbered

disc by pressing the Disc Skip Button

to enter

the hour/minute/second indication of

the time at which you wish play to begin,

followed by the Set Button I

Playback from that point will begin

. If you wish to skip to a differ-

ent disc, press the Disc Direct Button

, and then enter the desired

disc number using the Numeric Keys

. If there is no disc in that

immediately.

Button E

to view the program

location, the CVR700 will do nothing.

using a different camera angle. Another

Status Banner with the message "Angle

Area Out" will appear at the end of the

passage. After this second banner

JBL On Screen Library

With five disc positions available, it is

easy to forget the location of a desired

disc. Rather than having to scan through

all five positions, the CVR700 offers the

appears, pressing the Angle Button

will change the setting, but the

on-screen image will not change.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

JBL On Screen Library, which conveniently

displays the loaded discs without your

having to look at each disc individually.

When play is stopped, you may use the

JBL On Screen Library feature. Press the

and process the digital audio streams

during these modes. However, audio will

be heard during fast-play of audio CDs

(slow-play is not available for CDs).

Stop Button #M

press the Play Button !e

the disc will resume playing from the

point at which it was stopped. Resume

mode is not preserved if you turn off

the CVR700, change to another disc, or

select another source.

once. If you

• The front-panel Skip/Search Buttons

8function slightly differently than the

remote buttons. When the disc changer

is the source, press and release these

buttons to move (skip) either backward

(left button) or forward (right button)

through the tracks on a DVD-Audio, CD

or VCD disc or the chapters on a DVD-

Video disc. Press and hold either but-

ton for at least 1 second to search

either backward (left button) or forward

(right button) the current track or chap-

ter at 2x speed. Press and hold again

and release to increase the scan speed

to 4x. Repeat this procedure while in

scan mode to cycle through these scan

speeds: 2x, 4x, 16x, 100x, 2x and so

forth. Press and release the button

while scanning to skip tracks or chap-

ters. To stop searching, you must press

the Play Button !, the Stop Button

#or the other Search Button 8.

OSL Button d

, and the CVR700

will read and identify all loaded discs, a

process which may take several minutes,

but which only needs to be performed

once. A thumbnail for each disc position

will appear on screen, including a thumb-

nail image representative of the disc

materials, if one exists on the disc, or a

logo indicating the disc type; the disc’s

title, if it is on the disc; and the disc

type (see Figure 47). Both MP3 and

WMA discs will cause an icon called

COMPRESSEDto appear. When the

disc is selected, its compressed-audio

type will be displayed in the usual

• Press the Stop Button #M

twice (once for CDs and VCDs) to stop

playback and enter Stop mode. If you

press the Play Button !e

with the disc in Stop mode, play will

begin from the beginning of the disc,

and you will also be prompted to select

another disc by entering its number.

• To move forward or backward through

the tracks on a CD, VCD or DVD-Audio

disc, or through the chapters on a DVD-

Video disc, or through the still images

on a JPEG disc, press the Track Skip

Forward/Reverse Buttons 8J

on-screen information display for the

disc contents. Use the ⁄/¤/‹/›

. This will not work on MP3

Navigation Controls q

highlight the desired disc, and press the

Set Button I to select it for

and WMA discs, which are navigated

using a special screen described on

page 72.

immediate playback. Select the Exit

Library icon if you wish to leave the

library display without selecting a disc.

• To scan quickly forward or backward

within a track or chapter on a CD,

DVD, VCD, WMA or MP3 disc, press

the Forward/Reverse Search

• To advance frame by frame while a

DVD-Video disc is playing, press the

Pause Button @M

once, and

then each subsequent press of the

Buttons Jh

. Each press will

Pause Button @M will step

increase the scan speed by one step,

cycling through the available scan

speeds for each disc type (see below).

If you press the opposite-direction

search button while in Search mode,

the CVR700 will begin to scan in the

opposite direction. Press the Play

one frame forward through the pro-

gram. Reverse step is not available.

Press the Play Button !e

to resume normal play.

• While a disc is stopped, a Stop icon

(

) will appear on the left side of the

Figure 47

Upper Display Line H. During play-

back, a Play icon (›) will appear, and

when the disc is paused, a Pause icon

( ) will appear. During Search modes,

the Play icon will remain in the display,

and the Lower Display Line Ewill

indicate that the disc is being scanned

either forward or in reverse.

Button !e

to stop scanning.

For DVD-Audio and DVD-Video playback,

there are four forward and reverse search

speeds. Each press of the Forward/

Reverse Search Buttons 8Lf

Transport Controls – Playing a

Disc

Basic playback using the CVR700 involves

functions similar to those you may be

familiar with for conventional CD players

or changers:

will cycle to the next speed in

27 29

the following order: 2x, 16x, 64x, 200x.

For CD and VCD playback, there are three

forward and reverse search speeds: 2x,

4x, 8x.

• Press the Play Button !e

• During normal play, the Upper

Display Line Hwill indicate the

track number and elapsed time for

CDs; the group and track numbers and

elapsed time of the track for DVD-

Audio discs; the title and chapter num-

bers and elapsed time of the chapter

for DVD-Video discs; and the WMA,

MP3 or JPG file number (and elapsed

time for audio files).

You will be prompted to select a disc

number; use the Disc Selectors 5or

For MP3 and WMA compressed-audio-

file playback, there are four forward and

reverse search speeds: 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x.

the Numeric Keys l

• To momentarily pause playback (and

freeze the current picture frame on a

DVD), press the Pause Button @M

• For DVD-Video discs only, you may play

the program material in forward or

reverse slow motion. Press the Slow

Play Forward/Reverse Controls

. To resume playback, press the

Play Button !e

• The CVR700 also provides a Resume

mode that pauses playback, but does

not freeze a DVD's current picture

frame. Resume mode is not available

for CDs or VCDs. To enter Resume

mode for any other disc type, press the

to cycle through the three

Random Play

available speeds: 1/2x, 1/4x, 1/8x.

The CVR700 allows you to randomly play

the tracks on an audio CD or a VCD, or

MP3 or WMA compressed audio files.

Random playback is not available for

NOTE: There will be no audio playback

during forward or reverse fast- or slow-

play of DVDs, as it isn't possible to decode

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DVD-Audio, DVD-Video or JPEG discs.

When available, Simply press the

Random Button zto enter Random

mode (a banner will appear on screen),

and again to exit Random mode.

In Stop mode, only the Repeat All

Tracks and Repeat All Discs modes

are available.

VCDs: The conventional Repeat modes

are only available in Stop mode. As with

audio CDs, only the Repeat All Tracks and

Repeat All Discs modes are available.

Audio CDs: You may enter or exit

Random mode either while the disc is

playing, or after play has been stopped by

MP3 and WMA discs: The conventional

Repeat modes are available in both Play

and Stop modes. Unlike other disc types,

the folders and files on a compressed-

audio disc are displayed on screen and

may be navigated (see page 72). Thus, it

is possible to program Repeat One File

mode while the disc is stopped. The other

available repeat modes are Repeat All

Files (in a folder), Repeat Disc and

Repeat Off.

pressing the Stop Button #w

twice.

VCDs: Random mode is only available in

Stop mode, after play has been stopped

by pressing the Stop Button #w

twice.

MP3 and WMA discs: You may enter or

exit Random mode either while the disc

is playing, or after play has been stopped

by pressing the Stop Button #w

twice.

The Repeat Indicators Cwill light to

indicate the current Repeat mode.

The Random Indicator Cwill light

when the CVR700 is in Random mode.

Repeat A-B

Repeat Play

The Repeat A-B function allows you to

select any portion of a disc (except for

VCD, MP3 and WMA discs) and have it

repeat until play is stopped.

The CVR700 offers several repeat options

that allow for unattended playback, even

on a continuous basis. There are two basic

types of Repeat modes: conventional

Repeat, which allows you to repeat discs

and their existing subdivisions; and

Repeat A-B, in which a passage you

select is repeated. The available Repeat

modes will vary depending on the type

of disc.

While the disc is playing, when the

beginning of the desired passage is

reached, press the Repeat A-B Button

R once. A banner with the message

“A to B Repeat Set A” will appear on

screen momentarily. When the end of the

desired passage is reached, press the

Repeat A-B Button R once more. The

message “A to B Repeat On” will appear

briefly. The passage will continue to play

repeatedly until you manually stop play,

or press the Repeat A-B Button R

once again so that the message “A to B

Repeat Off” is displayed on screen.

The conventional Repeat modes are

accessed by repeatedly pressing the

Repeat Button `to cycle through the

available modes or exit Repeat mode.

DVDs: The conventional Repeat modes

are only available while the disc is play-

ing. Each press of the Repeat Button

`will cycle through the Chapter

Repeat On, Title Repeat On and Repeat

Off modes.

NOTE: The A-B Repeat range may cover

several titles or chapters on a DVD, as

long as the DVD disc’s control program

does not force the CVR700 to return to a

DVD menu in between.

Audio CDs: The available conventional

Repeat modes vary depending on whether

the disc is in Play mode or Stop mode.

While a disc is playing, each press of the

Repeat Button `will cycle through

the Repeat One Track, Repeat All Tracks,

Repeat All Discs and Repeat Off settings,

as displayed on screen in a banner and

on the front panel. The selected Track or

disc will be repeatedly played until play

is stopped, or the Repeat mode is exited.

In Repeat All Discs mode, if the CVR700

detects a DVD in a succeeding tray, it

will play it, but it will automatically end

Repeat mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DVD PLAYBACK

NOTES ON DVD-AUDIO DISCS:

• Some DVD-Audio discs contain two

menus, one used when the disc is

played on a DVD-Audio player, and a

DVD-Video menu used on older players

that do not recognize the DVD-Audio

format. You may view the DVD-Video

menu by turning off the CVR700’s DVD-

Audio capability temporarily, using the

DVD Setup menu (see Figure 31). You

may wish to do this in order to access

certain audio surround tracks, such as

Dolby Digital 5.1 or PCM on the disc.

When you have finished exploring the

DVD-Video capabilities of the disc,

remember to restore the CVR700’s

DVD-Audio capability.

Important Notes on DVD

Playback

Using a DVD’s Menu

One of the unique features of the DVD

system is that it offers a producer the

opportunity to include a wide range of

features on a disc, including multiple-

language tracks; subtitles in a variety of

languages; special information such as

movie trailers and cast information; as

well as other customized information. In

addition, producers may divide a movie or

program into chapters that allow for quick

access to specific parts of the program.

These chapters may be accompanied by

thumbnail pictures of a scene from the

specific chapter to help you select the

desired spot on the disc.

The sensitive CVPD50 plasma display

screen is vulnerable to “burn-in” if any

still image remains on screen for any

length of time. It doesn’t take very long

for an image to burn in, and it is impor-

tant to avoid leaving certain displays on

screen for more than a few minutes, as

“burn-in” cannot be repaired, and will not

be covered by your warranty. Therefore,

DO NOT leave DVD menu screens on dis-

play for more than a brief period of time

unless they contain movement. Either

begin play of the movie, or turn off the

system (especially the screen) after 5

minutes.

When a disc is playing, press the Disc

• Some DVD-Audio discs do not permit

you to access the disc menu using the

The CVR700 is capable of all the features

and options covered by the DVD standards.

However, it is up to the producer of a

DVD disc to decide which of those fea-

tures and functions are available on any

given disc. For that reason, not all discs

will function identically, and some discs

will not have many of the features of the

DVD system. For example, most current

DVD discs do not take advantage of the

multiple-angle feature. When you press

a button and the player displays the

“Feature Not Available” message, this is

an indication that the disc has not been

programmed for that feature, or that the

CVR700 is not capable of executing that

command on that disc in the current

mode.

Menu Button

to pause the

playback and display the disc’s menu. As

there are no hard rules about style and

content for DVD menus, the way they

appear on the screen and the information

they contain will vary from one disc to

another. However, the following general

rules apply to most menus:

Menu Button

. However,

pressing the Title Button yor the

Audio Button U may provide menu

access. In addition, you may simply

place the disc in Stop mode and play

the tracks in order.

Zoom Feature

• The first menu that appears is the Main

Menu, and you may move through the

options with the Navigation ⁄¤‹›

The CVR700’s advanced digital video pro-

cessing circuits include a Zoom feature

that allows you to enlarge the image for

closer examination of a particular part of

the picture. Four steps of enlargement are

available.

Buttons q

, as the disc’s

programming allows. The option selected

will typically be highlighted in a certain

color or inside an outline box.

• To select a highlighted option, which

may either play a portion of the disc or

move to a submenu, press the Set

• To use the Zoom feature, press the

Zoom Button

while a disc is

playing or paused. Each press of the

button will increase the zoom-in effect.

When you have zoomed through all

four steps, the picture will return to

normal size.

In addition, it is common for the produc-

ers of DVD discs to block the use of cer-

tain functions during only some parts of a

disc. For example, many discs prohibit the

use of fast-play buttons or prohibit access

to the Chapter Menu display during the

playback of copyright notices, studio

logos, movie credits or trailers. The

Button s

or Play Button

• On some discs, when you select the

DVD menu during the playback of a

movie, the disc will return to the point

in the program where the menu was

selected by offering a “Play Movie”

• When in any of the Zoom modes, you

may use the Navigation ⁄¤‹›

Buttons q

to navigate

option. Press the Set Button s

around the frame.

appearance of the “Feature Not

or Play Button

to resume

Available” message, or the inability of

certain features to operate when the disc

itself has prohibited them, does not indi-

cate a problem with the CVR700, as these

features are outside of the unit’s control.

• Some discs are created in a way that

prevents the Zoom feature from operat-

ing. In addition, the Zoom feature will

not operate on disc menus and may not

operate on subtitles.

play. However, not all discs offer this

feature, and selecting the menu while

playing a movie may mean that you will

either have to go back to the beginning

of the program or the start of a chapter.

This feature is out of the control of the

CVR700, as it is set by the disc’s inter-

nal programming.

• The Zoom function is not available for

VCD or JPEG discs.

• Some DTS discs contain incorrect digi-

tal flags that may initially cause the

CVR700 to display incorrect information

on the available surround modes or

other features. This is the fault of the

disc author and not the CVR700, which

will correctly process the disc’s bit-

stream once it has been detected and

identified.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD PLAYBACK

The Time Search function enables you to

begin play at a specific time point on the

Audio CD Playback Features

When playing audio CDs, your DVD player

has the same features as a CD player,

including track skip, repeat play and

programmed playback, as described on

pages 68–69. You may also access these

functions directly using the remote

control.

disc. Press the Status Button x

to display the Status Bar. Use the ‹/›

Navigation Controls q

to high-

light the elapsed track time, then simply

enter the time from which you wish

play to begin using the Numeric Keys

, and then press the Set Button

to enter it. Play will begin imme-

Selecting a Track

diately from that point in the current

track.

During Stop, Resume or Play mode,

enter the track number directly with the

Numeric Keys

The track selected will be played at once.

on the remote.

Video Off Feature

During CD playback, the JBL logo screen

will remain on display. After a few min-

utes, the screen saver image should

begin automatically, as a moving image is

necessary to avoid “burn-in” of an image

on the sensitive CVPD50 plasma display.

Some users may wish to turn the video

display off if they find the visual display

distracting or unnecessary during audio

playback.

You can skip through tracks forward or

backward by pressing the Forward/

Reverse Skip Buttons 8Jh

In Stop mode, the Upper Display Line

Hwill show the number of tracks

recorded on a CD and the total time on

the disc.

During normal play the Upper Display

Line Hwill indicate the track number

and elapsed time. The Lower Display

Line Ewill indicate the currently selected

audio surround mode.

The CVPD50 screen may be placed in

Screen Standby mode by first making

sure the remote control is in Screen

mode by pressing the Screen Selector

CD Status Bar

While a CD is loaded, you may view its

Status Bar by pressing the Status Button

. Then press the Screen

Standby Button Y

to place the

screen in Standby mode. Press it again

to return the screen to normal viewing

mode. The front-panel displays on the

CVR700 will remain lit to remind you

that the system is on.

. If the CD is in Stop mode, the

Status Bar will display the total number

of tracks on the disc, and the total time

of the disc. If the CD is playing, the first

item shown will be the current track num-

ber, followed by a slash, and then the

total number of tracks on the disc. The

second item shown will be the elapsed

track time (see Figure 46).

To skip directly to a specific track, make

sure the remote control is in DVD mode

by pressing the DVD Input Selector

, then enter the number of the

track you wish to play using the Numeric

Keys . If the Status Bar is on

screen, you must press the Set Button

after the track number to enter

it. If the Status Bar is not on screen,

the CD will immediately skip to the track

you entered.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MP3/WMA PLAYBACK

The CVR700 is among those DVD players

that are able to play back discs recorded

with MP3 or WMA files. This means that

you may enjoy the latest music using discs

created in your computer through the

high-quality audio components in your

home theater system. As the way that

MP3 and WMA files are recorded on

discs differs from the way conventional

CD audio discs are structured, MP3/WMA

playback is slightly different from that of

standard CDs.

NOTES ON MP3 AND WMA

PLAYBACK

• During playback, the front-panel display

and the time indicator on the screen

above the list will show the elapsed

time of the track being played. Other

time display options are not available

with MP3/WMA playback.

Figure 50

To select a track, press the ⁄/¤

Navigation Controls q until the

desired track name is highlighted. If the

list of tracks is longer than will fit on the

screen, press the Page Down/Up

• The CVR700 is only compatible with

standard MP3- and WMA-encoded

discs. Other compressed audio formats

used for Internet audio downloads will

not play on the CVR700.

Important Note on MP3 Playback:

MP3 and WMA discs may contain 200

tracks or even more. To get the best

overview about all tracks on the disc and

their names and to select or program

them comfortably, use the on-screen dis-

play rather than the front-panel display.

The front-panel display will only show the

number and the elapsed time of the track

being played.

Buttons Jh

to jump through a

• Due to the differences in various ver-

sions of the MP3 and WMA formats,

and the many differences between the

CD-R machines used to record discs on

a computer, it is possible that some

discs may not play on the CVR700 even

though they will work on a computer.

This is normal and does not indicate

a fault with the unit.

list of the track numbers forward or back-

ward through the list.

To start play of the track selected on the

list, press the Set Button

Play Button .

During MP3/WMA playback, some of the

standard CD/DVD playback controls oper-

ate in their normal fashion:

Important Note on WMA Playback:

The supported bit-rate is between 32k

bits and 192k bits.

• When a multisession disc with both

standard CD audio and MP3 or WMA

content is in use, the CVR700 will play

only the CD audio sections of the disc.

Track numbers will be visible in the dis-

play, but the files will not be decoded.

• You may skip forward to the next track

on the disc by pressing the Skip

Forward Button 7h

MP3 or WMA Disc Playback

• You may skip back to the current or

previous track on the disc by pressing

After the disc is loaded and the tray

closed, the CVR700 will read the disc’s

table of contents (TOC). A listing of all

the directories on the disc will be dis-

played if the disc was made with several

directories (see Figure 48).

the Skip Reverse Button

• When a disc with multiple directories

is playing, only tracks from one directory

can be displayed and played at a time.

Select the desired directory and press

once or twice.

• Press the Pause Button

to momentarily stop playback. Press

the Play Button to

resume play. Press the Stop Button

twice to enter stop mode.

the Play Button

to start

the first track. To see and play tracks

from other directories, first you must

select that directory, then select the

track and press the Play Button

• You may search through tracks forward

or in reverse by pressing the appropri-

ate Search Buttons Lf

• You may play an MP3 or WMA disc in

random mode like a normal CD (see

page 68).

• Only stereo audio playback is available

for MP3 and WMA discs.

Figure 48

To select a directory (if any), press the

• The Repeat function may be accessed

during playback of an MP3 or WMA

disc.

⁄/¤

Navigation Controls

until the desired directory name is high-

lighted, then press the Set Button

The folder will expand, listing all of the

tracks within the directory, each preceded

by a logo to identify it as an MP3 file or

WMA file. (See Figures 49 and 50.)

Figure 49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Programmed Playback With

MP3 or WMA Discs

The CVR700 is capable of creating play-

lists of the files on a properly recorded

disc. To create a playback list for MP3

or WMA titles, follow the same steps as

for programming a playlist for any other

format disc as described on page 75.

JPEG Playback

The CVR700 is one of the few available

DVD players that is capable of recogniz-

ing JPEG still-image files and displaying

them. When a disc containing JPEG files

is loaded, the CD ROM Disc-Type

Indicator Awill light. The list of direc-

tories on the disc will appear, and may

be navigated in the same way as for a

compressed-audio disc. Use the ⁄/¤

Navigation Controls q

select a folder, and press the Set Button

to expand the folder and display

the tracks. JPEG files are listed with an

appropriate icon preceding the file name

(see Figure 51). Press the Play Button

to begin displaying the

images in the expanded folder. You may

set the amount of time each image

remains visible on screen using the DVD

Setup menu (see Figure 31).

Figure 51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VCD PLAYBACK

VCD, a format that predates DVD, is

based on a different compression format

than DVD and a recording method that is

similar to CD. Although the DVD has, for

the most part, replaced VCD as a format,

the CVR700 offers VCD playback so that

you may play your existing library of

VCD discs.

You may select the track number and

change it to skip to another track.

• Direct number entry without any VCD

menu shown on screen has no effect –

even when the Status Banner is on.

Using the Status Bar for VCD

Playback

When playing VCD discs it is possible to

• When PBC is on, the Disc Menu

Button j

will have the same

function as with DVDs, making the

player return to the latest disc menu.

When PBC is off, pressing the Disc

view the Status Bar. Press the Status

Button

²⁶to see the Status Bar.

Note, however, that when the PBC is on,

some features may not be available with

that VCD.

There are two versions of the VCD format:

an early version which is simply called

“VCD” and a later version with Playback

Control which is called “Version 2.0” or

“PBC”. The CVR700 is compatible with

both forms of VCD, although playback will

vary according to which version is used

and the specific way in which the disc

was created.

Menu Button j

will turn the

PBC on and the disc will be played

from the beginning.

You will be able to see the current track

number, followed by a slash and the total

number of tracks on the disc. You will

also be able to see the elapsed time for

the current track. However, you may not

be able to change the track number or uti-

lize the Time Search function as with an

audio CD.

Even though VCD discs provide video,

because the format is based on CD tech-

nology, the playback functions for a VCD

disc are similar to CD. To play a VCD disc,

place it in the CVR700 as you would do

with any other CD or DVD disc. The unit

takes a few seconds to read the disc’s

contents. The VCD Disc Type Indicator

Awill light in the front panel. If the disc

has playback control, a PBCONbanner

will appear on screen briefly.

Use of functions when the PBC is on will

vary according to the disc type. Note that

if the disc was created with Playback

Control (PBC – see below), it is not possi-

ble to change track numbers directly.

Playback Control

VCD discs made under the Revision 2.0

specification will usually offer PBC play-

back control.

NOTE: Some VCDs are created without

playback control, so that only a VCD file

exists on the disc. The CVR700 may iden-

tify this disc with a CDROM Disc Type

Indicator A, similar to a compressed

audio disc. In that case, the disc is navi-

gated the same way as an MP3 or WMA

disc. A screen similar to the one in Figure

52 will appear, and you will need to

The PBCONbanner will appear when

the disc is played.

With PBC, you can select titles and

navigate the disc as with DVDs. However,

the access to some functions may be

prohibited by the PBC playback control;

in that case, the FEATURENOT

AVAILABLEbanner will appear

on screen.

select the VCD file and play it manually.

When the VCD is made without PBC,

the disc can be controlled the same as

an audio CD, but direct track access by

entering a number is not possible without

opening the Status Bar.

With PBC, many discs include chapter

selection menus that are similar to those

found on DVDs. However, on VCD discs

the disc menu (if any) is accessed and

controlled differently than on DVDs.

Figure 52

Keep in mind that the exact level of func-

tionality for any VCD will vary widely and

it is ultimately determined by the way the

disc was created, not by the CVR700, par-

ticularly if the disc has been created

under VCD Version 2.0 with Playback

Control (see “Playback Control”).

• Play will start with the first track

(which may be an intro), then leading to

the VCD menu (if any) automatically.

• NEXT (Skip Forward) will skip to the

VCD menu from the intro (Track 1)

directly.

When playing VCD discs, most standard

DVD/CD playback controls are used,

including Play, Stop, Pause, Track Skip

Forward and Reverse and Fast Forward or

Reverse Search. The functions Slow Play

and Step and the Zoom function are not

available with VCDs.

• Once the menu options appear on the

screen, make your selection by pressing

the Numeric Keys

that corre-

spond to your desired choice. The

desired selection will begin playing

automatically.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROGRAMMED PLAY

Programmed play allows you to select

any track from an audio CD for playback

in a specific order. This type of program-

ming is particularly useful for parties or

other situations in which you desire con-

tinuous playback of specific selections for

a long period of time.

Begin by stopping play and pressing the

Program Button S

and a list of

loaded discs with their disc types will

appear on screen (see Figure 53). How-

ever, you may only program tracks on the

current disc.

The Upper Display Line Hwill display

T– followed by the disc number. This

represents the track number on the disc,

which will appear in the order pro-

grammed. Use the Numeric Keys

to enter the number of the first

track you wish to program into your

playlist, and press the Set Button

to enter it. Continue entering

tracks in this fashion to create your list,

and press the Play Button e

play the list.

To edit the list, press the Program

Button S followed by the ⁄

Navigation Button q

to view the

next track in the list or to add a track to

the end of the list, or the ¤ Navigation

Button q

to view the previous

track in the list.

Once you have programmed a list, you

may repeatedly press the Program

Button S

to toggle in and out of

programmed play mode. However, to

cancel the program, you must remove

the disc from the CVR700.

Figure 53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROGRAMMING THE CVR700R2 REMOTE

The CVR700R2 remote is factory-pro-

grammed for all functions needed to

operate the unit. In addition, it is also

preprogrammed to operate most recent

JBL DVD players and changers, CD play-

ers and changers, CD recorders and cas-

sette decks. The codes for other brand

devices may be programmed into the

CVR700R2 remote using its extensive

library of remote codes or a head-to-head

learning process for codes not in the

internal library.

corder, which do not have remote-

controlled power on/off codes, you

must insert a disc or tape and

begin play.

• DVI/COMPUTER: Used to program an

external device equipped with a digital

video interface (DVI) video output, such

as an external DVD player, cable televi-

sion box, satellite television receiver or

HDTV tuner.

2. Press and hold the Remote Menu

Button b for about 3 seconds

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

Information Display c. Release

the button when the red light under

the Set Button sappears.

5. SELECT A DEVICE will appear in

the LCD display (Figure 57). Press the

⁄/¤Navigation Controls qto

scroll through the list of device types

available for the source you have

selected, and press the Set Button

swhen the device you wish to set

the codes for appears. For this exam-

ple, we will select “HDTV-Tuner” to

enter the codes needed to operate your

HDTV set-top tuner.

H O L D

B U T T O N

Important Notes on Using the

F O R

S E C O N D S

CVR700R2 Remote: The CVR700R2

remote control is capable of operating

up to nine devices, including the CVR700.

In order to segregate the control com-

mands for each device, the remote’s logic

contains a separate “page” of commands

for each device that is called up when

that device’s selector has been pressed.

For example, in order to access the

commands that control the CVPD50

screen, such as Letterbox or PIP, you must

first press the Screen Selector e, so

that the word SCREEN appears in the

upper line of the LCD Information

Display c.

Figure 54

3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD

display and the Set Button swill

remain illuminated in red. Press the

Set Button sto begin the process

of selecting a device and locating the

proper remote codes.

S E L E C T

D E V I C E

H D T V - T U N E R

Figure 57

If you make a mistake at any time, press

the Exit/Cancel Button rto return to

the previous menu screen, or press the

Remote Menu Button b to exit the

remote menu system.

M A I N

M E N U

P R O G R A M

C O D E

Figure 55

4. PROGRAM CODE will appear in the

6. At the next menu screen on the

remote (Figure 58), press the Set

Button sto enter the Manual

mode, which means that you will

select the brand name of the device

from the list programmed into the

remote’s memory.

LCD display (Figure 56). Press the

⁄

Navigation Button qto

Most of the programming functions in

this section begin by using the remote

control’s own menu system, which is

accessed by pressing and holding the

Remote Menu Button b until the

Main Menu appears. In order to access

this function, you must first press the

System Selector f.

scroll through the list of source inputs

and press the Set Button qwhen

the source you wish to set the codes

for appears. For this example, we will

select “AUX” to enter the codes needed

to operate your HDTV tuner. As a

shortcut, once the screen shown in

Figure 56 appears, you may jump to

the desired source by pressing its

Input Selector d.

P R O G R A M

C O D E

M A N U A L

Figure 58

Programming Product Codes

7. The next menu screen on the remote

(Figure 59) will show the start of the

list of available brands. Press the

Thanks to the remote’s advanced technol-

ogy and two-line LCD display, it is no

longer necessary to look up cumbersome

codes when programming the remote; fol-

lowing the steps outlined below, you sim-

ply search for the brand name from the

remote’s memory. We recommend that

you first try the preprogrammed code

entry method. If that procedure is not

successful, then try the code-learning

method.

P R O G R A M

C O D E

⁄

A U X

Navigation Buttons quntil

the brand name of the device you are

programming into the remote appears

on the lower line of the display and

then press the Set Button s. As a

shortcut, once the screen shown in

Figure 57 appears, you may jump to

the first letter of the desired brand

name by pressing the corresponding

Alphanumeric Key l repeatedly

until the brands beginning with the

desired letter appear. For example,

to jump to the brand “RCA”, simply

press the “7” key three times, until

the first brand beginning with an “R”

appears, and then scroll to the

Figure 56

NOTE: Each source may be programmed

with certain device types:

• AUX: Used to program a TV, HDTV tuner,

VCR, TV/VCR combination device, exter-

nal DVD or CD player, cable box or satel-

lite receiver.

• VCR: Used to program a videocassette

recorder or TV/VCR combination device.

Preprogrammed Code Entry

The easiest way to program the remote

for operation with a source device from

another brand is to follow these steps:

• CBL/SAT: Used to program a cable tele-

vision box, satellite television receiver or

HDTV tuner.

1. Turn on the power to the device you

wish to program into the remote. This

is important, as in a later step you will

need to see whether the device turns

off to determine whether the remote

has been programmed for the proper

remote codes. In order to program

codes for a game console or cam-

• GAME/CAM: Used to program a video

game console or camcorder.

desired name.

• DR: Used to program a digital recorder,

such as a DVD recorder, CD recorder,

D-VHS recorder, TiVo, or personal video

device (digital video recorder) containing

a hard disc drive.

S E L E C T

R C A

B R A N D

Figure 59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTE: If the brand name for the product

you wish to program does not appear in

the list, the codes may still be available,

as some manufacturers share codes.

If the desired brand is not listed, press

the Exit/Cancel Button rto exit the

programming process, and skip to the

instructions shown at right for the

“Automatic” method of programming the

remote. If desired, or if the codes for your

brand are not part of the remote’s library

at all, you may still use the remote to

program most infrared-controlled prod-

ucts by “learning” the commands from

the product’s original remote into the

remote. The instructions for Learning

Commands are on page 78.

ask whether the game has stopped. For a

camcorder, the remote will ask whether

the camera has zoomed in.

be in the code library. You may fill in the

codes for any button that does not oper-

ate properly by using the learning tech-

nique shown on this page.

10. If the device being programmed into

the remote does not turn off after you

have pressed the “1” Button l,

repeat Steps 8 and 9 by pressing the

available numeric keys shown until

the device turns off. If the device still

does not turn off after all choices

have been tried, or if there is only one

number key shown as available to try,

the code for this specific device is not

in the remote library under that brand

name. If that is the case, press the

Exit/Cancel Button rto exit the

manual programming mode.

Automatic Code Entry

In addition to manual code selection using

the brand name list, it is also possible to

automatically search through all the codes

that are stored in the remote’s library to

see whether a device will respond even

if it is not listed among the brands that

appear when you program the remote

manually. To automatically search through

the codes that are available for a specific

device type (e.g., DVD, VCR), follow these

steps:

1. Turn on the power to the device you

wish to program into the remote. This

is important because in a later step you

will need to see whether the device

turns off to determine whether the

remote has been programmed for the

proper remote codes. In order to pro-

gram codes for a game console or

camcorder, which do not have

8. The next step is important, as it

determines which codes will operate

the source device or display. Point

the remote at the device being pro-

grammed and, following the instruc-

tions shown in the remote’s LCD

Information Display c(Figure

60), press and release the Numeric

Keys kshown on the menu screen

one at a time, starting with the “1”

button. After you press the “1”

Remember that the codes may still be

stored in the remote’s library under

another brand, and you can have the

remote control search for them by fol-

lowing the instructions below for

automatic programming. You may

also manually “learn” the codes for

most devices into the remote by fol-

lowing the Learning Commands

instructions on page 78.

remote-controlled power on/off

codes, you must insert a disc or tape

and begin play.

11. When the device being programmed

does turn off after a numeric key has

been pressed, you must press the Set

Button swithin five seconds to

enter the setting into the remote’s

memory. After you press the Set

Button k, the remote’s LCD screen

will briefly go blank as the code is

being transmitted, but you will see

2. Press and hold the Remote Menu

Button b for about three seconds

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

Information Display c. Release

the button when the red light under

the Set Button sappears.

the “transmit” icon

in the upper

right corner of the display to serve as

confirmation that the remote is send-

ing out commands.

Button s, the top line of the LCD

display will read SAVING… and

then the word SAVED will flash four

times in the center of the bottom line.

P R E S S

N U M B E R

C O D E

O F

1 0

3. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

(Figure 55) will appear in the LCD dis-

play and the Set Button swill

remain illuminated in red. Press the

Set Button sto begin the process

of selecting a device and locating the

proper remote codes.

Figure 60

12. When the codes are saved, the

remote will return to normal opera-

tion, and whenever you press the

Input Selector Button dthat was

just programmed, the codes for the

new device will be used.

9. After you press and release the num-

ber key, watch the device being pro-

grammed to see whether it turns off.

As shown in the instructions that will

appear on the next menu screen

4. PROGRAM CODE will appear in the

LCD display (Figure 56). Press the

⁄/¤ Navigation Controls qto

scroll through the list of sources and

press the Set Button swhen the

source you wish to set the codes for

appears. For this example, we will

select “AUX” to enter the codes

needed to operate your HDTV

(Figure 61), if your device has turned

off, press the Set Button s, and

then skip to Step 11. If the unit does

not turn off, proceed to Step 10.

NOTE: Some brands share a common

remote control code for “Power Off” for

many models. For that reason it is possi-

ble that even though the remote appears

to be properly programmed, you may find

that some buttons do not appear to issue

the correct command. If this is the case,

repeat the procedure outlined above, but

if more than one numeric key selection is

suggested in Step 8, try a different num-

ber to see whether the remote operates

correctly. Although the remote is prepro-

grammed with an extensive library of

codes for many major brands, it is also

possible that you may have attempted to

program a product that is too new or too

old, and thus not all of its commands will

P O W E R

O F F ?

: S E T

N :

N E X T

O R

C L R

Figure 61

NOTE: Since game consoles and cam-

corders have no remote control power

on/off codes, the test command used to

program a remote code will be different.

In order to program codes for a game

console or camcorder, which do not have

remote-controlled power on/off codes,

you must insert a disc or tape and begin

play. For a game console, the remote will

set-top tuner.

5. SELECT A DEVICE will appear in

the LCD display (Figure 57). Press the

⁄

Navigation Button qto

scroll through the list of device cate-

gories and press the Set Button s

when the device for which you wish

to set the codes appears. For this

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

example, we will select “HDTV-

Tuner” to enter the codes needed to

operate your HDTV set-top box.

will have to “learn” them into the

remote following the instructions

shown in the next section. Press the

Remote Menu Button b as

instructed to exit the programming

process.

then the word SAVED will flash four

times in the center of the bottom line.

14. When the codes are saved, the

remote will return to normal opera-

tion, and whenever you press the

Input Selector Button dthat was

just programmed, the codes for the

new device will be used.

6. At the next menu screen on the

⁄

remote, press the Navigation

Button qso that the bottom line of

the LCD display reads AUTO (Fig. 62)

and then press the Set Button sto

enter the Automatic programming

mode.

R E A C H

E N D

P O I N T

P R E S S

R E M

K E Y

Figure 64

Learning Commands

10. If the device being programmed does

turn off after following the instruc-

tions in Step 7, you will need to

verify the code set by pressing the

Numeric Keys l in sequence,

as instructed in Figure 60. Point the

remote at the device being pro-

grammed, and press the “1” Button

l to see whether the device turns

back on.

On occasions when the remote does not

contain the codes for a particular prod-

uct’s remote in its built-in library, or when

you wish to program a missing or special

function into one button of a device, the

remote’s learning capability allows you

to do that. To teach commands from one

product’s remote into the remote, follow

the steps below:

P R O G R A M

D E V I C E

A U T O

Figure 62

7. As instructed on the next menu

⁄

screen, press the Navigation

Button qto begin the automatic

code search process. Your confirma-

tion that the remote is sending out

commands is the movement of a

square block across the top line of

the LCD display screen while the bot-

tom line reads PLEASE WAIT….

You will also see the transmit icon in

the upper right corner of the LCD dis-

play’s top line to remind you that the

remote is working even though you

may not see anything happening to

the device being programmed.

The process requires that both the

device’s original remote and the

11. After pressing and releasing the “1”

Button l, check to see whether

the device has turned back on. If it

has, skip to Step 12. If it does not

turn off, press the “2” Button l,

or the next button in the numeric

sequence if you are repeating the pro-

cedure, as instructed by the LCD

screen in Figure 65.

CVR700R2 remote be available. Before

pressing any buttons on either remote,

place them so that the IR transmitter on

the remote from the device to be pro-

grammed is facing the Infrared Lens

on the CVR700R2 remote, pointing to

the area next to the slots over the EzSet

Microphone Sensor r. The two

remotes should be no more than an inch

apart, and there should not be any direct

sunlight or other bright light source near

the remotes.

8. It will take a few seconds for the

remote to send out the first group of

commands, after which you will see a

new display in the LCD screen, as

shown in Figure 63. Following the

instructions, if the device being pro-

grammed has not turned off, press

P O W E R

O N ?

S E T

N -

Figure 65

12. When pressing the “1” button does

not turn the device being programmed

back on, repeat the procedure by try-

ing the remainder of the Numeric

Keys l in sequence, each time

pressing and then releasing the but-

ton to see whether the new device

turns back on. When it does, skip to

the next step. However, if you try all

10 numeric keys and find that the unit

will not turn on, you won’t be able

to use this method to program the

device. Press the Remote Menu

Button b to exit the programming

process. You’ll need to follow the

Learning Commands instructions below

to enter the codes for this device into

the remote.

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

Button b for about 3 seconds

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

Information Display c. Release

the button when the red light under

the Set Button sappears.

⁄

the Navigation Button qagain

to send another group of codes (see

Step 9). If the device being programmed

has turned off, press either the “1” or

“0” key and skip to Step 10.

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD

display and the Set Button swill

remain illuminated in red. Press the

P O W E R

O F F ?

0 N

Figure 63

⁄

Navigation Button quntil

⁄

9. By pressing the Navigation

LEARN appears on the bottom line

of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure

66. Press the Set Button sto

begin the process of learning com-

mands from another device’s remote

into the remote.

Button qagain, the remote will

send out a new set of commands.

When it pauses, follow the instruc-

tions shown in Step 8. Depending

on how many codes are stored for

a specific device type, you may have

to repeat this process as many as 15

times. Remember, if the device turns

off, skip to Step 10. When all the

codes for the device being pro-

13. When pressing one of the numeric

keys in Step 11 or 12 causes the

device being programmed to turn

back on, follow the instructions

M A I N

M E N U

L E A R N

C O D E

Figure 66

shown in Figure 65 and press the Set

Button swithin five seconds of

the device turning on. After you press

the Set button, the top line of the LCD

display will read SAVING… and

3. LEARN CODE will appear in the

LCD display (Figure 67). Press the

⁄/¤ Navigation Controls qto

scroll through the list of sources and

press the Set Button swhen the

source you wish to set the codes for

grammed have been tried, the

instruction shown in Figure 64 will

appear. This means that the codes for

the product you are trying to program

are not in the remote library and you

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

appears. The available options are

DVD/MAIN, SYSTEM, SCREEN,

7. If the message shown in Figure 71

appears in the display, press the Set

Button sto try programming the

button again. When the remote

prompts you to press and hold the key

on the original remote again by show-

ing the display shown in Figure 69,

immediately press the button on the

source remote again. To avoid anoth-

er failed attempt, make certain that

the windows on the two remotes are

facing one another.

C O D E

L E A R N E D

E D I T

B U T T O N

DVI/DVD, TIVO, GAME, CABLE, VCR,

TV and FM/AM [TUNER]. We recom-

mend that you learn new codes only

for devices that are external to the

JBL Cinema Vision system. For this

example, we will select “DVI/DVD” to

enter the codes needed to operate an

external DVD player with a DVI output.

Figure 73

11. When you have programmed all keys

⁄

for the desired device, press the

Navigation Button qrepeatedly

when the LEARN MENU (Figure 70)

appears until you see the display

shown in Figure 74. Press the Set

Button sto return the remote to

normal operation.

L E A R N

C O D E

D V I / D V D

8. Continue to hold the button on the

original remote until the LCD display

changes again. If the code was suc-

cessfully learned, you will see the

display shown in Figure 70. In that

case, go to Step 9.

C O D E

L E A R N E D

E X I T

Figure 67

4. The next menu screen (Figure 68) will

prompt you to select the button on

the remote that you wish to program.

Press that button on the remote.

Figure 74

12. If you wish to program the codes for

another device, repeat the procedure

outline above, but select a different

device in Step 3.

If the CODE FAILED display (Fig. 71)

P R E S S

B U T T O N

T O

B E

P R O G R A M M E D

appears again, you may either try to

program the key again, or press the

Note on Learning Function: Remote

control signals can vary from one con-

troller to the next due to different stan-

dard formats adopted by each manufac-

turer. For example, some manufacturers

repeat the code sequence in the initial

transmission, and others insert a special

code to identify the brand or model. Due

to the variety of formats, occasionally an

error may occur in the learning process

even though the CVR700R2 remote has

indicated that the code was learned cor-

rectly. Therefore, it is recommended that

you test the newly learned codes with

the source component. If the code was

not learned correctly, try relearning it.

Usually, after several tries, the code

can be learned correctly.

⁄

Figure 68

Navigation Button qto stop the

process. It is possible that some

remotes may use code sequences or

infrared frequencies that are not com-

patible with the CVR700R2 remote,

and those codes cannot be learned.

When the display shown in Figure 72

appears, press the Set Button s

to exit the Learning system.

5. Once you press the button to be pro-

grammed on the remote, press and

hold the button on the remote control

for the device to be programmed

within five seconds, as instructed on

the next menu screen (Figure 69).

P R E S S

B U T T O N

O N

O R I G I N A L

R E M O T E

Figure 69

C O D E

F A I L E D

6. Continue to hold the button on the

original remote until the menu on the

CVR700R2 remote’s LCD screen

changes. If the code is successfully

learned, you will see the display shown

in Figure 70.

E X I T

Figure 72

9. When a code has been learned suc-

cessfully, you have three options.

When the display shown in Figure 70

is on the LCD screen on the remote,

you may press the Set Button sto

learn additional codes from the but-

tons on a original source remote into

the CVR700R2 remote. Follow Steps 4

through 6 as often as needed to com-

plete the code-learning process.

Changing Devices

C O D E

L E A R N E D

C O N T I N U E

In the factory default settings, the remote

is programmed so that the commands

transmitted correspond to the device

selected by pressing one of the Input

Figure 70

If you see that menu, proceed to Step 9.

If the code is not successfully learned,

you will see the display shown in Figure

71. If that menu appears, proceed to

Steps 7 and 8.

Selectors

3. This is logical, as you

want the remote to control the device you

have selected. However, in some circum-

stances you may have configured your

system so that the devices connected

to the CVR700 do not correspond to the

default device settings and the legends

printed on the remote. For example, if

your system has two VCRs you may

connect the second VCR to the digital

recorder input. There is no problem in

doing that, but in normal operation the

commands issued after selecting the digi-

tal recorder input are not for a VCR.

10. If you wish to change the name that

appears in the LCD display when the

button that has just had a new code

C O D E

F A I L E D

⁄

learned is pressed, press the

A G A I N

Navigation Button quntil the

display shown in Figure 73 appears in

the LCD display. Press the Set Button

sto be taken to a EDIT BUTTON

display. Enter the new name for the

key following the instructions shown

in the Renaming Individual Keys sec-

tion of this manual on page 86. If you

find it more convenient to rename the

buttons at a later time, you may do

that separately by following the

Figure 71

If you don’t attempt to “teach” a remote

code to the CVR700R2 remote within 5

seconds, the words “TIME OUT” will

appear briefly on the second line of the

LCD display, and you will be prompted to

start over by pressing a button on the

CVR700R2 remote (see Figure 68).

The remote allows you to correct that sit-

uation through the “Changing Devices”

process. This enables you to assign the

codes from one type of device to a differ-

You may exit the process at any time by

pressing the Remote Menu Button b.

instructions on page 85.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ent button. For example, in the steps

below, we will explain how to program

the digital recorder buttons to provide the

commands to operate a VCR. Of course,

you may program the remote to have any

of the devices take on the code set of any

other device, as your system requires.

And, with the remote’s “Edit” function,

you can even change the way the name

of the device appears on the remote’s

LCD display so that you see exactly which

commands are being sent.

4. Once the “old” device type has been

selected, you need to tell the remote

which set of remote codes to use as a

replacement for the device just selected.

When the instructions shown in

⁄ ¤

7. After you press and release the num-

ber key, watch the device being pro-

grammed to see whether it turns off.

As shown in the instructions that will

appear on the next menu screen

(Figure 61), press the Set Button

s, and then skip to Step 9. If the

unit does not turn off, proceed to the

next step.

Figure 77 appear, press the

Navigation Button qto scroll

through the list of device categories

to find the name of the device that

you wish to use. The old device name

will remain on the left side of the

LCD screen, while the replacement

device list will scroll to its right. For

8. If the device being programmed into

the remote does not turn off after you

have pressed the “1” Button

NOTE: You may not change the device

types for the DVD/MAIN device

(CVR700’s internal DVD/CD changer), the

FM/AM (TUNER) device, the SCREEN

device (controls CVPD50 functions) or the

SYSTEM device (controls CVR700’s

receiver functions).

continue Steps 6 and 7 by pressing

the available numeric keys shown

until the device turns off. If the device

still does not turn off after all choices

have been tried, the code for this

specific device is not in the remote

library under that brand name. If that

is the case, we suggest that you

press the Set Button sto accept

the codes from another brand so that

the programming is completed, but

remember that you will then have to

program the remote manually by fol-

lowing the Learning Commands

instructions on page 78.

⁄

example, press the Navigation

Button quntil the display screen

reads TIVO<-VCR to have the digi-

tal recorder Button transmit the com-

mands used to control a VCR. Press

the Set Button swhen the

desired device combination appears.

To program the buttons normally assigned

to one device for the commands of

another, follow these steps:

N E W

D E V I C E

T Y P E

T I V O

- V C R

Figure 77

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

Button

for about 3 seconds

5. Once the new device is selected, the

remainder of the process will select

the codes for the specific brand to

be used, and for that reason they

are identical to the way a device is

programmed using manual entry.

Continue the process as outlined in

the next few steps, remembering that

if the codes for your specific device

are not found, you may select any

brand and then “learn” the proper

codes into the remote using the

process outlined on page 78. To begin

the process, start by selecting the

brand of device, as shown in Figure

⁄ ¤

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

Information Display

2. Release

9. When the device being programmed

does turn off after a numeric key has

been pressed, you must press the Set

Button swithin five seconds to

enter the setting into the remote’s

memory. After you press the Set but-

ton, the top line of the LCD display

will read SAVING... and then the

word SAVED will flash four times in

the center of the bottom line.

the button when the red light under

the Set Button sappears.

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD

display and the Set Button swill

remain illuminated in red. Press the

⁄

Navigation Button quntil

CHANGE DEVICE appears on the

bottom line of the LCD screen, as

shown in Figure 75. Press the Set

Button sto begin the process of

reassigning the commands used for a

particular device.

10. When the codes are saved the remote

will return to normal operation, and

whenever you press the Input

57. Press the

Navigation

Button quntil the brand name of

the device you are programming into

the remote appears on the lower line

of the display and then press the

Set Button s.

Selector Button

that was just

programmed, the display will show

the original device type code at the

far left side of the display, with the

name of the new code set type in

brackets. For example, the display

will read TIVO<-VCR in our exam-

ple of replacing the TiVo codes with

those for a VCR.

M A I N

M E N U

C H A N G E

D E V I C E

Figure 75

3. Next, you will select the Input

Selector dfor the device that you

wish to change. When the display

shown in Figure 76 appears, press the

⁄ ¤

6. The next step is important, as it

determines which codes will operate

the source device or display. Point

the remote at the device being pro-

grammed and, following the instruc-

tions shown on the remote’s LCD

Navigation Button qto

scroll through the list to find the

device you wish to use for another

function. In this case, we will select

“TIVO,” and show how to change it to

take on the codes for operating a

VCR. When that device’s name

Macro Programming

Information Display

and release the Numeric Keys

one at a time, starting with the “1”

2, press

Macros enable you to easily repeat fre-

quently used combinations of multiple

remote control commands with the touch

of a single button. Once a macro is pro-

grammed, you may send up to 20 com-

mands with one press of the Power On or

Macro buttons. This will greatly simplify

the process of turning on your system,

changing devices or other common tasks.

Thanks to the remote’s two-line display, it

Button

. After you press the “1”

, the remote’s LCD screen

appears, press the Set Button

will briefly go blank as the code is

being transmitted, but you will see

the “transmit” icon in the upper right

corner of the display to serve as con-

firmation that the remote is sending

out commands.

O L D

D E V I C E

T Y P E

T V

Figure 76

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

is easier than ever for you to take advan-

tage of the power of macro commands.

desired device name appears to move

to the next programming step.

• Power On

• System

• Logic 7

Recording a Macro

To record a macro into the remote’s mem-

ory, follow these steps:

S E L E C T

D E V I C E

D V D / M A I N

As each button is pressed to enter it

into the macro, you will see the but-

ton names appear and then scroll up

on the LCD display as your confirma-

tion of the key entry (Figure 83).

Figure 81

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

Begin entering the individual com-

mands for the macro, in the order

you wish them to be transmitted.

Remember that when you want to

change devices, you must first press

the Input Selectors dfor that but-

ton, and then press the Command or

Function key.

Button

for about three seconds

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

9. When all commands for the macro

have been entered, press the Set

Information Display

2. Release

the button when the red light under

the Set Button sappears.

Button

to save the macro. The

display screen will show the button

to which the macro has been pro-

grammed and the number of steps

used, and the word SAVED will blink

four times in the lower line of the

LCD display. When the display returns

to normal, the macro has been

entered and the remote is ready for

operation.

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD

display and the Set Button swill

remain illuminated in red. Press the

6. The next display (Figure 82) and the

subsequent screens are where the

actual macro programming takes

place. The words at the left side of

the top line of the display show the

button that is being programmed

(e.g., one of the Macro Buttons

⁄

Navigation Button quntil

MACRO appears on the bottom line

of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure

78. Press the Set Button sto

enter the main macro menu branch.

) and the indication at the right

10. As the macro plays, you will see the

steps appear in the remote’s LCD dis-

play. Macros programmed into one of

the four discrete Macro buttons may

be activated at any time by pressing

the appropriate button.

side of the top line shows the number

of macro steps available of 20 possi-

ble steps. Following the instructions

on the remote’s LCD screen, press the

first key you wish to be transmitted in

the macro. In our example, we first

want the CVR700 to turn on, so the

M A I N

M E N U

M A C R O

Figure 78

3. At the next menu screen (Figure 79)

press the Set Button sto begin

recording a macro.

Preprogrammed Macros

Several macro-type commands have been

preprogrammed into the remote, and they

may be activated not by pressing one of

the Macro Buttons X, but rather by

pressing and holding certain other but-

tons as described below:

Power Button

pressed.

should be

M A C R O

R E C O R D

M A C R O

Figure 79

M I C R O

P R E S S

0 0 / 2 0

B U T T O N

4. The next display screen (Figure 80)

is where you select the button that

will be used to recall the macro.

The choices are one of the discrete

Macro Buttons

Navigation Button quntil the

name of the button you wish to pro-

gram the macro into is shown. For

this example we will show how to

program a series of commands that

will automatically be sent out every

time the M1 button is pressed.

Figure 82

7. Once the first command button for

the macro has been pressed, continue

to press the buttons you wish to be

part of the macro, in the order they

will be used. Press each button

within 5 seconds of the last button,

remembering to press the Input

1. Pressing and holding the Power On

1 or Power Off 0 buttons will

execute the Power On (All) or Power

Off (All) commands to either turn on

or turn off all devices whose product

codes have been programmed into the

remote. Note that if you are not using

any external devices, you may simply

power on the CVR700, and the CVPD50

screen will automatically be triggered

to turn on as well.

⁄ ¤

. Press the

Selector

when you are chang-

ing device functions. As the buttons on

the remote are pressed, the remote’s

display screen will show the steps in

the macro as they are programmed

(Figure 83).

R E C O R D

M A C R O

M I C R O

2. Pressing and holding certain Input

Selectors 3 will cause the CVR700

to switch to the selected source input

device, and the device will begin

playing:

Figure 80

5. The next screen that appears (Fig. 81)

is where you select the device for the

first command that will be sent out as

⁄ ¤

[ M / D V D ]

P O W E R

O N

Figure 83

part of the macro. Press the

8. For our example, we first want the

CVR700 Power On button pressed,

followed by the Cable Box On, fol-

lowed by the selection of the Logic 7

mode. To do that, press the buttons in

this order:

a. Press and hold the DVD Selector

3, and the CVR700 will switch

to the internal DVD/CD changer

source. If you do not enter the num-

ber for a disc you desire to play, the

last played disc will begin playing.

Navigation Button quntil the

name of the device appears on the

left side of the lower line in the LCD

display. For this example, the first

button we want to have the macro

“press” is the Power On button, so

the DVD/MAIN is selected. Press

the Set Button swhen the

• Power On

• Cable/Sat

b. Press and hold the CBL/SAT

Selector 3, and the CVR700 will

switch to the source device connected

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

to the cable/satellite inputs. If you

have programmed the cable or satel-

lite set-top box’s remote control

codes, the device will be turned on.

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

remain illuminated in red. Press the

⁄

Navigation Button

until

Information Display

the button when the red light under

the Set Button appears.

. Release

MACRO appears on the bottom line

of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure

78. Press the Set Button

c. Press and hold the VCR Selector

3, and the CVR700 will switch to

the source device connected to the

VCR inputs. If you have programmed

the VCR's remote control codes, the

device will be turned on, and the play

command will be transmitted to it.

enter the main macro menu branch.

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD

3. At the next menu screen, press the

⁄ ¤

display and the Set Button

will

Navigation Button quntil

remain illuminated in red. Press the

the bottom line in the remote’s LCD

⁄

Navigation Button

so that

display shows READ A MACRO

MACRO appears on the bottom line

(Figure 86). Press the Set Button

to begin the process of reading a

macro.

of the LCD screen, as shown in Figure

d. Press and hold the DR (Digital

Recorder) Selector 3, and the

CVR700 will switch to the source

device connected to the DR inputs.

If you have programmed the DR's

remote control codes, the device

will be turned on, and the play com-

mand will be transmitted to it.

78. Press the Set Button

enter the main macro menu branch.

M A C R O

3. At the next menu screen (Figure 84),

R E A D

M A C R O

⁄ ¤

press the

Navigation Button

Figure 86

ountil the bottom line in the

4. The next display screen (Figure 87)

is where you select the macro to be

⁄ ¤

remote’s LCD display reads ERASE A

MACRO. Press the Set Button

read. Press the

Navigation

to begin the process of erasing a

macro.

e. Press and hold the AUX Selector

3, and the CVR700 will switch to

the source device connected to the

AUX inputs. If you have programmed

the device's remote control codes,

the device will be turned on, and the

play command will be transmitted to it.

Button quntil the name of the

macro you wish to read appears. For

this example, we will read back the

Micro 1 macro created in a previous

section. When the name of the macro

to be read appears, press the Set

M A C R O

E R A S E

M A C R O

Figure 84

4. The next display screen (Figure 85) is

where you select which macro will be

⁄ ¤

Button

f. Press and hold the Game/Cam

Selector 3, and the CVR700 will

switch to the source device connected

to the Game/Cam inputs. If you have

programmed the device's remote

control codes, the play command

will be transmitted to it. Note that

for video game consoles and cam-

corders, there are no power on or off

commands. Therefore, only the Play

command (or start/stop command for

camcorders) will be transmitted.

erased. Press the

Navigation

R E A D

M A C R O

Button quntil the number of the

macro you wish to erase appears. For

this example we will erase the Power

On macro created in the previous sec-

tion. When the name of the macro to

be erased appears, press the Set

M I C R O

Figure 87

5. As soon as the Set button is pressed,

the first two steps in the macro will

be appear in the remote’s LCD

⁄ ¤

screen. You may then use the

Button

Navigation Button qto step

up or down through the list of com-

mands stored as the macro. As you

read the display, you will see Input

E R A S E

M A C R O

M I C R O

Figure 85

Selector Buttons

appear in

5. The word ERASED will flash four

times in the bottom line of the

remote’s LCD display, and then the

display will return to its normal condi-

tion. When that happens, the macro

is erased and the remote is returned

to normal operation.

g. Press and hold the DVI Selector

3, and the CVR700 will switch to

the source device connected to the

DVI inputs. If you have programmed

the device's remote control codes,

the device will be turned on, and

the play command will be trans-

mitted to it.

brackets, (e.g., [M/DVD]). When

the step in the macro is a function,

navigation or any other button, it

will appear next to the bracketed

read-out of the underlying device

(e.g., [M/DVD] POWER ON).

6. When you are finished reviewing

Read a Macro

the macro’s contents, press the Set

To check the commands stored in the

remote’s memory for one of the macro

buttons, follow these steps:

3. The PIP Swap Button c is activated

while in screen mode by pressing and

holding that button until the video source

in the picture-in-picture frame swaps

position with the main video source.

Button

to return the remote to

normal operation.

NOTE: It is not possible to edit the steps

in a macro. If you notice an error, you will

need to erase the macro as described

above, and reprogram all of the steps.

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

Button

for about three seconds

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

Erasing a Macro

Once a macro has been created and

stored in the remote’s memory, you have

the option of erasing it (except the pre-

programmed macros). You may do this

at any time by following these steps:

Information Display

the button when the red light under

the Set Button appears.

2. Release

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

display and the Set Button

will

Button

for about 3 seconds

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

device. In the example used, the display

to return the remote to default settings

will appear as shown in Figure 93.

Punch-Through Configuration

P U N C H - T H R O U G H

V O L U M E

Punch-through is a capability of the

remote that allows the Volume controls,

Channel Up/Down buttons or Transport

keys (Play, Stop, Record, Pause, Fast

Forward and Reverse, and Skip Up/Down)

to link to a different device. For example,

if your TV, cable box or satellite receiver

is connected through the CVR700, you

will most likely want to use the CVR700’s

volume control commands even when the

remote has been set to issue all other

commands for the video device. “Punch-

through” enables you to easily program

the remote to do this.

Figure 89

4. The next display screen (Figure 90) is

where you select the device that will

receive the punch-through commands.

In our example, that is the Game/Cam

button, as that is where we want

the CVR700’s volume controls to be

⁄ ¤

P U N C H - T H R O U G H

G A M E

- G A M E

Figure 93

Channel Control Punch-Through

Channel punch-through allows the

Channel Up/Down buttons to send com-

mands to a different device than the one

that has been selected for other com-

mands. For example, you may wish to use

a cable box or satellite receiver as the

source for a VCR, so you would want the

Channel Up/Down Controls g to

transmit commands to the cable box even

though the other button commands are

programmed to operate the VCR.

active. Press the

Navigation

Button quntil the name of the

base device appears and then press

the Set Button

D E V I C E

I N

U S E

T V

Volume Punch-Through

Figure 90

Follow these steps to enable the Volume

Up/Down and Mute controls from one

device to be used when the remote is

otherwise programmed for a different

device.

5. At the next display screen (Fig. 91),

you will select the device whose

Volume Up/Down and Mute com-

⁄ ¤

To program the remote for channel

punch-through, follow these steps. This

example will show how to program chan-

nel punch-through so that the commands

programmed for Channel Up/Down for

the Cable device will be transmitted

when the VCR device has been selected

as the current device.

mands will be used. Press the

Navigation Button quntil the

desired device’s name appears to

the right of the device in use. In

our example, that is the CVR700

(indicated by M/DVD). When the

desired combination of devices

NOTE FOR VOLUME PUNCH-

THROUGH: The remote’s default settings

are for the CVR700’s volume controls, to

be used when any input or device is

selected, with the exception of the

Game/Cam button. There is no need to

program the remote for volume punch-

through for the CVR700’s controls with

other sources, such as DVD. To have the

CVR700’s volume commands used when

the Game/Cam device is selected, follow

these steps:

appears, press the Set Button

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

Button

for about 3 seconds

P U N C H - T H R O U G H

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

G A M E

- M / D V D

Figure 91

Information Display

the button when the red light under

the Set Button appears.

2. Release

6. When the Set button is pressed, the

display will change to show you that

the new combination of control com-

mands is being saved to the unit’s

memory, as shown in Figure 92. The

word SAVED will flash four times

and then the remote will return to

normal operation.

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

Button

for about three seconds

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

display and the Set Button

will

remain illuminated in red. Press the

Information Display

the button when the red light under

the Set Button appears.

2. Release

⁄ ¤

Navigation Button quntil

PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the

bottom line of the LCD screen, as

shown in Figure 88. Press the Set

G A M E

- M / D V D

[ V O L ]

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

S A V E D

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD

Button

to enter the main punch-

Figure 92

display and the Set Button

will

through menu branch.

7. Once the punch-through is pro-

grammed, the Volume Up/Down and

Mute buttons of the second device

named will be used when those con-

remain illuminated in red. Press the

3. At the next menu screen, press the

⁄ ¤

Navigation Button quntil

⁄ ¤

Navigation Button quntil

PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the

bottom line of the LCD screen, as

shown in Figure 88. Press the Set

CHANNEL appears on the bottom

line of the LCD screen, as shown in

trols

are pressed while the mas-

Figure 94. Press the Set Button

to begin programming the remote for

channel punch-through.

ter device is in use.

Button

to enter the main punch-

through menu branch.

Returning the Volume Control

Settings to Default Operation

M A I N

M E N U

P U N C H - T H R O U G H

C H A N N E L

P U N C H - T H R O U G H

If you wish to remove the Volume punch-

through so that the commands for Volume

and Mute are returned to the factory

default setting, follow the steps shown

above, except that in Steps 4 and 5,

select the same device for both the

Figure 88

Figure 94

3. At the next menu screen (Figure 89),

4. The next display screen (Figure 95) is

where you select the device that will

receive the punch-through commands.

In our example, that is the VCR button,

as that is where we want the cable

press the Set Button

to begin

programming the remote for Volume

punch-through.

DEVICE IN USE on the left side of the

bottom line and the PUNCH-THROUGH

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

box’s channel controls to be active.

and Skip Up/Down Jh

name appears to the right of the

⁄ ¤

Press the

Navigation Button

Transport Controls are set at the factory

to operate your DVD player, or the con-

trols of a specific device such as a VCR

or CD player when they are selected.

However, by using the Transport Punch-

Through feature you may program these

controls to transmit the commands for a

different device. For example, you may

wish to operate the transport of a VCR

connected to the VCR input as the

default, rather than the button for the

internal DVD player, as shown in the

following example.

device in use. In our example, that is

the VCR. When the desired combina-

tion of devices appears, press the Set

quntil the name of the base

device appears and then press the

Set Button

Button

D E V I C E

I N

U S E

M / D V D

P U N C H - T H R O U G H

S Y S

- M / D V D

Figure 95

Figure 101

5. At the next display screen (Fig. 96),

you will select the device whose

Channel Up/Down commands will be

⁄ ¤

6. When the Set button is pressed, the

display will change to show you that

the new combination of control com-

mands is being saved to the unit’s

memory, as shown in Figure 102. The

word SAVED will flash four times

and then the remote will return to

normal operation.

used. Press the

Navigation

Button quntil the desired device

name appears to the right of the

device in use. In our example, that is

the cable box. When the desired com-

bination of devices appears, press the

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

Button

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

Information Display

the button when the red light under

the Set Button appears.

for about three seconds

S Y S

- M / D V D

[ T R S ]

Set Button

2. Release

S A V E D

Figure 102

P U N C H - T H R O U G H

V C R

- M / D V D

7. Once the punch-through is pro-

grammed, the transport buttons of

the second device named will be

used when those buttons are pressed

while the master device is in use.

Figure 96

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

(Figure 55) will appear in the LCD dis-

6. When the Set button is pressed, the

display will change to show you that

the new combination of control com-

mands is being saved to the unit’s

memory, as shown in Figure 97. The

word SAVED will flash four times

and then the remote will return to

normal operation.

play and the Set Button

will

remain illuminated in red. Press the

⁄ ¤

Navigation Button quntil

Returning the Transport Control

Settings to Default Operation

PUNCH-THROUGH appears on the

bottom line of the LCD screen, as

shown in Figure 88. Press the Set

If you wish to remove the Transport

Punch-Through so that the transport com-

mands are returned to the factory default

setting, follow the steps shown above,

except that in Steps 4 and 5, select the

same device for both the DEVICE IN

USE on the left side of the bottom line

and the PUNCH-THROUGH device. In

the example used, the display to return

the remote to default settings will appear

as shown in Figure 103.

Button

to enter the main punch-

through menu branch.

V C R

- C B L

[ C H A N ]

3. At the next menu screen, press the

⁄ ¤

S A V E D

Navigation Button quntil

Figure 97

TRANSPORT appears on the bottom

7. Once the punch-through is pro-

grammed, the Channel Up/Down

Buttons of the second device named

line of the LCD screen, as shown in

Figure 99. Press the Set Button

to begin programming the remote for

will be used when those controls

transport punch-through.

are pressed while the master device

is in use.

P U N C H - T H R O U G H

T R A N S P O R T

P U N C H - T H R O U G H

S Y S

- S Y S

Returning the Channel Control

Settings to Default Operation

Figure 99

Figure 103

4. The next display screen (Figure 100)

is where you select the device that

will receive the punch-through com-

mands. In our example, that is the

System button, as that is where we

want the VCR’s transport controls to

⁄ ¤

If you wish to remove the Channel Punch-

Through so that the commands for

EzSet Configuration

JBL’s patented EzSet feature makes it easier

than ever to calibrate the output levels on

your new home theater system for maxi-

mum playback accuracy. In addition to

automatically setting the levels, the

remote’s LCD display allows the unit to

be used as a direct readout SPL meter.

Complete instructions for using the EzSet

features of the remote are found on page

51 of this owner’s manual.

Channel Up/Down are returned to the

factory default setting, follow the steps

shown above, except that in Steps 4 and

5, select the same device for both the

DEVICE IN USE on the left side of the

bottom line and the PUNCH-THROUGH

device. In the example used, the display

to return the remote to default settings

will appear as shown in Figure 98.

be active. Press the

Navigation

Button quntil the name of the

base device appears, and then press

the Set Button

D E V I C E

I N

U S E

M / D V D

In most cases, you will find it easier to

access the EzSet capabilities directly by

pressing the SPL Select Button 9

and following the menu prompts as

detailed on page 51. However, there is

one function of the remote that is avail-

P U N C H - T H R O U G H

Figure 100

V C R

- V C R

Figure 98

5. At the next display screen (Figure

101), you will select the device

whose transport commands will be

⁄ ¤

Transport Control Punch-Through

The Play

Reverse Lf, Pause

, Stop

, Fast Forward/

, Record

used. Press the

Navigation

Button quntil the desired device

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

able only through the remote’s menu sys-

tem being described in this section.

menu system and return to normal opera-

tion or press the Set Button again

name of the base device appears and

then press the Set Button

to immediately use the EzSet feature

to calibrate the system as shown

on page 51.

To avoid having the calibration settings

created with EzSet changed accidentally,

the remote allows you to disable the SPL

Select Button 9 on the remote. To

de-activate the button, follow these

steps:

R E N A M E

D E V I C E

T V

Figure 108

Renaming

5. At the next menu screen, you will see

the device name on the bottom line of

the display with a blinking cursor box

to the right of the device name. Press

While the names given to the buttons

and inputs on the remote represent rec-

ognizable categories of audio/video prod-

ucts, system operation may be easier if

the displays shown in the remote’s LCD

screen are customized to reflect the spe-

cific characteristics of a playback source’s

brand name or the new function given to

a specific button when one remote’s con-

trols are programmed into the remote.

The CVR700R2 remote allows you to

change the name of either a master

device or any button on the remote

using the following steps.

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

Button

for about 3 seconds

‹

the Navigation Button qto

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

return the blinking cursor to the far

left side of the display line. You may

then retitle the device name as

shown in the next step.

Information Display

the button when the red light under

the Set Button appears.

2. Release

6. To enter the new name, press the

Alpha Numeric Keys

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

l. The let-

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD dis-

ters above the numbered buttons

indicate which letter or symbol will

appear when the button is pressed

during the renaming process. The first

press of the button will enter the first

letter shown, subsequent presses of

the same button will change the dis-

play to the other letters above that

numbered key. For example, since the

first letter we need to rename the

input to HDTV Tuner is an “H,” you

would locate the “H” above the “4”

button, and press the button twice.

The first press shows a “G,” the

second press changes it to an “H.”

Consult the table at the end of this

section to see which characters

pressing a particular button

play and the Set Button

will

remain illuminated in red. Press the

⁄ ¤

Navigation Button quntil

SET SPKR LEVELS appears on the

bottom line of the LCD screen, as

shown in Figure 104. Press the Set

Renaming a Device

To rename a specific device/input source

button, follow these steps. For this exam-

ple, we will show you how to rename the

Device/Input Selector normally shown as

“TV” to “HDTV TUNER.”

Button

to enter the main EzSet

menu branch.

M A I N

M E N U

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

S E T

S P K R

L E V E L S

Button

for about 3 seconds

Figure 104

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

3. At the next menu screen (Figure 105)

⁄ ¤

press the

Navigation Buttons

Information Display

the button when the red light under

the Set Button appears.

2. Release

qonce so that EZSET DISABLE

appears in the lower line of the LCD

display.

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

generates.

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD dis-

S E T

S P K R

L E V E L S

E T

D I S A B L E

play and the Set Button

will

7. After you enter the first letter of the

new device name, there are three

options for entering the next

character:

Figure 105

remain illuminated in red. Press the

⁄ ¤

Navigation Button quntil

4. Within 5 seconds, press the Set

RENAME appears on the bottom

line of the LCD screen, as shown in

Figure 106.

Button

Select Button 9. Once the Set

Button is pressed, the word

to disable the SPL

a. To enter a letter that requires a dif-

ferent numeric key to be pressed,

simply press that button. The cur-

sor will automatically move to the

next position and the first letter

accessed by the new button will

appear. Following our example, the

next letter needed is a “D,” so you

would press the “3” button once.

EXITING will flash four times in

the lower line of the LCD display

and then it will return to normal

operation.

M A I N

M E N U

R E N A M E

Figure 106

3. Press the Set Button sand

RENAME DEVICE will appear on

the bottom line of the LCD screen, as

shown in Figure 107. Press the Set

Once these steps are completed, when

the SPL Select Button 9 is pressed,

the remote will show EZSET DISABLE

and it will not be activated.

b. To enter a letter that uses the

same numeric key, you must first

Button

to begin renaming a

To restore the EzSet feature to normal

operation, repeat the procedure outlined

above, except that in Step 3 you should

⁄ ¤

device.

›

press the Navigation Button

to move the blinking cursor

block to the next position. Then

press the Numeric Key as

R E N A M E

D E V I C E

press the

Navigation Button q

Figure 107

so that EZSET ENABLE appears in the

lower line of the LCD display. When that

display appears, press the Set Button

required to enter the desired letter.

4. The next display screen (Figure 108)

is where you select the device that

will be renamed. In our example, that

⁄ ¤

›

c. To enter a blank space, press the

Navigation Button

The first press will move the cursor

to the right, and the second press

and the EzSet feature will be reacti-

twice.

vated. You may then press the Remote

Menu Button to exit the remote’s

is the TV button. Press the

Navigation Button quntil the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

will move the cursor one more

space to the right, leaving a blank

space between the last letter and

the next one.

To rename a specific button on the

P R E S S

B U T T O N

remote, follow these steps. For instance,

this example will show you how to pro-

gram the remote so that FULL SCREEN

appears in the remote’s LCD display when

you press the Tone Button H while in

CABLE mode to match the original cable

remote. Of course, remember that you

will first have to learn the codes for that

function into the Exit button, following

the instructions shown on page 78.

Figure 111

6. Depending on whether or not the but-

ton pressed already has a named

function within the device selected,

one of two things will happen.

8. Repeat Step 7 as needed to enter all

the needed letters, numbers, charac-

ters and spaces.

9. When the text entry is complete,

a. If the button to be renamed already

has a pre-programmed, or previ-

ously renamed title in the remote’s

memory, you will see that name on

the top line of the LCD display, and

a blinking block cursor will appear

on the far left side of the bottom

line of the display, as shown in

Figure 112.

press the Set Button

s. The

LCD display will blink DEVICE

RENAMED three times and then

return to normal operation.

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

Button

for about 3 seconds

Once a device is renamed you will see

the new name on the top line of the

remote’s LCD display whenever the

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

Information Display

the button when the red light under

the Set Button appears.

2. Release

Input//Device Selector

is pressed,

or when any other command/function

button on the remote is pressed after the

main Device Selector is pressed. Note

that renaming a device in the remote will

not change the name of the input used

by the on-screen menu system of the

CVR700.

b. If the button to be renamed does

not have a function in the device

selected, the top line of the LCD

screen will be blank, and a blinking

block cursor will appear on the far

left side of the bottom line of the

display.

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD dis-

play and the Set Button

will

remain illuminated in red. Press the

⁄ ¤

Navigation Button quntil

RENAME appears on the bottom line

of the LCD screen, as shown in

Figure 106.

NOTES ON RENAMING DEVICES:

E X I T

• To move the cursor to the right or left

of the display during the renaming

‹ ›

Figure 112

3. At the next menu screen, press the

process, press the

Navigation

⁄ ¤

Navigation Button quntil

7. To enter the new name for the button,

press the Alphanumeric Keys

The letters above the numbered but-

tons indicate which letters or symbols

will appear when the button is

Buttons

as required.

RENAME BUTTON appears on the

bottom line of the LCD screen, as

shown in Figure 109. Press the Set

• The table below shows the letters,

numbers and characters that may be

accessed by pressing the Numeric

Keys:

Button

to continue.

pressed during the renaming process.

The first press of the button will enter

the first character shown, subsequent

presses of the same button will

change the display to the other let-

ters above that numbered key. For

example, since the first letter we

need to rename the Exit button to Full

screen is an “F,” you would locate the

“F” above the “9” button, and press

the button four times. The first press

shows a “D,” and subsequent presses

step through the other letters avail-

able until the “F” appears. Consult

the table at left to see which

R E N A M E

Key Characters Key Characters

R E N A M E

B U T T O N

[,],/,1

A,B,C,2

D,E,F,3

G,H,I,4

J,K,L,5

M,N,O,6

P,Q,R,S,7

T,U,V,8

W,X,Y,Z,9

-,.,#,0

Figure 109

4. The next display screen (Figure 110)

is where you select the device within

which the button to be renamed

⁄ ¤

exists. Press the

Navigation

There is a limit of nine characters (includ-

ing spaces) for any new device or button

name.

Buttons Quntil the name of the

base device appears. In our example,

since we want to rename a button

within the DVD device memory,

DVD/MAIN should appear in the

lower line of the LCD. When the

desired device name appears, press

• Renaming a device changes the name

of the device only, not any of the indi-

vidual key functions within that device

memory. To change the name of an

individual device, follow the instruc-

tions in the next section.

the Set Button

characters are available by pressing

a particular button.

S E L E C T

D E V I C E

Renaming Individual Buttons

D V D / M A I N

8. After you enter the first letter of

the new device name, there are

three options for entering the next

character:

Thanks to the programming flexibility of

the CVR700R2 remote, an individual but-

ton on the remote may be assigned a fea-

ture or function that is different from the

name that appears as the factory default

when the button is pressed. With the

Rename Button function, it is possible to

rename almost any button on the remote

so that when the button is pressed you

will see a more descriptive or appropriate

name displayed.

Figure 110

5. At the next menu screen you will

select the first button within the

device to be renamed, as instructed

in the display shown in Figure 111.

Select the button (in this case, the

Exit/Cancel Button H) by simply

pressing it on the remote.

a. To enter a letter that requires a dif-

ferent numeric key to be pressed,

simply press that button. The cur-

sor will automatically move to the

next position and the first letter

accessed by the new button will

appear. Following our example, the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

next letter needed is a “U,” so you

would press the “8” button twice.

with which it is used. There is a limit

of nine characters (including spaces)

for any new device or button name.

4. When the remote has been totally

reset and returned to the factory

default condition, a REMOTE RESET

COMPLETE message will appear

(Figure 116) briefly, and then the

remote will return to normal

operation.

b. To enter a letter that uses the

same numeric key, you must first

Resetting the Remote

›

press the Navigation Button

Depending on the way in which the

remote has been programmed, there may

be a situation where you wish to totally

erase all changes that have been made

to the remote and return it to the factory

defaults. You may do that by following

the steps shown below, but remember

that once the remote is reset, ALL

changes that have been made, including

programming for use with other devices,

learned buttons, macros, punch-through

settings and button names, will be

to move the blinking cursor

block to the next position. Then

press the Alphanumeric Key

as required to enter the desired

letter. This is the way you would

enter the second “L” in the word

“FULL”.

R E M O T E

R E S E T

C O M P L E T E

Figure 116

If the remote locks up for some reason

and you wish to reset it without losing

any programming or removing and replac-

ing the batteries, you may perform a soft

reset by removing the cover from the bat-

tery compartment and gently pressing the

small black rectangular button labeled

“RESET”. This should return the remote to

normal operation.

›

c. To enter a blank space, press the

Navigation Button

twice.

The first press will move the cursor

to the right, and the second press

will move the cursor one more

space to the right, leaving a blank

space between the last letter and

the next one.

erased and any settings you had previ-

ously made will have to be reentered.

To erase all settings and reset the remote

to the original factory default settings

and displays, follow these steps:

Additional Notes on Configuring and

Operating the Remote

9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 as needed to

complete entering the needed letters,

numbers, characters and spaces.

1. Press and hold the Remote Menu

• In normal operation, the last selected

device will appear in the upper line of

the LCD Information Display 2.

After one minute with no activity, the

remote will go into standby mode and

the display will go blank to conserve

power. Simply press any button to

return the remote to normal operation.

Button

for about three seconds

10. When the text entry is complete,

while the message shown in Figure

54 appears in the remote’s LCD

press the Set Button

s. The new

name will be entered into the

remote’s memory, replacing the

default name.

Information Display

the button when the red light under

the Set Button appears.

2. Release

11. At this point, you have two options:

2. The remote’s MAIN MENU message

(Figure 55), will appear in the LCD dis-

a. The screen shown in Figure 113

will appear, prompting you to con-

tinue renaming. Press the Set

•

When the remote is being programmed,

it will automatically time-out if no button

is pressed within a 30-second period.

The message shown in Fig. 117 will

appear briefly, and the remote will then

exit the feature being programmed and

any data entered will be lost.

play and the Set Button

will

remain illuminated in red. Press the

⁄ ¤

Navigation Button quntil

Button

to select CONTINUE.

USER RESET appears on the bot-

tom line of the LCD screen, as shown

in Figure 114.

R E N A M E

B U T T O N

C O N T I N U E

Figure 113

M A I N

M E N U

T I M E

O U T

O R

The remote will return to the PRESS

A BUTTON menu option (Fig. 111)

as shown in Step 6. Repeat the in-

structions in Steps 6 though 11 to

rename the next button.

U S E R

R E S E T

R E M

K E Y

P R E S S E D

Figure 114

Figure 117

3. Press the Set Button

to reset

• The programming or configuration

process may also be stopped at any

time by pressing the Remote Menu

the remote. Note that once the Set

button is pressed, the process may

not be stopped. A RESETTING...

message will appear in the upper line

of the remote’s LCD screen, as shown

in Figure 115, while the remote’s

memory is being cleared. It may take

a few minutes for the reset process

to take place, and the length of time

will vary depending on how much

customization and programming has

taken place. Please be patient; as

long as the message appears in the

display the remote is functioning

properly.

b. If you have no additional buttons to

Button

b. The message shown

⁄

rename, press the Navigation

in Figure 117 will appear, the data

entered in the current process will be

lost and the remote will return to nor-

mal operation. Any process that was

underway when the button will be

pressed must be restarted.

Button

until the menu screen

displays EXIT on the bottom line

of the display. Press the Set

Button

to return the remote

to normal operation.

NOTES ON RENAMING KEYS:

• Renaming a button does not change its

function. You may change the function

of an individual button by “learning” a

new code into the remote. See page 78

for more information.

• In most situations, you may press the

Exit/Cancel Button H to simply

exit the current function and return to

the previous menu screen. The Cancel

function is not always available, in

which case you may need to exit

the remote's menu system altogether

by pressing the Remote Menu

Button B.

• When a button is renamed, it will only

apply to the specific device selected in

Step 4. The same button may be renamed

as needed for each individual device

R E S E T T I N G . . .

Figure 115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Extensive use of the programming,

learning and configuration functions of

the remote may consume significantly

more battery power than normal remote

operation. While the batteries should

last for four to six months in normal

operation, you may find that they need

to be changed sooner after the remote

is programmed for the first time.

the internal DVD/CD changer of the

CVR700 (DVD Selector 3) or to con-

trol additional products. When you press

any one of the selectors, its name will

appear on the upper line of the LCD

Information Display 2 to indicate

that you have changed the device being

controlled.

When operating a device other than the

CVR700 or CVPD50, the controls may not

correspond exactly to the function printed

on the remote or button. Some com-

mands, such as the volume control, are

the same as they are with the CVR700.

Other buttons will change their function

so that they correspond to a secondary

label on the remote. For example, the

Slow Play controls also function as the

Channel Up and Channel Down controls

when operating most TV sets, VCRs or

cable boxes. The Channel Up/Down

indication is printed directly on the

remote. For many standard CD players,

cassette decks, VCRs and DVD functions,

the standard function icons are printed

on top of the buttons. For some products,

however, the function of a particular but-

ton does not follow the command printed

on the remote. Even though the name of

the function will appear on the lower line

of the LCD Information Display 2

when the button is pressed, in order to

conveniently see which function a button

controls before you press it, consult the

Function List tables on pages 89–91.

• When the batteries approach a level

below which the remote will not func-

tion, the remote’s LCD screen will dis-

play a LOW BATTERY warning as

shown in Figure 118. We strongly rec-

ommend replacing the batteries as

soon as this message appears to avoid

the loss of programming and configura-

tion settings. These settings are not

lost when the batteries are changed

quickly.

D V D / M A I N

L O W

B A T T E R Y

Figure 118

• The remote has a built-in backlight that

may be activated by pressing the Light

Button

W. This button is made from

a special “glow” material so that it is

easier to find in dark rooms. This glow

feature does not consume any electric-

ity, but the glow will fade when the

remote is kept in a dark location for an

extended period of time. The “glow”

feature may be restored by placing the

remote in normal room light for a few

hours.

To use those tables, first check the type

of device being controlled (e.g., TV, VCR).

Next, look at the remote control diagram

in Figure 119. Note that each button has

a number on it. To find out what function

a particular button has for a specific

device, find the button number on the

Function List and then look in the column

for the device you are controlling. For

example, button number 37 is the Zoom

button for the CVR700’s internal DVD

changer, but it is the Memory button for

the tuner; the +100 button for many TVs,

VCRs, HDTV tuners and PVRs, and the

Enter button for many video game con-

soles and D-VHS players.

• The remote’s backlight will remain lit

for approximately 5 seconds after the

Light Button

is pressed, and it

will stay lit for another 5 seconds if

any key is pressed while the backlight

is on. You may keep the backlight lit by

holding the Light button, but extensive

use of the backlight will reduce battery

life.

• The LCD display will remain on for 10

seconds after a key is pressed and

then turn off to conserve battery life.

• When any button is held for more than

30 seconds, the LCD will turn off and

the remote will stop transmitting the

codes to conserve battery life.

NOTE: The numbers used to describe the

button functions in Figure 119 for the pur-

poses of describing how a button oper-

ates are a different set of numbers than

those used in the rest of this manual to

describe the button functions for the

main remote.

Programmed Device Functions

Once the CVR700R2 remote has been

programmed for the codes of other

devices, press the appropriate Input

Selector 345 to switch the

remote to control the audio section of the

CVR700 (System Selector 5), the

CVPD50 screen (Screen Selector 4),

Figure 119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROGRAMMING THE CVR700R1 REMOTE

In addition to its powerful CVR700R2

remote control, the JBL Cinema Vision

system also includes a smaller CVR700R1

remote intended for everyday use. This

remote features many of the same func-

tions as the main remote, including the

capability of controlling most popular

brands of audio and video equipment,

such as CD players, cable boxes, digital

recording devices, VCRs, satellite

Direct Code Entry

ume, channel and transport controls

work as they should. If functions do

not work properly, you may need to

use a different remote code.

This method is the easiest way to

program your remote to work with

different products.

1. Use the tables in the following pages

to determine the three-digit code or

codes that match both the product

type (e.g., VCR, TV) and the specific

brand name. If there is more than one

number for a brand, make note of the

different choices.

7. If a code cannot be entered to turn

the unit off, if the code for your prod-

uct does not appear in the tables in

this manual, or if not all functions

operate properly, try programming

the remote with the Auto Search

Method.

receivers and HDTV set-top tuners, but in

a more compact design.

2. Turn on the unit you wish to program

into the secondary remote.

Auto Search Method

The CVR700R1 remote control is capable

of operating up to nine devices, including

the CVR700. In order to segregate the

control commands for each device, the

remote’s logic contains a separate “page”

of commands for each device called up

when that device's selector has been

pressed. For example, in order to access

the commands that control the CVPD50

screen, such as Letterbox or PIP, you must

If the unit you wish to include in the

remote is not listed in the code tables in

this manual or if the code does not seem

to operate properly, you may wish to pro-

gram the correct code using the Auto

Search method that follows:

3. Press and hold both the Input

Selector

you wish to control (e.g., VCR, TV) and

the Program Button at the

for the product

same time. When the light under the

Input Selector stays lit,

release the buttons. It is important

that you begin the next step within

20 seconds.

1. Turn on the unit that you wish to

include in the remote.

2. Press the Input Selector

the type of product to be entered and

the Program Button at the

for

first press the Screen Selector

4. Point the remote toward the unit to be

programmed, and enter the first three-

digit code using the Numeric Keys

and an orange light underneath that but-

ton will light. When you press another

button on the remote that is used to con-

trol the screen, the light underneath the

same time. Hold both buttons until the

red light under the Input Selector

stays lit. The next step must

. If the unit turns off, the correct

code has been entered. Press the

take place while the light is on, and it

must begin within 20 seconds after

the light appears.

Screen Selector

firm the current mode.

will blink to con-

Input Selector

again, and

note that the red light will flash three

times before going dark to confirm the

entry. If the Input Selector

Programming Product Codes

3. Point the remote toward the unit to be

The remote is factory-programmed for all

CVR700 functions, as well as those of JBL

DVD players. In addition, by following one

of the methods below, you may program

the remote to operate a wide range of

devices from other manufacturers.

⁄

programmed, and press either the or

flashes nine times instead of three

times, it means that the code was not

accepted. Check the code table to ver-

ify the code, and reenter it. If you

wish to exit the program mode, press

Button

. Each press will send

out a series of codes from the remote’s

built-in database. When the unit being

programmed turns off, release the

⁄/¤

Button

, as that is your indi-

The Input Selectors

each may

and hold any Input Selector

cation that the correct code is in use.

be programmed with one of several device

types, as listed in the table below. Unlike

the main remote control, the device types

on the secondary remote control may not

be reassigned. It is important to program

your external devices into the correct cor-

responding source buttons so that the

desired remote control commands will be

available for use with your device.

for 2 seconds.

4. Press the Input Selector

;

NOTE: Since video game consoles and

camcorders do not have Power Off codes,

look for your game device to execute the

“Stop” function, and your camcorder to

execute the “Zoom In” function.

the light under it will flash three

times before going dark to confirm

the entry.

5. Try all of the functions on the remote

to make certain that the product oper-

ates. Keep in mind that many manu-

facturers use a number of different

combinations of codes, and it is a

good idea to make certain that not

only the power control works, but also

the volume, channel and transport

controls, as appropriate. If all func-

tions do not work properly, you may

need to Auto-Search for a different

code, or enter a code via the Direct

Code Entry method.

5. If the device to be programmed in

does NOT turn off, continue to enter

three-digit codes until the equipment

turns off. At this point, the correct

code has been entered. Press the

Source Device Types

Button

AUX

TV, HDTV, VCR, DVD, CD,

Cable, Satellite

VCR

Input Selector

note that the light under the Input

Selector will flash three

again and

VCR

CBL/SAT Cable, Satellite, HDTV

Game/ Game, Camcorder

Cam

times before going dark to confirm

the entry.

6. Try all of the functions on the remote

to make certain that the product oper-

ates properly. Keep in mind that many

manufacturers use a number of differ-

ent combinations of codes, so it is a

good idea to make certain that not

only the power control, but the vol-

DVD-R, CDR, DVHS, TIVO, PVD

(DVR/PVR – Personal Video

Recorder)

DVI/

DVI/DVD, DVI/CBL, DVI/SAT,

COMP HDTV

The DVD, Tuner, Screen and System selec-

tors may not be reprogrammed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For future reference, enter the setup

codes for the equipment in your system

here:

secondary remote, press the Input

Selector you pressed in

Step 2. It will blink three times and go

power on the CVR700, and the CVPD50

screen will automatically be triggered

to turn on as well.

dark, exiting learning mode.

Source

Button

Device

Type

Product

Code

2. Pressing and holding certain Input

8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for any addi-

tional remotes you wish to “teach”

into the secondary remote.

Selectors

will cause the

CVR700 to switch to the selected

source input device, and the device

will begin playing.

AUX

VCR

Note on Learning Function: Remote

control signals can vary from one controller

to the next, due to different standard for-

mats adopted by each manufacturer. For

example, some manufacturers repeat the

code sequence in the initial transmission,

and others insert a special code to identify

the brand or model. Due to the variety of

formats, occasionally an error may occur

in the learning process, even though the

CVR700R1 remote has indicated that the

code was learned correctly. Therefore, it is

recommended that you test the newly

learned codes with the source component.

If the code was not learned correctly, try

relearning it. Usually, after several tries,

the code can be learned correctly.

CBL/SAT

GAME/CAM

a. Press and hold the DVD Selector

, and the CVR700 will switch to

the internal DVD/CD changer source.

If you do not enter the number for a

disc you desire to play, the last

played disc will begin playing.

DVI/COMP

Learning Codes

In addition to using codes from the

b. Press and hold the CBL/SAT

Selector

, and the CVR700 will

switch to the source device connected

to the cable/satellite inputs. If you

have programmed the cable or satel-

lite set-top box’s remote control

remote’s internal code library, the remote

is able to “learn”codes from remotes that

may not be in the code library. Also, you

may use this function to “learn over” the

codes from a preprogrammed device to

add functions not included in the prepro-

grammed codes. To learn or transfer

codes from an original remote to the sec-

ondary remote, follow these steps:

codes, the device will be turned on.

c. Press and hold the VCR Selector

and the CVR700 will switch to

the source device connected to the

VCR inputs. If you have programmed

the VCR’s remote control codes, the

device will be turned on, and the

play command will be transmitted

to it.

Erasing Learned Codes

The remote allows you to remove or erase

the code set for all the codes that have

been programmed into specific device

buttons.

1. Place the front of the original remote

with the code being sent so that it is

facing the IR Transmitter

secondary remote “head to head.” The

remotes should be between 1 and 3

inches apart.

on the

To erase all codes within a single device,

follow these steps:

d. Press and hold the DR (Digital

Recorder) Selector

, and the

1. Press and hold both the Input Selector

CVR700 will switch to the source

device connected to the DR inputs.

If you have programmed the DR’s

remote control codes, the device will

be turned on, and the play command

will be transmitted to it.

2. Select the button on the remote that

you wish to use as the device selector

for the codes about to be entered.

This may be any of the Input

within which the individual

button to be erased has been pro-

grammed and the Learn Button

Selectors

3. Press the chosen Input Selector

and the Learn Button

2. When the LED under the Input

Selector turns on, release the buttons.

e. Press and hold the AUX Selector

at the

3. Press and release the Input Selector

, and the CVR700 will switch to

same time. Hold these buttons until

the light under the device selector but-

ton turns on. Release the buttons.

for 3 seconds.

the source device connected to the

AUX inputs. If you have programmed

the device’s remote control codes,

the device will be turned on, and the

play command will be transmitted

to it.

4. The light under the Input Selector

will blink three times and go dark,

4. Press the button on the secondary

remote that you wish to program.

and all of the learned codes for that

device will have been erased.

5. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the

button on the original remote that you

wish to “teach” into the secondary

remote. When the light under the

Macros

Several macro-type commands have been

preprogrammed into the remote, and they

may be activated by pressing and holding

certain other buttons as described below.

(The secondary remote does not allow you

to program new macro functions.)

f. Press and hold the Game/Cam

Selector

, and the CVR700 will

switch to the source device connected

to the Game/Cam inputs. If you have

programmed the device's remote

control codes, the play command

will be transmitted to it. Note that

for video game consoles and cam-

corders, there are no power on or

off commands. Therefore, only the

Play command (or start/stop com-

mand for camcorders) will be

transmitted.

Input Selector

blinks.

NOTE: If the Input Selector

flashes nine times during Step 5, the

programming was not successful.

Repeat the steps to see whether the

code will “take.”

1. Pressing and holding the Power On

or Power Off

buttons will

execute the Power On (All) or Power

Off (All) commands to either turn on

or turn off all devices whose product

codes have been programmed into the

remote. Note that if you are not using

any external devices, you may simply

6. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 for each

button on the source remote that you

wish to transfer to the remote.

7. Once all codes have been transferred

from the original source remote to the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

g. Press and hold the DVI/Comp

Selector , and the CVR700 will

Notes on Using the Secondary

Remote With Other Devices

Programmed Device Functions

Once the secondary remote has been pro-

grammed for the codes of other devices,

press the appropriate Input Selector

to switch the remote to control

switch to the source device connected

to the DVI inputs. If you have pro-

grammed the device’s remote control

codes, the device will be turned on,

and the play command will be trans-

mitted to it.

• Manufacturers may use different code

sets for the same product category. For

that reason, it is important that you

check to see whether the code set you

have entered operates as many controls

as possible. If it appears that only a

few functions operate, check to see

whether another code set will work

with more buttons.

the audio section of the CVR700 (System

Selector ), the CVPD50 screen

(Screen Selector ³⁴), the internal

DVD/CD changer of the CVR700 (DVD

3. The Screen Saver Button

activated while in screen mode by

pressing and holding that button until

the screen saver image appears on the

CVPD50 screen.

Selector

) or to control additional

products. When you press any one of the

selectors, it will briefly flash in red to indi-

cate that you have changed the device

being controlled.

• When a button is pressed on the sec-

ondary remote, the red light under the

4. The PIP Swap Button

is activ-

Input Selector

for the prod-

ated while in screen mode by pressing

and holding that button until the video

source in the picture-in-picture frame

swaps position with the main video

source.

uct being operated should flash briefly.

If the Device Control Selector flashes

for some but not all buttons for a par-

ticular product, it does NOT indicate a

problem with the remote but rather

that no function is programmed for the

button being pushed.

When operating a device other than the

CVR700, the controls may not correspond

exactly to the function printed on the

remote or button. Some commands, such

as the volume control, are the same as

they are with the CVR700. Other buttons

will change their function so that they

correspond to a secondary label on the

remote. For example, the Numeric Keys

Volume Punch-Through

The secondary remote may be pro-

grammed to operate the Volume Control

are used to access various functions

of the CVR700’s audio section, such as

selecting surround modes, or setting the

sleep timer. However, in DVD mode these

buttons are used as numbers to access

various items such as track numbers and

time search.

and Mute

functions of the

CVR700 in conjunction with any of the

devices controlled by the remote. For

example, since the CVR700 will likely be

used as the sound system for TV viewing,

you may wish to have the CVR700’s vol-

ume activated, although the remote is set

to run the TV. The CVR700 or TV volume

control may be associated with any of the

remote’s devices. To program the remote

for Volume Punch-Through, follow these

steps:

For some products, however, the function

of a particular button does not follow the

command printed on the remote. In order

to see which function a button controls,

consult the Function List tables on pages

96–97. To use those tables, first check

the type of device being controlled (e.g.,

TV, VCR). Next, look at the remote control

diagram in Figure 120. Note that each

button has a number on it.

1. Press the Input Selector

for

the unit you wish to have associated

with the volume control and the

28 29

Volume Button

at the same time

To find out what function a particular but-

until the red light appears under the

ton has for a specific device, find the but-

ton number on the Function List and then

look in the column for the device you are

controlling. For example, button number

45 is the Night Mode button for the

CVR700’s audio sectioin, but it is the

“Number 9” button for most other prod-

ucts. Button number 31 is the Volume

Down button for the CVR700 and most

products, the Scan Down button for video

games and the Zoom Out button for cam-

corders.

Input Selector

2. Press either the System Selector

or the Input Selector

depending on which system’s volume

control you wish to have active for

the punch-through mode. The Input

Selector

you pressed in

48 49

52 53

Step 1 will blink three times and then

go out to confirm the data entry.

Example: To have the CVR700’s vol-

ume control activated even though

the remote is set to control the TV,

first press the Aux Input Selector

NOTE: The numbers used to describe

the button functions in Figure 120 for the

purposes of describing how a button

operates are a different set of numbers

than those used in the rest of this manual

to describe the button functions for the

CVR700.

eand the Volume Up Button

at the same time. Next, press the

System Selector

NOTE: Should you wish to return the

remote to the original configuration after

Figure 120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

programming a Volume Punch-Through,

you will need to repeat the steps shown

above. However, press the same Input

Selector in Steps 1 and 2.

Transport Control Punch-

Through

Resetting the Remote Memory

As you add components to your home

theater system, occasionally you may wish

to totally reprogram the remote control

without the confusion of any commands,

macros or ”Punch-Through“ programming

that you may have done. To do this, it is

possible to reset the secondary remote to

the original factory defaults and command

codes by following these steps. However,

once the remote is reset, all commands or

codes that you have entered will be

The secondary remote may be pro-

grammed to operate so that the Transport

Control Functions

Channel Control Punch-

Through

The secondary remote may be pro-

21 23

25 27 28

(Play, Stop, Fast Forward, Rewind,

Pause, Skip Up/Down and Record) for a

VCR, DVD or CD will operate in conjunc-

tion with one of the other devices con-

trolled by the remote. For example, while

using and controlling the TV, you may wish

to start or stop your VCR or DVD without

having to change the device selected by

the CVR700 or the remote. To program the

remote for Transport Control Punch-

Through, follow these steps:

grammed to operate so that the channel

control function for either the TV, cable or

satellite receiver used in your system may

be used in conjunction with one of the

other devices controlled by the remote. For

example, while using and controlling the

VCR, you may wish to change channels on

a cable box or satellite receiver without

having to change the device selected by

the CVR700 or the remote. To program

the remote for Channel Control Punch-

Through, follow these steps:

erased and will need to be reentered:

1. Press any of the Input Selector

Buttons

at the same time until the Input

and the ”O“ Button

1. Press the Input Selector

for

Selector Buttons

you

the device you wish to have the chan-

nel control associated with and the

pressed lights.

2. Press the ”0“ Button

three times.

Play Button

at the same time

1. Press the Input Selector Button

3. The LED under the Input Selector

until the light appears under the Input

Selector

2. Press and release the Input Selector

Button for the device that

for the device you wish to have

will blink three times.

the channel control associated with and

the Volume Up Button ¹²at the

same time until the red light appears

Note that this may take a few minutes,

depending on how many commands are in

the memory that need to be erased.

under the Input Selector

2. Press and release the Input Selector

Button for the device that

will be used to change the channels.

The Input Selector you

requires the transport control. The

If the remote locks up for some reason

and you wish to reset it without losing

any programming or removing and replac-

ing the batteries, you may perform a soft

reset by removing the cover from the bat-

tery compartment and gently pressing the

small black rectangular button visible

through the opening where the battery

cover normally latches. This should return

the remote to normal operation.

Input Selector Button

you

pressed in Step 1 will blink three times

and then go out to confirm the data

entry.

pressed in Step 1 will blink three times

and then go out to confirm the data

entry.

Example: To control the transport of a

DVD player while the remote is set to

control an external TV, first press the

Aux Input Selector Button

and

Example: To control the channels using

your cable box or satellite receiver

while the remote is set to control the

VCR, first press the VCR Input

the Play Button at the same

time. Next, release them and press the

DVD Input Selector Button

NOTES:

Selector Button

Channel Up Button

and the

at the same

• To remove the Channel Control Punch-

Through and return the remote to its

original configuration, repeat the steps

in the example above. However, press

the same Input Selector in Steps 1

and 2.

time. Next, release them and press the

AUX Input Selector Button

NOTE: To remove the Channel Control

Punch-Through and return the remote to

its original configuration, repeat the steps

shown in the example above. However,

press the same Input Selector in Steps 1

and 2.

• Before programming the remote for

Volume, Channel or Transport Punch-

Through, make certain that any pro-

gramming needed for the specific TV,

CD, DVD, cable or satellite receivers has

been completed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700R1 TV SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

AKAI

AMPRO

001 070 008

AMSTRAD

AOC

ANAM

001 011 103

045 057 103 106 122

AMARK

103 132

001 002 003 011

059

070

045

ADMIRAL

CANDLE

CAPEHART

CENTURION

CENTRONIC

CITIZEN

001 002 003 011 045 092 094 132

CLASSIC

CONCERTO

CONTEC

CORONADO

CRAIG

CROWN

CXC

045

011

041 045 051 052

132

045

045 132

CURTIS MATHES

DAEWOO

DAYTRON

DIGI LINK

DYNASTY

DYNATECH

ELECTROHOME

EMERSON

FISHER

001 011 092 132

011 022 038 045 046 094 097 105 111 118 132

011 132

073

045

063

074 132

001 010 012 033 045 052 132 141

013 033 045 058

FUNAI

FUTURETECH

045

001 011 014 015 026 057 068 098 141

053

011

076

001 011 015 016 017 018 029 072 132

148

GRUNDIG

HALL MARK

HARMAN KARDON

HITACHI

INFINITY

INKEL

JENSEN

JC PENNEY

JVC

KAWASHO

KEC

019 148

001 011 014 015 035 092 132 145

038 040

045

KENWOOD

KTV

KLOSS

001 010 045 079 132

002 060 132

KMC

002 060 132

LG (GOLDSTAR)

LODGENET

LXI

LUXMAN

LOGIK

011 101 103 104 110 118 128 132

013 021 069 077 145 148

011 069

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MATSUI

MEMOREX

METZ

001 003 011 060 061 065 118 132 145 148

001 074 148

011 013 069

MGA

001 011 033 044 050 068 074

001 006 008 011 033 042 044 095 100 115

093

MIDLAND

MITSUBISHI

MOTOROLA

NAD

021 031 045

NIKEI

NATIONAL

021 031 045

036

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

NEC

ONKING

ONWA

001 013 022 025 042 057 121 123 125

045

OPTONICA

ORION

PANASONIC

PENNEY

PHILCO

025 077 080 081 082 083 084

036 038 057 087 120 148

068

001 003 011 045 060 061 065 118 132 148

PHILIPS

001 003 011 040 060 067 088 132 145 148

001 011 024 029 031 032 086 089

011 132

011 030 059 122 132 133

038 057 087

011 025 045 048 056 062 066 118 132

001 009 011 026 029 057 071 098 133 145

PIONEER

PORTLAND

PROSCAN

PROTON

QUASAR

RADIO SHACK

RCA

REALISTIC

RUNCO

SAA

013 025 045 048 056 062 066

004 005

011 045

SSS

SAMPO

011 045

001 059 011

SAMSUNG

SANYO

SCOTT

051 092 096 104 107 011 118 128 132 145

013 027 037 041 054 058 078 091

011 033 045 132

SEARS

SHARP

011 021 026 033 058 132 145 148

006 011 020 025 028 033 034 077 099 132

SIGNATURE

SONY

069

043 055 067 075 085 116 117 130 136

003 011 033 045

103

002

001 003 011 060 061 064 065 145 148

039

057 063 077

SOUNDESIGN

SPECTRICON

SUPREMACY

SYLVANIA

SYMPHONIC

TANDY

TATUNG

TECHWOOD

TEKNIKA

TELERENT

TERA

057 063 077

011

001 003 011 033 045 069 092 094 132

069

007 011

TMK

THOMSON

TOSHIBA

TOTEVISION

UNIVERSAL

VIDEO CONCEPTS

VIDTECH

WARDS

047 049

013 021 035 042 052 063 092 102 108 109 112 113 114 119

132

014 015

008

011

011 014 015 033 061 065 132 148

001 011

011 045

YAMAHA

YORK

YUPITERU

ZENITH

ZONDA

011 045

069 070 090 094 103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700R1 HDTV SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

960

961

957

959

958

MOTOROLA

RCA

SAMSUNG

ZENITH

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700R1 VCR SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

AIWA

AKAI

191

173 199 201 259 260 277

AMPRO

ASA

227 285

ANAM

190 221

169 195 199

285 286 288

185 190 221 286 291

AUDIO DYNAMICS

CANDLE

CANON

CITIZEN

CRAIG

285

154 196 267

CURTIS MATHES

DAEWOO

X DUAL

DYNATECH

ELECTROHOME

EMERSON

FISHER

190 221

163 165 168 220 249 253 254

169 195 199

191 208

214

174 182 186 193 201 238 263

154 167 168 191 293

FUNAI

154 167 168 191 293

190 218 221 227 244 275 278

GO VIDEO

HARMAN KARDON

HITACHI

INSTANT REPLAY

JCL

JENSEN

JC PENNEY

JVC

264 268

169 200

162 191 199 218 269 281

190 221

190 199 221

169 170 190 196 221 238

169 190 199 203 205 210 215 262 281 283

KENWOOD

LG(GOLDSTAR)

LLOYD

171 195 199 203

169 170 177 238 243 258

170 171 191 238

LXI

MAGIN

196

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MARTA

190 191 221 222 223

169 190 221 222 224

238

MATSUI

MEI

238

190

MEMOREX

MGA

MTC

154 168 171 190 191 208 227 238 266 271

200 201 214

MINOLTA

MITSUBISHI

MOTOROLA

MULTITECH

NAD

NATIONAL

NEC

170 177

170 176 177 200 201 204 206 214 216 282 296

172 175

191

290 291

169 195 199 203

NORDMENDE

OPTIMUS

OPTONICA

PANASONIC

PENTAX

199

159

208 209

164 187 188 221 265 276

170 177 190 218 221

190 191 221 222

PHILCO

PHILIPS

PILOT

190 191 209 221 222 226 238

238

PIONEER

PROSCAN

PULSAR

QUARTZ

QUASAR

RADIO SHACK

RCA

170 178 203

180 181

227

171

190 221 230 276 295

153 158 159 160 161 258 285 288 291

157 164 170 177 218 244 275 276 278

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

REALISTIC

RUNCO

RICO

153 154 160 168 171 208 209 238 288 293

213 279

SALORA

SAMSUNG

SANSUI

171

184 189 196 239 241 244 249 256 257 260

179 199 203 267

154 165 168 171 266

SANYO

SCOTT

SEARS

174 249 263

154 167 168 170 171 177 221 228 238 293

SHARP

SONY

156 209 221 280

154 166 167 207 211 212 213 231 232 233

SOUNDESIGN

STS

SYLVANIA

SYMPHONIC

TANDY

191

170

190 191 214 221 222

191

168 191

TASHICO

TATUNG

TEAC

TECHNICS

TEKNIKA

THOMAS

TMK

285

195 199

191 195 199

190 221

190 191 221 238

191

TOSHIBA

TOTEVISION

UNITECH

VECTOR RESEARCH

VICTOR

VIDEOSONIC

VIDEO CONCEPTS

WARDS

155 170 198 202 214 236 249 263 293

196 238

196

169

203

196

169 191 201

154 170 174 190 191 196 208 209 263

169 191 195 199

YAMAHA

ZENITH

183 191 203 211 213 227 234 238

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700R1 CD SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

ADCOM

AIWA

804 818 824

827 866 873 911 925

AKAI

805 939

880

776

808

AUDIOACCESS

AUDIOFILE

AUDIO TECHNICA

BSR

799

CALIFORNIA AUDIO

CARVER

CROWN

770 864

812 891 895 896 898 899 900 940 941

797

DENON

EMERSON

FISHER

782 942 943

804 807

778 810 812 823

FUNAI

HARMAN KARDON

HITACHI

881

756 780 795 806 809 821 825 831 835 838 842 843 848 850 851 945

804

JENSEN

JVC

908

931 950 951

KENWOOD

LG(GOLDSTAR)

LUXMAN

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MCINTOSH

MGA

MITSUBISHI

MITSUMI

NAD

769 778 785 817 833 834 903 906 931 933

771

773 790 832 857

794 868

798 813 839 946 947 948

949

787

907

768 829 952 953

NAKAMICHI

NEC

NIKKO

757 954 955

824

808 810

ONKYO

759 760 792 793 800 801 926 930

775 781 791 820 844 845 846 847 859

761 770 830 864 874 913 938

767 794 893 904

OPTIMUS

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PIONEER

PROTON

QUASAR

RADIO SHACK

RCA

784 855 867 878 886 915 916 917

772

770 864

782 881

779 804 836 905

REALISTIC

SAMSUNG

SANSUI

SANYO

SHARP

SHERWOOD

SONY

SOUNDSTREAM

SYMPHONIC

TEAC

THETA DIGITAL

TOSHIBA

YAMAHA

812 813 859 860

783

802 836 889 912 927

788 812 823 837 923

775 813 828 860 869 906 914 922 935 936

758 796 813 860 888

765 781 815 858 870 871 873 887 894 918

879

814 865

766 803 813 841 861 862 865 876 892 901

794

768 829 852 906 910 928

774 786 808 816 890

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700R1 CDR SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

BANG OLUFSEN

DENON

HARMAN KARDON

KENWOOD

PHILIPS

257

261

262

260

259

258

SONY

CVR700R1 DVD SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

APEX DIGITAL

BRAVO

CALIFORNIA AUDIO

DENON

715 730

734 735

694

656 673 676 688 705

DVD VIDEO

HARMAN KARDON

JBL

728

657 658

655 686 720

655

JVC

KENWOOD

KLH

660

661 704 723

722

LG(GOLDSTAR)

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MITSUBISHI

NAD

659 709 718 724 737

687 710

687 713

677 690

664 716

ONKYO

663 669 702

OPTIMUS

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PIONEER

PROCEED

PROSCAN

RCA

665 704

678 679 684 688 689 698 706 732

687 710

664 666 674 692 695 700 719

714

657 658 691

657 658 672 691

681

RUNCO

SAMSUNG

SANYO

SHARP

685 707 708 733

667 703

675 682 704 727

669 683 697 699 721 729

680

SONY

TECHNICS

THOMSON

TOSHIBA

YAMAHA

ZENITH

657 658

663 664 687 711 712 731

670 671 684 717

659 687 693 709 718 736

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700R1 DVD-R SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

BROKSONIC

CYBER HOME

GO VIDEO

JVC

017

020

014

012

LITE ON

021

MAGNAVOX

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PIONEER

RCA

016

005 006 007 008 009

016

004 015

019

SAMSUNG

SANSUI

SONY

TOSHIBA

ZENITH

013

017

001 002 003

010 011 018

014

CVR700R1 D-VHS SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

JVC

MITSUBISHI

602

601

CVR700R1 GAME SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

SONY PLAYSTATION2

MICROSOFT X BOX

002

001

CVR700R1 CAMCORDER SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

CANON

JVC

PANASONIC

SAMSUNG

SONY

265 266

262

263

257 258

259 260 261

264

SHARP

CVR700R1 TIVO SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

DIRECTV

PIONEER

518

513

SERIES 2 DVR

TOSHIBA

OTHER TIVO

514 521

515

517 519 520

CVR700R1 PVR (DVR) SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

DAEWOO

ECHOSTAR

EXPRESSVU

HUGHES

HYUNDAI

KEEN

769 772

782 783 784

782

785 795

786

777

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

778 791

779 785 792 795

PROSCAN

RCA

REPLAY TV

SONIC BLUE

SONY

787

787 795

776 778 780 793 794

778 780

775 781 788 789 790 791 792

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700R1 CABLE SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

ABC

303 305 313 347 350 354 361 412

413

369

323

ALLEGRO

AMERICAST

ANTRONIX

ARCHER

314 316 323 333 414

BELCOR

415

335 415

394

316

CABLE STAR

CENTURION

CENTURY

CITIZEN

316 413

COLOUR VOICE

COMBANO

COMTRONICS

DIAMOND

DIGI

371 392

385 386

328 339

332

416

EAGLE

329 339 348 488

EASTERN

ELECTRICORD

EMERSON

FOCUS

GC ELETRONICS

365 368 372 417

341

414

418

415

378

GEMINI

GENERAL

317 331 334 362

312

GENERAL INSTRUMENT 470

GOLDEN CHANNEL

GOODMIND

G I

339

414

303 305 313 317 319 394 395 398 399

309 310 357 358 363 394 401 403 419 477

HAMLIN

HITACHI

HOSPITALITY

JASCO

303 363 490

376 382

413

JERROLD

LINDSAY

MACOM

303 304 305 313 318 375 395 397 398 399

420

342 493

MAGNAVOX

MEMOREX

MOTOROLA

MOVIE TIME

M NET

319 321 370 384

360

470

337 341

345

NSC

324 337 346 377 492

OAK

PACE

325 340 345 361 396 498 499

481

PANASONIC

PANTHER

PARAGON

PHILIPS

352 355 380 478 479 491

416

360

315 321 322 329 371 387 392

303 311 343 359 421 473 502

PIONEER

POPULAR MECHANICS

POST NEWS WEEK

PRELUDE

PRIMESTAR

PTS

418

325

422

464

320 356 377 378

360

PULSAR

RADIO SHACK

RCA

RECOTON

REGAL

379 413 414

355 380

418

309 357 358 363 401 402 403

REGENCY

REMBRANT

365 417

334

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

SAMSUNG

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

339 374 488

305 306 307 349 350 351 353 354 381 393 404 405 406 407 408 410 411 428 430 431

432 485 486

423

SEAM

SHERITECH

SIGNAL

SIGNATURE

SL MARX

SONY

331

339

303 490

339

429

SPRUCER

STARCOM

STARGATE

SYLVANIA

TADIRAN

TANDY

TELECAPATION

TEXSCAN

TFC

355 383 479 491

304 313 317 318 465

317 339 422

373

339

326

330

338 373

424

TIMELESS

TOCOM

TOSHIBA

UNIKA

425

308 347 348 364 472

360

316 323 333

UNITED CABLE

UNIVERSAL

VIDEOWAY

VIEWSTAR

ZENITH

313 361

314 316 323 333 335 336 341 344 415

366 426

321 324 327 388 389 390 391 492

360 366 367 400 427

418

ZENTEK

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVR700R1 SATELLITE SETUP CODES

Maker (Brand) Name Code Number (3-Digit) List

ALPHASTAR

ALPHASTAR DBS

ALPHASTAR DSR

AMPLICA

561

653

625 645

559

BIRDVIEW

617 628

BSR

562

CAPETRONICS

CHANNEL MASTER

CHAPARRAL

CITOH

523 524 525 528 564

508 518 519 522 583

563

CURTIS MATHES

DRAKE

DX ANTENNA

ECHOSTAR

559

515 520 521 604 616

534 555 565 582 605

509 510 543 567 598 599 600 601 609 614 630

ELECTRO HOME

EUROPLUS

FUJITSU

595

618

527 531 532 537

GENERAL INSTRUMENT 506 511 514 526 548 568 575 606

HITACHI DBS

HOUSTON TRACKER

HUGHES

512

543

619

562

HYTEK

JANIEL

JERROLD

569

511 545 548 570

KATHREIN

LEGEND

613

510

646

LUXOR

MACOM

571

520 568 572 573 574

MAGNAVOX

MEMOREX

NEXTWAVE

NORSAT

540 566

510

510 627

576 577

OPTIMUS

547

PANASONIC

PANASONIC DBS

PANSAT

PERSONAL CABLE

PHILIPS

549 569

513

623

621

578

PICO

610

529 607

PRESIDENT

PRIMESTAR

RCA

511 545 579 615

504 546 611 624 631 639 642

RCA DSS

516

REALISTIC

SAMSUNG

SATELLITE SERVICE CO

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

SONY

552 580 603

507 625 645

538 544 556 591

542

608 620 632

STARCAST

STAR CHOICE DBS

SUPER GUIDE

TEECOM

TOSHIBA

UNIDEN

550

517

530 626 627

533 536 581 593 594 596 612

505 539 540 541 560 629

526 535 539 554 557 584 585 602 604 606

588 589 590 597 622

ZENITH

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

SYMPTOM

POSSIBLE CAUSE

SOLUTION

Unit does not turn on

• Main Power Switch turned off

• No AC power

• Press in Main Power Switch

• Check AC power plug and make certain

any switched outlet is turned on.

• Press the Standby Switch at least

4 seconds after the unit has been

• Standby pressed within 4 seconds

after Main Power Switch

turned on by the Main Power Switch

Disc does not play

• Disc loaded improperly

• Incorrect disc type

• Load disc label-side up; align the disc

with the guides and place it in its

proper position.

• Check to see that disc is CD, CD-R,

CD-RW, VCD, SVCD, MP3, WMA, Photo CD,

DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW

(standard conforming), DVD-Video

or DVD-Audio; other types will not play.

• Make sure disc’s Region Code matches

code shown on rear panel of unit.

• Enter password to override or change

rating settings (see page 54).

• Invalid Region Code

• Rating is above parental preset

No picture

• Intermittent connections

• Wrong input

• Progressive Scan output selected

• Check all video connections.

• Check input selection of TV or receiver.

• Use Progressive Scan mode only with

compatible TV.

• Video Off feature active

• Press Screen Standby Button

to reactivate video circuitry (see page 71).

• Make sure to obtain the most recent

software update for the source unit.

• Incompatibility between DVI (HDCP)

source unit and CVR700

• Port needs to be reset

• Sometimes it helps to simply turn off the

CVR700 using the Main Power On/Off

Switch 0, turn off the master power switch

on the CVPD50 (depressed towards rear of

unit), unplug the JBL Digital Link cable and

unplug the AC power cords from both units.

Then follow these steps in reverse order, and

often the unit will function normally.

• LED on CVPD50 flashing yellow and red • Check AC power cord connections at wall

and unit. Check CVPD50 power switch

(should be depressed toward rear of unit).

See note on page 45.

“Snowy” picture when used with

external DVI (HDCP) DVD player

• Copy protection communication

between the source unit and the

CVR700 was unsuccessful

• Reset the connection by switching sources

on the CVR700, or by stopping and

restarting the DVD.

No sound

• Intermittent connections

• Incorrect digital audio selection

• DVD disc is in fast or slow mode

• Check all audio connections.

• Check digital audio settings.

• There is no audio playback on DVD discs

during fast or slow modes.

• Surround receiver not compatible

with 96kHz PCM audio

• Use analog audio outputs.

Picture is distorted or jumps during

fast forward or reverse play

• MPEG-2 decoding

• It is a normal artifact of DVD playback

for pictures to jump or show some

distortion during rapid play.

Some remote buttons do not operate

during DVD play; prohibited

• Function not permitted at this time

• With most DVDs, some functions are

not permitted at certain times (e.g.,

Track Skip) or at all (e.g., direct audio

track selection).

symbol

appears (see below)

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SYMPTOM

POSSIBLE CAUSE

SOLUTION

The Feature Not Available

message appears

• Requested function not available at

this time

• Certain functions may be disabled by

the DVD itself during passages of a disc.

Picture is displayed in the

wrong aspect ratio

• Incorrect match of aspect ratio

settings disc or video signal

• Change aspect ratio settings (see pages 13

and 27) using the Frame Button `

Letterbox Button z

Remote control inoperative

Disc will not copy to VCR

• Weak batteries

• Sensor is blocked

• Change both batteries.

• Clear path to sensor or use optional

outboard remote sensor.

• Copy protection

• Many DVDs are encoded to prevent copying

to VCR.

To clear the CVR700’s entire system

memory including tuner presets, output

level settings, delay times and speaker

configuration data, press the Main

If the system is still operating incorrectly,

there may have been an electronic dis-

charge or severe AC line interference that

has corrupted the memory or micro-

processor. If these steps do not solve the

problem, consult your custom installer or

an authorized JBL service center.

System Reset

In the rare case in which the unit’s opera-

tion or the displays seem abnormal, the

cause may involve the erratic operation

of the system’s memory or microproces-

sor. To correct this problem, first try turn-

ing off the master power switch on the

underside of the CVPD50 (depressed

toward the front of the unit) and unplug-

ging the JBL Digital Link cable, and the

power cords for both the CVR700 and the

CVPD50 and wait at least 3 minutes.

After the pause, reconnect the AC power

cords and the JBL Digital Link, turn the

CVPD50’s master power switch to the On

position (depressed toward the rear of

the unit) and check the system’s opera-

tion. If the system still malfunctions, a

system reset may clear the problem.

Power On/Off Button

units in Standby mode, and then press

and hold the Mute Button for

to place both

5 seconds. The unit’s software version

number will flash in the Information

Display Ôas an indication that the unit

has been successfully reset.

NOTE: Resetting the processor will erase

any configuration settings you have made

for speakers, output levels, surround

modes and digital input assignments, as

well as the tuner presets. The unit will be

returned to the factory presets, and all

settings for these items must be reen-

tered.

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

JBL CINEMA VISION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CVPD50 Display

Size/Diagonal

50" (1270 mm); 16:9 Widescreen format

Displayable Picture Size (W x H):

Resolution:

Viewing Angle:

43-1/2" x 24-1/2" (932mm x 532mm)

1366 x 768 pixels

<160˚

Contrast Ratio:

Brightness:

3,000:1

1,000 cdl/m

Storage Temperature:

Operating Temperature:

Maximum Usable Altitude:

Power Requirements:

Dimensions (W x H x D):

Display Screen:

Display Screen With Credenza Stand: 48-3/4" x 37-3/8" x 10" (124cm x 95cm x 25cm)

Net Weight:

Display Screen:

–15˚C to +60˚C

+5˚C to 35˚C

6,560 ft. (2,000 meters)

120V AC, 60Hz, 450W maximum, 1W standby

48-3/4" x 29-3/4" x 3-1/2" (4" with wall bracket) (124cm x 76cm x 9cm)

97 lb (44kg)

Display Screen With Credenza Stand: 110 lb (50kg)

CVR7007.1-Channel A/V Receiver/Optical Disc Changer/Video Processor

Optical Disc Player Section:

Applicable disc sizes:

Applicable disc formats:

Video:

5" (12cm) or 3" (8cm)

DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, Video-CD (VCD)

Audio:

DVD-Audio, CD, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, Windows Media 9, Dolby Digital and DTS Audio Discs

Still Image:

JPEG, Kodak Picture CD

NTSC

1V p-p/75 ohms, sync negative polarity

Video Signal System:

Composite (CVBS) Video Output:

S-Video (Y/C) Output:

Y/Luminance:

1V p-p/75 ohms, sync negative polarity

0.286V p-p

C/Chrominance:

Component (Y/Pb/Pr or YUV) Video Output:

1V p-p/75 ohms, sync negative polarity

0.7V p-p/75 ohms

Pb (U):

Pr (V):

0.7V p-p/75 ohms

Video Digital-to-Analog Converters:

Audio Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Audio Dynamic Range:

Audio Digital-to-Analog Converters:

27MHz/10-bit

105dBA

96dB (16-bit), 100dB (18-bit), 105dB (20-bit)

192kHz/24-bit

Audio Processing Section:

Surround modes:

Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Pro Logic,

DTS ES 6.1 Matrix and Discrete, DTS 5.1, DTS 96/24, DTS Neo:6, Logic 7 with 96kHz capability,

3 DSP Modes

Bass management for DVD-Video and DVD-Audio

Inputs:

Composite (CVBS) Video:

S-Video (Y/C):

Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 4

Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 2

Rear Panel: 1

Component (Y/Pb/Pr or YUV):

DVI (HDCP)/Analog RGB:

PIP Composite (CVBS):

Analog Audio L/R:

Digital Audio Coaxial:

Digital Audio Optical:

IR:

Rear Panel: 1

Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 5

Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 4

Rear Panel: 1

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Outputs:

Composite (CVBS) Video:

S-Video (Y/C):

Rear Panel: 2

Component (Y/Pb/Pr or YUV):

Analog Audio L/R:

Digital Audio Coaxial:

Digital Audio Optical:

Headphone:

Rear Panel: 1 (Monitor Out)

Rear Panel: 2

Rear Panel: 1

Front Panel: 1, Rear Panel: 1

Front Panel: 1

LFE/Subwoofer:

Rear Panel: 1

Speaker Level Outputs:

IR:

7 pairs (Rear Panel)

Rear Panel: 1

Audio Section:

Amplifier Type

Advanced PWM

Two Channel Stereo Mode:

100 Watts per channel continuous RMS power into CVSAT50 speakers,

90Hz to 20kHz, @<0.15%

Five and Seven Channel Cinema Modes:

100 Watts per channel continuous RMS power into CVSAT50 and CVCEN50 speakers,

90Hz to 20kHz, @<0.15%

Input Sensitivity/Impedance:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

200mV/47k ohms

97dBA

FM Tuner Section:

Frequency Range:

87.5 – 108MHz

IHF 1.3µV/13.2dBf

70/68dB

Usable Sensitivity:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (Mono/Stereo):

Distortion (Mono/Stereo):

Stereo Separation:

Selectivity:

0.2/0.3%

40dB @ 1kHz

+/–400kHz, 70dB

80dB

Image Rejection:

IF Rejection:

90dB

AM Tuner Section:

Frequency Range:

Signal-to-Noise Ratio:

Usable Sensitivity:

Distortion:

520–1720kHz

45dB

Loop 500µV

1kHz, 50% modulation, 0.8%

+/–10kHz, 30dB

Selectivity:

Video Section:

Television Format:

NTSC

Input Level/Impedance:

Output Level/Impedance:

Video Frequency Response:

Composite and S-video:

Component video:

1V p-p/75 ohms

10Hz – 8MHz (–3dB)

10Hz – 100MHz (–3dB)

General:

Power requirement:

Power Consumption:

Dimensions (W x H x D):

Net Weight:

120V AC, 60Hz

320W maximum, 78W idle, 10W standby

17-3/8" x 6-3/5" x 17-3/4" (441mm x 168mm x 451mm)

24 lb (11kg)

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDEX

4.3 Scaling 58

5-Channel Stereo 30, 34, 62

7-Channel Stereo 62

AC Power Connections 45, 59

Advanced Settings 52–53, 57–58

Advanced Settings Menus 52, 57

Antenna Terminals 23, 43

Aspect Ratio 13, 19, 27–28, 34–36, 54,

57–58

Installation Location 7–8, 39–40,

42–43

Installing CVPD50 39–41

IR Receiver 18, 31, 37–38

JBL On Screen Library 29, 37, 67–68

JPEG 12, 14, 73

Letterbox 13, 27, 34, 57-58

Lip Sync 53

Loading Discs 66

Screen Standby 29, 35, 40–41, 71

Secondary Remote Control 32–38,

92–108

Setting Preset Stations 64

Sleep Mode 16, 29, 59

Source Configuration 46–48

Source Selection 18, 25, 33, 46, 59

Speaker Configuration and Bass

Manager Menu 48

Audio Equipment Connections 21–23,

43–44

Audio Mode Menus 46–47

Audio Surround Mode Chart 62

Auto Mode Tuning 16–17, 26–27, 29,

34, 36, 64

Auto Search Method 77, 92

Auxiliary Input 22, 44, 76

Bass Management 48–50

Burn-in 28, 35, 40–41

Cable Television 4, 21, 43, 76, 106-107

CD 12, 71, 103

Logic 7 25, 34, 47, 60, 62

Macros 80–83

Main Menu 45

Main Remote Control 24-31, 76–91

Manual Mode Tuning 16–17, 26–27,

29, 34, 36, 64

Memory Backup 65

MP3 12, 14, 63, 66–69, 72-73

Mute 31, 33, 59

Night Mode 29, 34, 47, 63

On-Screen Display 45, 53, 55

Operation 59–75

Speaker Crossovers 49

Speaker Crossovers Menu 49

Speaker Distances Menu 50

Speaker Levels Menu 51

Speaker Menu 48

Speaker Placement 42–43

Speakers Polarity 42

Speaker Setup 48–51

Speaker Sizes 48–50

Speaker Wire 42

Speaker/Channel Input Indicators 19,

Channel-Control Punch-Through 83, 95

Cleaning and Maintenance 7

Coaxial Digital Audio Jacks 17, 22, 26,

37, 43–44, 46, 61

Component Video 13–14, 22, 47, 54

Composite Video 21-22, 47, 56

Credenza Stand 39–40

Delay Settings 30, 37, 50

Description and Features 5

Digital Audio Playback 60–64,

Digital Recorder 21, 22, 23, 44, 59, 64,

76, 104, 105

Digital Source Selection 46, 61

Dimming Front-Panel Display 52

Direct Code Entry 92

Optical Digital Audio Jacks 17, 22–23,

26, 37, 43–44, 46, 61

OSD Time-Out 53

Output Level Adjustments 50–52

Output Level Trim Adjustment 64–65

PCM 61

Picture-in-Picture (PIP) 22, 29, 35,

55, 56

Picture Settings 56–57

Picture Settings Menu 56

Power Switches 16, 25, 33, 37, 45, 59

Preset Stations 16, 17, 26, 30, 37, 64

Processor Reset 110

Programmed Device Functions 88-91,

94, 96–97

Programmed Play 75

Programming Product Codes 76–78,

92–93

SPL Selector 25, 51, 84–85

Subwoofer 21, 42–43

Surround Mode Selection 18, 25, 30,

31, 34, 46–47, 60–63

Surround Off 30, 34, 62

S-Video 21–22, 47, 56

System Configuration 45–58

System Menu 46

Technical Specifications 111-112

Theater 25, 34, 62

Tone Controls 26, 37, 59

Trademark Acknowledgements 114

Transport Controls 17, 26, 27, 28, 29,

30, 34, 35, 36, 37, 67, 68

Transport-Control Punch-Through 84, 95

Troubleshooting Guide 109–110

Tuner Mode 16–17, 26–27, 29, 34,

36, 64

Display Settings 57

Display Settings Menu 57

Distances 30, 37, 50

Dolby Digital 31, 34, 47, 60, 62

Dolby Pro Logic 31, 34, 47, 62

DSP Surround Modes 25, 34, 62

DTS 31, 34, 60–61, 62

DTS Neo:6 31, 34, 62

DTS-ES 62

DVI 22–23, 44, 45, 55–56, 76,

DVD 12, 13–15, 16, 46–47, 53–55, 57,

60–63, 66–69, 70

DVD-Audio 2, 19, 25, 46, 54, 60, 66, 70

DVD Auto Picture Resize 57–58

DVD Setup 53–55,

Progressive Scan 14–15

Punch-Through Programming 83–84,

94–95

Random Play 27, 68–69,

Rear-Panel Connections 20–23

Recalling Preset Stations 16, 17, 26,

30, 37, 64

Tuner Operation 64

Turn-On Volume Level 52–53

TV 98-99

Typographical Conventions 3

Unpacking 7–9

VCR 21, 44, 76, 101–102

Video Equipment Connections 21–23,

43–44

Recording 64

Remote Controls 24–38, 76–108

Remote Control Batteries 45

Remote Control Function Lists 89–91,

96–97

Video Monitor 22, 54

Video Off 29, 35, 40–41, 71

Volume Control 18, 26, 34, 52–53, 59

Volume Default 52–53

EzSet 25, 31, 51, 84–85

Fan 21, 53

Remote Control Setup Code Tables

98–108

Repeat A-B 28

Volume Punch-Through 83, 94

WMA 12, 15, 63, 66–69, 72–73

Frame 13, 28, 35, 57–58

Front-Panel Controls 16–18

Front-Panel Information Display 19

Front-Panel Jacks 17, 59

Front-Panel-Display Brightness 52

Hall 25, 34, 62

Repeat Play 28, 69

Resetting the Remotes 87, 95

Resume Mode 15, 68

Safety Information 4, 7–9

Satellite Television 21, 22, 43–44, 76,

108

Headphones 18, 60

HDTV 14

Installation 39–44

Screen Menu 55

Screen Saver 28, 34–35, 40–41

Screen Setup 30, 55–58

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Depth measurement includes knobs and connectors.

Height measurement includes feet and chassis.

All specifications subject to change without notice.

JBL and Logic 7 are registered trademarks, and JBL Cinema Vision, JBL Digital Link and On Screen Library (patent pending) are

trademarks, of Harman International Industries, Incorporated.

* “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works.

DTS, DTS 96/24, DTE-ES and DTS Neo:6 are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

Microsoft, Windows and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

Kodak is a trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.

TiVo is a trademark of TiVo Inc.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other

intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must

be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by

Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTES

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

JBL Consumer Products

250 Crossways Park Drive, Woodbury

New York 11797 USA

www.jbl.com

2004 Harman International Industries,

Incorporated

Part No. CQX1A9142 12/04

A Harman International Company

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Insignia Flat Panel Television NS LCD19 09 User Manual
ION Stereo System PROFILE LP User Manual
Jackson Dishwasher JV 24 B BF User Manual
JVC Car Video System LVT1484 001B User Manual
JVC Printer CU VD50AA User Manual
Kensington Camcorder Accessories K33928 User Manual
Kicker Speaker OC10 User Manual
KitchenAid Cooktop KGCV566R User Manual
KitchenAid Washer KAWE767B User Manual
Konica Minolta Printer 5440 DL User Manual